Air Compressor - Hatlapa Type v105

Technical Documentation
Original 2011-06-21
Deck Machinery - Compressors - Steering gears
for HATLAPA
Compressors
V 105
L20
HSC 11
Start
Start
Start
Piston Compressor
for
Piston Compressor Type V105
of
Original 2011-06-21
Uetersener Maschinenfabrik
GmbH & Co. KG
25436 UETERSEN
GERMANY
Phone: +49-4122-711 0..
Telefax: +49-4122-711 330
Internet http://www.hatlapa.de
E-Mail: info@hatlapa.de
Ref.-No.:
10.2722 / 1
Serial-No.:
10.2722 - 1 - 1
10.2722 - 1 - 2
This technical documentation belong NOT in the office, but in the hands of the
operator
Piston Compressor
Original 2011-06-21
Table of Contents
1
Important Information on this Documentation and Safety
Final Drawings / Specification
Operating Instructions
E-Diagrams
E - Motor
Lubricating Instructions
Service
We recommend reading these instructions through carefully and becoming quite familiar
with the design and operation of the piston compressor before putting it into operation,
this will avoid damage through imporper handling.
Original 2011-06-21
Important Information on this

Documentation and Safety
Information on Manuals ........................................................................................................................... 3
Copyright ................................................................................................................................................. 3
Guarantee................................................................................................................................................ 3
Designations ............................................................................................................................................ 4
Signs Used .............................................................................................................................................. 5
Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................... 5
Ban on Arbitrary Modifications................................................................................................................. 5
General Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................... 6
Safety Equipment .................................................................................................................................... 6
10 Instruments for Operating Surveillance ................................................................................................... 6

11 Safety Instructions for Assembly ............................................................................................................. 7
12 Additional Safety Instructions for Electrical Installation........................................................................... 7
13 Safety Instructions for Operation and Service......................................................................................... 8
Original 2011-06-21
14 Safety Instructions for Maintenance and Repairs ................................................................................... 9

15 Noise Protection .................................................................................................................................... 10
16 Waste Disposal...................................................................................................................................... 10
2 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
1 Information on Manuals
This manual includes all information necessary for guaranteeing the safety as well
as for the operation and maintenance of the equipment.
It is directed at instructed and trained personnel who are responsible for the
operation and maintenance of the equipment.
Only knowledge of this manual can ensure faultless and correct functioning of the
equipment, so its contents must be known to the responsible persons. The manual
should be kept so that the operating and maintenance personnel have access to it
at all times.
2 Copyright
The copyright for this technical documentation remains with HATLAPA.
This documentation is intended for the operator and their personnel only.
Original 2011-06-21
All rights reserved.
3 Guarantee
Guarantee and liability claims for damage to persons and/or objects are excluded,
if caused by one or several of the following circumstances:
Techen, Kerstin
inappropriate use of the equipment,
neglect of the provisions of this documentation,
improper assembly, operation or maintenance,
operation of the equipment with ineffective protective devices,
arbitrary functional or constructive alteration of the equipment,
removal of parts or installation of spare parts or additional components,

respectively, which have not been supplied or approved by HATLAPA,
repairs which have not been authorised by HATLAPA,
impact of foreign bodies in case of catastrophes or Force Majeure.
26.11.2009
3 / 10
4 Designations
Original 2011-06-21
Persons are defined as follows:
4 / 10
The operator is the (natural or legal) person on whose behalf the equipment
is used, e.g. the ships owner.
Operating personnel are personnel trained for the respective work, and who
are authorised to operate the equipment and to remedy disturbances. The
operating personnel must be trained for the tasks they are entrusted with,
and meet the requirements necessary to handle the equipment.
Assembling personnel are personnel trained for the respective work, and
who are authorised to assemble the equipment. They are able to carry out
the tasks assigned to them and to recognise possible dangers because of
their completed specialised training.
Maintenance personnel are personnel trained for the respective work, and
who are authorised to maintain, adjust and modify the equipment. They are
able to carry out the tasks assigned to then and to recognise possible
dangers because of their completed specialist training.
An electrician has electro-technical skills gained by respective education,

masters the legal regulations, and is assigned by the operator to carry out
work on their electrical equipment and appliances.
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
5 Signs Used
Sign for Danger
Danger!
This sign indicates specific behavioral patterns the non-observance of which is
highly dangerous, or which may lead to permanent bodily injury.
Sign for Caution
Caution!
This sign indicates specific behavioral patterns the non-observance of which may
lead to injury to persons, severe damage, or severe malfunction of the equipment,
or to damage to the environment.
Sign for 'Pay Attention'

Pay Attention!
Original 2011-06-21
lead to damage or malfunction of the equipment.
Sign for Information

Information!
This sign indicates tips and useful information which facilitate the operation of the
equipment or the understanding of the documentation.
6 Intended Use
The compressor is exclusively designed for air compression. Any other use is
deemed as not being in compliance with the intended use and requires express
written approval from HATLAPA.
The intended use also includes compliance with all the regulations contained in this
technical documentation, the generally acknowledged rules of technology as well
as all the relevant laws, standards and regulations.
7 Ban on Arbitrary Modifications

Arbitrary modifications and changes to the machine/system are not permitted, as
they may put persons in danger and result in damage to the machine/system.
If you are planning modifications or changes, contact HATLAPA and request
written authorisation.
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
5 / 10
8 General Safety Instructions

Besides the specific safety-related technical notes contained in these instructions
and the sub supplier's documentation, you must also observe the generally
applicable safety and accident regulations, such as the:
Recognised technical regulations for safe and professional work
Regional and internal regulations
Regulations from the responsible classification authority
Rules and regulations for the prevention of accidents from the professional
organisation, in particular concerning compressors
Safety signs and indicator plates on the machine/system
Environmental protection regulations
Original 2011-06-21
Incorrect handling or failure to comply with regulations concerning use can result in
the risk of physical injury and death and/or damage to property. Observe the limits
specified in the technical data.
Find out about the fire detection and fire prevention options, and ensure that these
are fully functional and sufficient.
9 Safety Equipment
Danger!
Faulty safety equipment may put lives and equipment at risk.
All safety equipment must always be in a flawless and fully operational condition.
You must not make the safety equipment inoperative in any way.
If a piece of safety equipment is defective, the machine/system must not be
operated.
Only remove safety equipment if the machine/system has been isolated and
secured.
Perform regular checks on the safety equipment, in accordance with the
regulations in this documentation and the sub suppliers' documentation.
10 Instruments for Operating Surveillance

Caution!
If instruments for operating surveillance are out of order, monitoring of the
operating conditions of the machine/system may lead to incorrect analyses. This
may put lives and/or equipment at risk.
Never decommission any instruments for operating surveillance.
If instruments for operating surveillance are defective, they must be changed as
soon as possible. Take utmost care when operating the machine/system until the
instruments are exchanged.
6 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
11 Safety Instructions for Assembly

Danger!
During assembly and installation, the functioning of the safety equipment is not
guaranteed. Therefore, the safety of the assembling personnel is to a great extent
dependent on the proper execution of work.
Only trained and briefed personnel are permitted to carry out assembling and
installation work. The personnel must have a specialised knowledge of
compressed air and electrical engineering.
Only use suitable and fully functioning tools.
During torching or welding work, ensure that risks of fire or explosion are avoided.
12 Additional Safety Instructions for Electrical Installation

All work on the electrical systems is only allowed to be performed by qualified
electronics specialists.
Danger!
Original 2011-06-21
Deadly voltage!
Before starting to work on electrical equipment, the machine/system must be deenergized. Ensure that
the mains supply is deactivated. Check that the disconnected parts are deenergized before commencing work.
the electricity supply cannot be reconnected unintentionally or without

authorization while work is being performed on the electrical installation.
the electricity for parts which must remain connected for the maintenance
and repair work only remains connected for as long as is absolutely
necessary for the work in question.
Danger!
The main switch remains energized even if it is deactivated.
Work carried out on electrical systems must be done so in accordance with the
valid safety regulations, as well as all other relevant state or local regulations.
Under no circumstances repair or tide over defective fuses. Fuses must only be
replaced by the same type of fuses.
When working on electrical systems, only use permitted and suitable tools. Only
use voltage-free tools.
When taking measurements with the voltage supply of >65 V activated,
Techen, Kerstin
you must under no circumstances touch the electrical connection points,
the inspection equipment must be in good condition and safe to operate,
you must not wear any jewelry on fingers or wrists,
you must stand on insulated ground.
26.11.2009
7 / 10
13 Safety Instructions for Operation and Service

Danger!
The machine/system must only be operated by trained and briefed operating
personnel.
New personnel may only use the machine/system under the constant supervision
of trained and briefed operating personnel.
Give regular briefings on accident regulations and the requirements stated in this
documentation.
Danger! Drawing in into moving parts!
Body parts or clothing may get caught at the flywheel.
Prior to start-up, check that the flywheel cover is fitted!
Caution! Burn hazard!
The compressor housing and the pressure pipes become hot during operation.
Wear protective gloves!
Original 2011-06-21
Caution! Drawing in into moving parts!

Long hair or loose clothing may get caught at the air intake filter.
When the compressor is in operation, maintain a safe distance to the compressor
housing!
Caution!
In automatic operation mode, the compressor starts automatically without warning.
8 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
14 Safety Instructions for Maintenance and Repairs

Danger!
The machine/system must only be maintained and repaired by trained and briefed
maintenance personnel. The personnel must have a specialised knowledge of
hydraulic and electrical engineering.
Optionally, the compressed air pressure gauges can be equipped with gauge
valves. In this case, the compressor may be under pressure although the
compressed air pressure gauges show a pressure of 0 bar.
Before starting any repair work, shutdown the machine/system and secure it
against unintentional restarting. If the work can only be carried out while the
machine/system is running, make the necessary safety arrangements. A second
person must monitor the work, and be ready to intervene if needed.
When carrying out maintenance and repair work, do not decommission more than
one piece of safety equipment at a time.
Original 2011-06-21

Before beginning maintenance work, allow the compressor to cool down for
approx. 2 hours!
Caution!
Besides the information contained in this documentation, you must also observe
the regulations of the classification authorities and professional organisations in
order to determine the inspection and maintenance intervals.
After disassembly, always exchange self-locking nuts and gaskets. They are not
designed for repeat use.
If leaks occur at couplings which are sealed with resilient joint gaskets, the leaks
cannot be eliminated by retightening the coupling because the resilient joint
gaskets are damaged or hardened. Exchange the resilient joint gaskets.
Pay particular attention to cleanliness. Cover any openings to prevent the ingress
of dirt.
Ensure that tools, loose parts or cleaning cloths are not left in or on the
compressor.
Dispose of old oils and grease in an environmentally friendly manner in accordance
with national regulations.
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
9 / 10
15 Noise Protection
Refer to the technical data for information about the noise level.
Caution!
Make sure to wear ear protection in the vicinity of the compressor when it is in
operation.
16 Waste Disposal
The following substances which are caused by the operation of the
machine/system must be disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner, in
accordance with the applicable laws:
used oils and grease as well as cloths with such substances on them;
cleaning agents, and cloths with cleaning agents on them.
Original 2011-06-21
10 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
Final Drawings
Original 2011-06-21
for
COSCO GUANGDONG SHIPYARD
HULL No: N352 - N353
HATLAPA Order No.: 10.2722 - 23 / 1
2x MAIN AIR COMMPRESSORS V105
2011-06-21
1/1
SECTION 1
V105
MAIN STARTING AIR/

BOTTLE CHARGING
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET
SECTION 2
CONTRACT SPECIFIC DRAWINGS
Original 2011-06-21
DRAWING No.
TITLE
D10082
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT V105 30 BAR

MOTORDATASHEET
D10183AIRPRESSURESWITCH
D10408AIRHOSEASSEMBLY
D10409WATERHOSEASSEMBLY
D10102DRAINHOSEASSEMBLY
450241
PIPINGANDINSTRUMENTATION
344181
CONNECTIONDIAGRAM
333182STARTERCONTROLLER
333392SEQUENCESELECTORSWITCH
INSTRUMENT LIST
STANDARD COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS

DRAWING No.
TITLE
T0401132
T0401133
178483
T0401121
T0401126
178492
CONTROL AND OPERATING PHILOSOPHY

INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS
FLEXIBLE HOSE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
COOLING WATER DATA
HEAT DISSIPATION DATA
CRANKCASE LUBRICANTS
SECTION 3
DRAWING No.
TITLE
94301002
ILLUSTRATED SPARES
D10262MOTORBEARINGS
D10201AIRFILTER
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 1
T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C A T I O N/2
Our Ref. 10.2722/1K
MAIN AIR COMPRESSORS
2 x ELECTRO-COMPRESSOR SET T y p e V 105
Type:
Description:
Capacity:
Pressure:
Speed:
Shaft power:
Unloading
Control Voltage:
Lubrication:
Cooling type:
Inspection:
V 105
Two stage, twin cylinder in a 90o V format.
105 m3/hr FAD
30
bar G
1800 min-1
22
kW
Automatic via 1st and 2nd Stage Solenoid Valves.
220 V
Splash
Fresh water up to 7 bar maximum pressure.
NK survey on mechanical portion only
Original 2011-06-21
Standard Compressor Fittings:
Low Oil Level switch with Alarm and Shutdown feature.

High Air Temperature switch with Alarm and Shutdown feature.
1st & 2nd Stage Air Safety Valves.
Water Jacket Safety Valve.
1st & 2nd Stage Centrifugal Condensate Separator.
1st & 2nd Stage Solenoid Drain / Unloading valves.
Compressor electrical junction box pre-wired by HATLAPA with Cable glands.
Suction Filter & Silencer
1st & 2nd Stage Pressure Gauges Graduated in Bar / MPa
Integral interstage/ aftercooler with cast passageways for air and water.
Fully guarded flywheel with aperture for barring over compressor.
Flexible coupling.
Combined oil filler / dipstick.
`Asbestos-Free` gaskets.
Anti Vibration Mounts
Loose Supply Items:
Air pressure control switch for auto Stop / Start of compressor with 3 way test
cock and 40 mm test flange, control air connection fitted with tube coupling to suit
8 mm outer tube.
Final air delivery flexible hose & integral Final air delivery Non-Return Valve.
Cooling water inlet flexible hose.
Cooling water outlet flexible hose.
First stage solenoid drain valve flexible hose.
Second stage solenoid drain valve flexible hose.
Prime Mover:
Manufacturer make of our choice

24 kW Motor Power
1800 RPM
440 V/ 3 ph/ 60 Hz Power Supply
IP 55 Enclosure
Horizontal Foot & Flange Mounting - B35 & IEC 72 Mechanical dimensions
DIRECT ON LINE Starting Method
Manufactured to NK Latest requirements
Standard terminal box
Anti condensation heater
Cable gland
Original 2011-06-21
Starter / Controller:
1 contactor cabinet with motor protection,
consisting of steel casing, containing:
main contactor for the electric motor
transformer
overcurrent relay for the electric motor
main switch
PLC (programmable logic control)
textdisplay for indication of operating modes,
disturbances and service intervals
with push buttons for operating the compressor
potential free contacts for indicating
"compressor on" and "collective alarm"
twin control with separate sequence selection switch
selector switch for auto / manual and local / remote control with interface for
ECR and cable gland
FINAL PAINTING of compressor, electric motor and contactor cabinet:

MUNSELL 7.5 BG 7/2
TESTING: by NK of compressor
1 set of spare parts for compressor acc. to the rules of NK
1 set of spare parts for electric motor consisting of 1 set anti-friction bearings
1 set of spare parts for contactor cabinet consisting of 1 contactor
1 additional set of air filter inlets for each compressor for SYs purpose
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 2
HATLAPA
Original 2011-06-21
Nr.: 180L4
HATLAPA
Date: 08-DEC-2010
DATA SHEET
Original 2011-06-21
Three-phase Induction Motor - Squirrel Cage

Customer
Motor line
:
: Multivoltage
Frame
Rated Output
Frequency
Poles
Full load speed
Slip
Voltage
Full load current
Locked rotor amps
Locked rotor current (Il/In)
No load current
Full load torque
Locked rotor torque
Breakdown torque
Design
Insulation class
Temperature rise
Locked rotor time
Service factor
Duty cycle
Ambient temperature
Altitude
Degree of protection
Aprox. weight
Moment of inertia
Noise level
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Bearings
Regreasing int.
Grease amount
D.E.
6311-C3
20000 h
18 g
180L
25,0 kW
60 Hz
4 poles
1765 rpm
1,94 %
440 V
41,3 A
310 A
7,50
15,0 A
135 Nm
260 %
250 %
N
F
80 K
14 s
1,00
S1
45 C
1000 m.a.s.l
IP55
183 kg
0,1973 kgm
64 dB(A)
N.D.E.
6211-Z- C3
20000 h
11 g
Load
100%
75%
50%
cos
0,86
0,82
0,73
Efficiency(%)
92,3
92,4
91,5
output for compressor: 24kW with I=appr. 40A / with element type heating 220V, appr. 50W, terminal HE+HE2
*The values shown are subject to change without prior notice.
Performed:
Checked:
Version 4.06
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
HATLAPA
Original 2011-06-21
Schaltschrank Startluft-Kompressor 1 (22-30kW)

STARTER / CONTROLLER MAIN AIR COMPRESSOR 1 (22-30kW)
(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-1X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
KompressorUmschaltbox
cable glan 08.12.10

A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
Bearb.
Gepr.
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-1Y1
-1F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 1)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 1)
13
14 15
13-21
6-13
6-13
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM
Entwsserungsventil letzte Stufe

DRAIN VALVE FINAL STAGE
NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC
Werft-Lieferung
SUPPLIED BY SHIPYARD
-1Y2
-1F3
Anschluplan Kompressoren V105

CONNECTION DIAGRAM COMPRESSORS V105
Urspr.
1 17
Entwsserungsventil 1. Stufe
DRAIN VALVE FIRST STAGE
Luft-TemperaturWchter
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-1F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
StartluftKompressor 1
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 1
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-1M1
Druckluftwchter fr
Fhrungskompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
F.LEADING COMPRESSOR
5 11 12
24V DC
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
Hand - Aus - Automatik
REMOTE CONTROL
MANUAL - OFF - AUTOMATIC
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21
potentialfreier Kontakt fr Strung

FLOATING CONTACT FOR DISTURBANCE
potentialfreier Kontakt fr Kompressor ein

FLOATING CONTACT FOR COMPRESSOR ON
potentialfreier Kontakt fr Fernbedienung aktiv

FLOATING CONTACT FOR REMOTE CONTROL ACTIVE
L1 L2 L3
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.

(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-2X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-2Y1
-2F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 2)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 2)
14 15
-2Y2
Ers.d
6-13
6-13
Werft-Lieferung
-2F3
HATLAPA
13
13-21
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM

NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC

Urspr.
1 17
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-2F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 2
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-2M1
24V DC
5 11 12
Druckluftwchter fr
Folgekompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
F.FOLLOWING COMPRESSOR
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21



L1 L2 L3
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.
600
210
Schaltschrank Kompressor
STARTER/CONTROLLER COMPRESSOR
Amperemeter
(mit Markierungsanzeiger)
AMMETER
P2
Anzeige- und Bedieneinheit

MONITORING AND OPERATION PANEL
Q1
Hauptschalter
(mit Trverriegelung)
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
Hauptschalter Motor-Heizung
MAIN SWITCH MOTOR HEATING
H2
Meldelampe "Motor-Heizung ein"

INDICATING LIGHT "MOTOR HEATING ON"
H2
P2
Q2
S2
TD 200
600
HATLAPA
(BU)
S2
Wahlschalter "Vorort / Fern"

SELECTOR SWITCH "LOCAL / REMOTE"
Q1
Gewicht: ca. 50kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 50kg
8
Schutzart: IP54
PROTECTION CLASS: IP54
20
Original 2011-06-21
P1
P1
mit Trfeststeller
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu
Schaltschrank Kompressor 22-30kW (440V)

STARTER / CONTROLLER COMPRESSOR 22-30kW (440V)
Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.
Kurzbeschreibung fr Kompressorsteuerung mit TD200
short description f.compressor control with TD200:

ON / OFF:
The standard text on the text display is:
ready for operation / off

Betriebsbereit / aus
Now you can start the compressor in manual or

in automatic operation.
When You press the "MAN" push button the
compressor starts in maual operation without any
function of the air pressure switch F4.
Normallay the manual operation is only used for
maintenance purposes.
After a blackout the cmpressor will not start
again in this manual mode.
Original 2011-06-21
When You press the "AUTO" push button the

compressor is switched to automatic mode.
The compressor starts and stops automatically
depending on the air pressure.
Normally this should be the standard operation
mode.
When the pressure switch F4 is closed the
compressor starts.
When the pressure switch F4 is opened the
compressor stops.
After a blackout the compressor will start again
in automatic mode.
ALARMS:
Jetzt kann man den Kompressor in der Hand- oder

in der Automatik-Betriebsart starten.
compressor on / man
Kompressor ein / Hand

When You press the "STOP" push button the

compressor stops again.
When you want to change the operation mode from

manual to automatic or from automatic to manual
you must press the "STOP" push button before.
When there is any fault, the compressor stops
and the belonging disturbance alarm is shown in
the display.
Not all possible disburbance texts are used
for this compressor.
Now the fault must be eliminated. Then press the

"RESET" push button and there should be the
standard text on the display again.
Now You can start the compressor again with
the "AUTO" or "MAN" push button.
compressor on / auto
Kompressor ein / Auto
ready for operation / auto
Betriebsbereit / Auto
make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
oil level warning
l-Level Voralarm
low oil level
l-Level Alarm
air temperature warning
Lufttemperatur Voralarm
high air temperature
Lufttemperatur-Alarm
Mit der Taste "MAN" wird der Kompressor in der

Hand-Betriebsart gestartet. D.h. ohne Funktion des
Druckluftschalters F4.
Normalerweise wird diese Fuktion nur fr
Wartungszwecke benutzt.
Nach einem Spannungsausfall wird der Kompressor in
der Betriebsart "Hand" nicht wieder selbstttig
starten.
Mit dem Taster "STOP" kann der Kompressor wieder
gestoppt werden.
Mit dem Taster "AUTO" kann der Kompressor in die
Betriebsart "Automatik" geschaltet werden.
Der Kompressor startet und stopt dann selbsttig
in Abhngigkeit des Druckluftschalters F4.
Wenn der Druckluftschalter geschlossen ist, dann
startet der Kompressor.
Wenn der Druckluftschalter geffnet ist, dann
stopt der Kompressor.
der Betriebsart "Automatik" selbststndig wieder
anlaufen.
ALARME
Wenn eine Strung vorliegt, dann stopt der

Kompressor und es wird der zugehrige Alarm im
Textdisplay angezeigt.
Nicht alle hier dargestellten Alarm-Texte werden
fr diesen Kompressor benutzt.
Jetzt must der entsprechende Fehler behoben werden
und dann der "RESET"-Taster bettigt werden.
Darauf sollte dann der Standart-Text wieder auf
dem Display erscheinen.
Jetzt kann der Kompressor wieder mit den Tasten
"MAN" oder "AUTO" gestartet werden.

EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
When there are one or two arrows in the right
side of the display, you can go to other display
texts by pressing the belonging arrow push buttons
The other texts can show more disturbance alarms,
if there is more than one fault.
Or you can watch the working hours.
Or you can watch some special settings of the
software.
Normally all settings are done by HATLAPA for
a normal purpose of the compressor.
If you want to change any setting, you must
press the "ENTER" push button one time. Now you
can change the value with the arrow push buttons.
After this you must quit the new value by pressing
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
2sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
5min
Entwsserungsinterval
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
5min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Dies ist der Standart-Text auf dem Display.
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
Wenn ganz rechts im Display ein oder zwei Pfeile

dargestellt werden, dann kann mit d.entsprechenden
Pfeil-Tasten zu anderen mglichen Texten
gesprungen werden.
Die weiteren Texte knnen weitere Alarme anzeigen,
wenn mehr als eine Strung ansteht.
Oder es werden die Betriebsstunden angezeigt.
Oder es knnen einige variable Einstellungen der
Software angezeigt werden.
Normalerweise sind alle Einstellungen fr einen
normalen Kompressorbetrieb bereits durch HATLAPA
festgelegt.
Wenn Einstellungen gendert werden sollen, mu
einmalig die "ENTER"-Taset bettigt werden. Dann
kann man mit den Pfeil-Tasten den entsprechenden
Wert verndern. Daraufhin mu der genderte Wert
nocheinmal mit der "ENTER"-Taste quittiert werden.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
11
12
0P
5%
-K1
/8.0
-F3
-T1
440V
-Q1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
-Q4
0,63-1A 2
GV2 RT05
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
/7.9
1
1
-Q2
97 95
-F1
37-50A
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
98 96
Original 2011-06-21
/5.0
75/1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-T2
-P1 75A
+ A
-
/5.0
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
3
1L1
51
61
/8.0 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
9 10
HE1 HE2
Heizung
HEATING
25-100W
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
22-30 kW
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
Hamw_7
16t
17t
18t
S7-CPU 224 Relay-Outputs

14 x Inputs
10 x Outputs Relay
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
7b
8b
9b
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7
/6.0
/6.4
/6.4
/6.5
/6.6
/6.7
/6.8
/6.2
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
OIL LEVEL SW.WARNIN
OIL LEVEL SW.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.WARNIN
SPARE
Reserve
SPARE
Reserve
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
2t
3t
4t
5t
8t
9t
10t
13t
11b
12b
13b
14b
15b
16b
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
REMOTE CONTROL ON
REMOTE CONTROL MANU
REMOTE CONTROL AUTO
14t A1.0
15t A1.1
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
A0.6
A0.7
/8.0
/8.5
/8.7
/8.6
/8.2
/8.3
/8.9
PE
N
L1
17b
18b
-A1
M
Exp. L+
1L
Out 2L
3L
1M
In
2M
1t
7t
12t
1b
10b
0V DC
Supply
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
SPARE
STAR CONTACTOR
DELTA CONACTOR
REMOTE CONTROL ACTI
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
monitoring and operation panel
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
0
/5.9
1L+
9
1L+
-A1
-A1
3b
-A1
5b
E0.1
/5.2
/7.0
7b
E0.3
/5.2
E0.5
/5.2
95
OIL LEVEL SW.WARNING
lstands-W. Voralarm
-F1
AIR TEMPERAT.SHUTDOWN
Lufttemp.-Wchter Alarm
SPARE
Reserve
/4.2 96
Digital Input
-A1
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
Digital Input
PE
Optional ber
2
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
Luftdruck-Wchter SELECTION BOX
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
24V DC
lStandsWchter
OIL
LEVEL
SWITCH
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
SPARE
10
NC
T
PE
/5.2
Reserve
Digital Input
11
12
PE
NC
T
COM
COM
-F3
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
LuftTemp.Wchter
AIR
TEMP.
SWITCH
-F13
Bearb.
Gepr.
E0.6
Digital Input
PE
/5.2
AIR TEMPERAT.WARNING
24V DC
F13.1
E0.4
Digital Input
SHUTDOWN
-X1
/5.2
OIL LEVEL SW.SHUTDOWN

lstands-Wchert Alarm
F13.2
Digital Input
-F4
E0.2
F3W
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
8b
WARNING
E0.7
-A1
6b
F3S
/5.2
Digital Input
-A1
4b
WARNING
E0.0
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
9b
SHUTDOWN
-A1
2b
Digital Input
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
0
/6.9
1L+
13
potentialfreie Kontakte
FLOATING CONTACTS
-S2
Vorort-Fern
LOCAL-REMOTE
14
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
13
-A1
-A1
11b
E1.0
/5.2
E1.1
REMOTE CONTROL ON
Fernbedienung ein
Original 2011-06-21
13b
/5.2
REMOTE CONTROL MANUAL

Fernbedienung Hand ein
Digital Input
E1.2
-K5
-K1
-K4
14 /8.0
14 /8.4
13
/5.2
REMOTE CONTROL AUTO ON

Fernbedienung Auto ein
Digital Input
-X1
13
14 /8.6
-A1
12b
13
Digital Input
14 15 PE
26 27 PE
Fernbedienung aktiv
REMOTE CONTROL ACTIVE
(NO)
22 25 PE
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
(NC)
MAN
0
AUTO
(NO)
20 21 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
-A1
-A1
Digital Output
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTOR
NETZSCHTZ
2t
3t
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.3
/5.2
A0.2
5t

Fernbedienung aktiv
/5.2
A0.7
13t
A1
A1
-K4
50A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
Original 2011-06-21
Digital Output
4t
-K1
/5.9
-A1
Digital Output
COOLING WATER VALVE

Khlwasserabsperrventi
/5.2
A0.1
-A1
Digital Output
DRAIN VALVES
Entwsserungs-Ventile
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digital Output
A1
-K5
INCL. A2
VAR.
INCL. A2
VAR.
1N1
1
3
5
13
21
51
/4.8
61
/4.9
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/7.8
2
4
6
14
22
52
62
/7.9 13
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
/7.7 13
14
Fernbedienung aktiv
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
-X1
17 1
-Y1
PE
17 1
-Y2
Entwsserungsventile
DRAIN VALVES
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
18 1
PE
PE
-Y5
Khlwasser-Absperrventil (optional)
COOLING WATER SHUT OFF VALVE (OPTIONAL)
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
Kompressor-Umschaltbox
COMPRESSOR SEQUENCE SELECTION BOX
Box de selection de guidage
200
VIEW FROM BEHIND:

200
120
Kompressor 1 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 1 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
Schutzart: IP54
200
200
Gewicht: ca. 3kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 3kg
Kompressor 2 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 2 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
8,7
20
Original 2011-06-21
3S1
20
3S1
Fhrungswahlschalter
SEQUENCE SELECTOR SWITCH
Commutateur de guidage
Stellung 1: Kompressor 1 = Fhrungskompressor

Kompressor 2 = Folgekompressor

POSITION 1: COMPRESSOR 1 = LEADING COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSOR 2 = FOLLOWING COMPRESSOR

Position 1: Compresseur 1 = Compresseur de guidage

Compresseur 2 = Compresseur de suivant

Datum
french
A
texts 23.01.09
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
20.02.08
Umschaltbox fr Doppelkompressorsteuerung
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
SEQUENCE SELECTION BOX FOR DOUBLE COMPRESSOR CONTROL
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.
10
14
-3S1
Original 2011-06-21
Fhrungswahlschalter
-3X1
-1F4
PE
11 13 15
PE
PE
-2F4
Druckluftschalter fr Fhrungskompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH FOR LEADING COMPRESSOR
PE
Druckluftschalter fr Folgekompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH FOR FOLLOWING COMPRESSOR
C
Druckluftwchter-Signal zum
Schaltschrank Kompressor 1
AIR PRESSURE SIGNAL TO
CONTACTOR CABINET COMPRESSOR 1
Datum
20.02.08
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
CONTROL AND OPERATING

PHILOSOPHY
V LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLED
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL VERSION
T0401132
Sheet 1 of 4
1.
General Description
1.1
The V Line is a 2 stage, 2 cylinder reciprocating type air compressor direct coupled to
an electric motor, all mounted on Anti-Vibration mounts.
The equipment is designed to be operated via a remote mounted starter/control panel
(supplied by either Hatlapa or the Customer).
The compressor rotating and reciprocating elements are splash lubricated via
dippers, integrally cast onto the con-rods, hitting the oil surface - the oil contained in
the compressor crankcase.
Original 2011-06-21
The compressor is arranged with a water cooling system, which is be suitable for
fresh water only. This system cools both the air interstage and after coolers. An
integrally mounted electric motor driven water circulating pump can be supplied by
Hatlapa.
1.2
Pressure gauges are provided for monitoring the air interstage and final stage
pressures, P1 and P2.
1.3
The compressor has a number of safety features as follows:Safety valves are fitted to each air stage of the compressor, SV1 and SV2
A safety valve is fitted to the water jacket housing the coolers, SV5
1.4
The compressor is fitted with the following protection devices:Minimum oil level, F13
High final delivery temperature, F3
High compressor motor current
High water pump motor current
shutdown (1) and optional alarm (2)

shutdown (S) and optional alarm (W)
shutdown only
shutdown only (of water pump supplied)
Note
1) Both the low oil level switch, F13, and the high air temperature switch, F3, are
closed under normal running conditions and open on fault.
2) The low oil level switch, F13, is connected to a timer delay to prevent spurious
operation due to ships motion, ie, pitch and roll.
1.5.1 The starter/ control panel should be capable of the following functions:Selection of manual mode
Selection of automatic mode
ECN No.
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
08.05.02
16.01.06
W:\Compressors\ENGINEERING\T Stds\T0401132-ISS2.doc
local start/stop only

local or remote start/stop sequence
Drawn
WAH
Checked
Approved SK
COPYRIGHT RESERVED

PHILOSOPHY
V LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLED
T0401132
Sheet 2 of 4
Selection sequence of operation - if more than one compressor is charging the

system a selector switch should be fitted enabling the sequence in which the
compressors should work i.e. lead and follow.
Emergency stop operation
2.
shutdown only - local or remote
Operation
Note - If this is the first commissioning or a re-commission after a significant period
out of service then refer to the commissioning procedure for guidance.
2.1
Normal Running Procedure (Automatic Control)
Original 2011-06-21
Note The manual drain valves (HV1) should be closed

2.1.1 Energise the starter panel via the main isolator
Set mode switch S1 to AUTO
Set local/remote switch S2 as required
Set drain switch S3 to AUTO (S3 not fitted if only hand drains supplied)
Press RESET push button.
2.1.2 On pressing the START button, the following events occur:The compressor starts and runs off load
The water circulating pump (WP) starts and runs (when fitted)
The water shut off valve (Y5) is energised to open (when fitted)
The compressor will run off load for 15 20 seconds after which solenoid valves Y1
and Y2 are energised to close to charge the air system.
(Note - the solenoid valves will only close if the air system is not fully charged)
Note If a visual flow indicator (F1) is fitted to the compressor cooling water outlet
this should be checked to ensure that water is circulating through the compressor. In
the event that there is no flow the compressor should be stopped and the cause
investigated.
2.1.3 The compressor is now controlled by the air system pressure switch.
At 5 minute intervals (adjustable dependant on ambient conditions) solenoid valves
Y1 and Y2 are de-energised to open for 2 seconds (adjustable) to drain moisture
collected in the interstage and final stage separator bowls.
2.1.4 On air system charged signal, from the air system pressure switch, solenoid valves
Y1 and Y2 are de-energised to open to drain and unload the compressor and await a
signal as follows:ECN No.
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
08.05.02
16.01.06
Drawn
WAH
Checked
Approved SK
COPYRIGHT RESERVED

PHILOSOPHY
V LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLED
T0401132
Sheet 3 of 4
On recharge signal the solenoid valves Y1 and Y2 close, energise, causing the
compressor to charge the system.
If the recharge signal is not received within 5 minutes (adjustable) of the
charged signal, the compressor stops leaving the solenoid valves Y1 and Y2
open. On recharge signal the compressor starts as for pressing the START
button.
Original 2011-06-21
2.1.5 On pressing the STOP button solenoid valves Y1 and Y2 are de-energised to open to
drain the separator bowls, the compressor continues to run on for 5 minutes
(adjustable) before stopping.
Simultaneously with the compressor stopping the water circulating pump (if fitted)
stops and the water shut off valve Y5 (if fitted) is de-energised to close.
Pressing the START button during this cycle brings the compressor back on line to
charge the air system.
2.1.6 If the START button is pressed while the air system is fully charged, the compressor
starts as described in Paragraph 2.1.2. The compressor is then controlled by the air
system pressure switch as described in Paragraphs 2.1.3 and 2.1.4.
2.2
Sequence Selector Switch
2.2.1 If more than one compressor is charging the receiver, the Sequence Selector Switch
changes which compressor is the lead and which is the follow machine.
2.3
Manual Mode Running
2.3.1 Energise the starter panel via the main isolator

Set the mode switch S1 to MAN
Set local/remote switch S2 to LOCAL
Set drain switch S3 to AUTO (S3 not fitted if only hand drain valves fitted)
The compressor will start and run in this mode overriding the low oil level switch, F13,
and high air temperature switch, F3. The emergency stop button and motor thermal
overloads will still stop and unload the compressor.
Starting, running and stopping cycles are as for Normal (Automatic) Running as
described with the exception of the following:Oil level switch overridden
High air temperature switch overridden
Remote start/stop function disabled
2.4
Emergency Stop
ECN No.
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
08.05.02
16.01.06
Drawn
WAH
Checked
Approved SK
COPYRIGHT RESERVED

PHILOSOPHY
V LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLED
T0401132
Sheet 4 of 4
Upon pressing the emergency stop button, either local or remote (if fitted), the
compressor stops immediately, solenoid valves Y1 and Y2 open, water circulating
pump (if fitted) stops and the water shut off valve, Y5, (if fitted) closes.
General
3.1
It is recommended that individual volt-free change-over contacts and control panel

indicator lamps are provided as follows:Compressor running
Water pump running (if fitted)
Low oil level shutdown
Low oil level warning (if fitted)
High air temperature shutdown
High air temperature warning (if fitted)
Compressor motor overload
Water pump motor overload (if fitted)
Original 2011-06-21
ECN No.
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
08.05.02
16.01.06
Drawn
WAH
Checked
Approved SK
T0401133
V-LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLING
Page 1 of 3
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
1.
LOCATION
The suction inlet should be installed in a well ventilated position so that air drawn into the
compressor is as cool and dry as possible and there is adequate circulation to the drive motor
integral cooling fan and all the compressor external surfaces.
It is preferable that the compressor be positioned with the axis of the crankshaft and motor fore
and aft in the vessel.
2.
MOUNTING
The compressor should be mounted on support plates/pads and supported by a ribbed structure
suitable for the type and weight of the compressor. The pads/plates must be clean and flat to
within 1mm. Shims should be used if necessary. All V-Line compressors are supplied with AV
mounts and flexible hoses. Refer to General Arrangement Drawing supplied with the compressor
documentation package for anti-vibration mounts dimensions, positions and weight of the
compressor. Refer to 178483 for flexible hose installation guidelines.
Original 2011-06-21
3.
COOLING WATER SYSTEM

General Comments
The Compressor is suitable for fresh water cooling only. The supply of water should be free of
solids or any other foreign matter. The compressor coolers have been designed incorporating a
fouling factor equivalent to 10%.
There must be positive water circulation through the compressor.
For optimum compressor performance the operating temperature of the compressor needs to be
regulated by the combination of cooling water inlet temperature and flow rate.
Note! A compressor running too cold will tend to generate condensation internally within the
crankcase, leading to contamination of the lubricating oil with water. A compressor running too hot
will have a high final air delivery temperature with an increased risk of mechanical failure.
3.1
Cooling Water Temperature

For recommendations see T0401121
3.2
Cooling Water Quantity
3.2.1
When installing the V-Line compressor into the ship's cooling water system, consideration
must be given to the cooling water flow requirement for the compressor to operate
efficiently.
For the cooling water flow recommendations see T0401121.
When a water circulating pump is supplied, see T0401131 (V105/150), T0401143
(V200/250), T0401144 (V375) for Pump Performance data.
A means of measuring the pressure drop across the system should be provided. A visual
flow indicator is fitted as standard.
3.2.2
The system must be designed to ensure a positive back pressure exists on the cooler
outlet to prevent the first stage cylinder being starved of cooling water.
For the pressure drop across the compressor see T0401121.
The nominal cooling water flow rate through the compressor will normally give an
acceptable heat transfer rate across the compressor resulting in a cooling water outlet
temperature rise of 15C over water inlet temperature and a final air delivery temperature
of 15C over the cooling water inlet temperature. It may be found necessary to vary the
cooling water flow rate in order to achieve these temperature rises.
ECN No.
N0054647
Issue No.
1
2
3
Date:
16.3.00
08.05.02
16.01.06
W:\Compressors\ENGINEERING\T Stds\T0401133-iss3.DOC
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
T0401133
V-LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLING
Page 2 of 3
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
3.2.3
A water shut off valve should be fitted, to the water inlet to the compressor, see
T0401115 figs 1 & 4 (supplied on request), when the temperature of the cooling water is
significantly below the temperature of the air surrounding the compressor. In these
circumstances it is necessary to avoid overcooling and the resultant generation of
condensation. Where cooling water is at a higher temperature particularly with fresh water
systems, it is less important to stop the water flow.
3.2.4
The fitting of a 3 way thermostatic valve on the outlet of the compressor is

recommended where overcooling problems may be envisaged or experienced.
Overcooling occurs mainly when:a) The cooling water inlet temperature is very low.
b) The cooling water inlet temperature is low and compressor is running unloaded.
c) Cooling water continues to flow through the compressor after the machine has
stopped running
The effects of overcooling are excessive condensation in the compressor causing
corrosion and emulsification of the lubricating oil.
Original 2011-06-21
See T0401115 fig 6 (supplied on request) for a typical fresh water installation fitted with a
heat exchanger.
4.
5.
3.3
Cooling System Pressure

See T0401121 for limitations.
3.4
Water Pipe Sizing and Layout

In order to avoid excessive friction loss through piping, it should be kept as short as
possible. See T0401121 for recommended pipe sizes.
It should be noted that the compressor connections should not be used to establish the
pipe size to be used. Should the pipe work be very long, the next larger size pipe than
that recommended in T0401121 should be used. Refer to T0401115 for typical
installations/layouts (supplied on request).
3.5
Venting of Air from the Compressor Cooling Water System

The compressor is fitted with an air bleed valve on top of the cooler box and it is
recommended (in the compressor Manual) that this is bled on a daily basis to ensure air is
not trapped in the cooler box water chamber thus preventing hot spots in the machine.
MAIN AIR LINE

4.1
Vertical run-up direct from the compressor must be kept to a minimum and the horizontal
run, incorporating the non return valve, should descend away from the compressor to
prevent any moisture in the pipeline from running back to the compressor and non return
valve.
4.2
See drawing A22002 for a typical 2 compressor installation (supplied on request).
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
5.1
Drain Sizing
Refer to recommendations made in T0401124 for typical installations (supplied on
request).
ECN No.
N0054647
Issue No.
1
2
3
Date:
16.3.00
08.05.02
16.01.06
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
T0401133
V-LINE COMPRESSOR
FRESH WATER COOLING
Page 3 of 3
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
6.
SUMMARY OF STANDARDS AND DATA SHEETS REFERENCED IN THIS PROCEDURE.

-
Flexible Hose Installation Guidelines

Cooling Data
Pump performance Data V105/150
Pump performance Data V200/250
Pump performance Data V375
Typical Cooling Installation Diagrams (supplied on request)
Typical Air System 2 Compressors (supplied on request)
Drain Sizing Recommendations (supplied on request)
Original 2011-06-21
178483
T0401121
T0401131
T0401143
T0401144
T0401115
A22002
T0401124
ECN No.
N0054647
Issue No.
1
2
3
Date:
16.3.00
08.05.02
16.01.06
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Flexible hoses are used for connecting a flexible mounted compressor assembly to a rigid
piping system. When a hose is installed, it must allow the compressor to move in all three
directions. See typical applications below, which show a single bend, to achieve this. The
diagrams apply to both air and water.
Note:
The following diagrams show flexible hoses with threaded end connections, however
flanged end connections may be supplied. These guidelines apply to the flexible part of
the hose, regardless of the type of end fitting supplied.
No pressure
Original 2011-06-21
High pressure
To allow the flexible part of the hose to move when pressurised, ensure no supporting
clamps are located on the bends.
incorrect
correct
On installation, ensure that the flexible part of the hose is not twisted, this could result in
hose damage and, when pressurised, it could untwist, loosening the connections.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
1/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
Use angle adaptors to eliminate tight bend radii and sharp twists occurring in the hose.
incorrect
correct
If the installation bend radius is less than the minimum allowed, use angle adaptors to
eliminate tight bend radii.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
2/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
Ensure the hose is installed with a smooth bend, avoiding any tight corners, which could
cause the flexible part of the hose to collapse.
incorrect
correct
In a collinear application, do not install the hose in a straight line or with kinks, use angle
adaptors.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
3/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
Ensure the hose is kept away from hot surfaces by using suitable clamps. High ambient
temperatures can reduce the life of the flexible part of the hose.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
4/4
Safety Instructions for Hoses
1 General
Hose pipes are safety relevant parts which may endanger persons and the environment
in case of failure.
1.1 Installation and maintenance

During installation the hoses must in no way be damaged, bent, twisted
or exerted to pressure. They must not be painted or have contact with
sharp objects!
For cleaning hose pipes and hoses neither aggressive cleaning agents
nor pressure cleaners may be used. They can damage the hose surface
resp. hose line!
Hose pipes must be inspected visually by the assembly/service personnel before
commissioning and once a year.
Inspection is carried out under the following aspects:
Original 2011-06-21
Damage to the outer layer

Decay of the outer layer
Deformation of the hose or hose pipe (alteration of the geometry, layer
separation, forming of blisters)
Damage or deformation of the hose fitting
Corrosion of the fitting (impairs function and strength)
Installation (chafing at sharp edges or smooth surfaces)
Exceeding the admissible storage resp. operational duration (stated below)
1.2 Storage and durability

According to DIN 7716 proper storage is to be understood as follows:
max storage time 2 years

dry, cool, dust-free
no direct sunlight or UV light
protection against ozone
protect against heat
store lying and without tension
According to EN 982 resp., DIN 20066 following must be observed:

1. Once installed, the hoses have a durability of 6 years and must be replaced after
this period.
2. If the max. storage time of 2 years is exceeded, then the hose may no longer be
used. If the hose is installed within this period, the durability of 6 years is reduced
by the period of storage accordingly.
It lies within the responsibility of the user that all hoses mentioned in this
manual are checked at regular intervals, and to guarantee correct and
safe function once the guarantee period has elapsed, thus preventing
damage to persons and the environment.
date 18.04.2005
Created by Tanz
page 1 of 1
T.0401121
V-LINE PERFORMANCE
WATER COOLED/AIR COOLED
Page 1of 1
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
1. COMPRESSOR
Model
Flow
l/min
V105
V150
V200
V250
V375
20/25
20/25
60/70
60/70
110/120
Pressure Drop
Across
Compressor
(P2 P1)*
0.5m
0.5m
2.5m
2.5m
4.4m
Max. Water
Jacket
Pressure
Inlet & Outlet

Connections
Recommended
Min. Pipe Bore
7 bar g
7 bar g
7 bar g
7 bar g
7 bar g
G
G
G1
G1
G1
19mm
19mm
25mm
25mm
32mm
Original 2011-06-21
* See T0401115 for positions

Water jacket Safety Valve setting = 7.7barg
Minimum cooling water inlet temperature = 5oC
Maximum cooling water inlet temperature = 45oC
For heat dissipation to cooling water see T0401126
2. WATER CIRCULATING PUMP (Option)
See Data Sheets T0401125
T0401131
T0401143
T0401144
(Sea Water All Models)

(Fresh Water V105/150)
(Fresh Water V200/250)
(Fresh Water V375)
2. THERMOSTATIC BY-PASS VALVE (Option)

2.1 Valve actuating temperature = 35C
2.2 Pressure drop across valve see table below
Pressure Drop Across Valve
Model
V105
V150
V200
V250
V375
0.68m
0.68m
2.38m
2.38m
5.78m
Valve Connections
G"
G"
G1"
G1"
G1"
3. WATER SHUT OFF VALVE - Solenoid Operated (Option)

4.1 Pressure drop across valve see table below
Pressure Drop Across Valve
Model
V105
V150
V200
V250
V375
ECN No.
N0054732
Issue No.
1
2
3
Date:
16.03.00
31.05.02
16.01.06
W:\Compressors\ENGINEERING\T Stds\T0401121.DOC
0.1m
0.1m
0.8m
0.8m
0.5m
Valve Connections
G"
G"
G1"
G1"
G1"
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
V-LINE COMPRESSOR
T0401126
HEAT DISSIPATION
Page 1 of 2
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
pc
WATER COOLED
V105
Original 2011-06-21
V150
V200
V250
V375
Pressure
Bar g
33
25
20
15
10
7
33
25
20
15
10
7
33
25
20
15
10
7
33
25
20
15
10
7
33
25
20
15
10
7
BOTTLE CHARGING DUTY

Heat Dissipation
1000 rpm
1200 rpm
1500 rpm
kW
J/s
kW
J/s
kW
J/s
1800 rpm
kW
J/s
9.6
9600
11
11000
14.9
14900
16.5
16500
8.2
8200
9.9
9900
12.7
12700
15.4
15400
7.1
7100
8.8
8800
11
11000
13.8
13800
14
14000
16
16000
21.6
21600
24
24000
12
12000
14.4
14400
18.4
18400
22.4
22400
10.4
10400
12.8
12800
16
16000
20
20000
17.6
17600
21.2
21200
25.6
25600
30.4
30400
16
16000
19.2
19200
24
24000
28.8
28800
14.4
14400
17.6
17600
21.6
21600
24
24000
22.4
22400
26.4
26400
33.6
33600
41.2
41200
20.8
20800
24
24000
30.4
30400
36
36000
19.2
19200
21.6
21600
26.4
26400
31.2
31200
30.4
30400
39.2
39200
46.4
46400
58.4
58400
ECN No.
N0054729
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
22.3.00
31.5.02
NOT AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
V-LINE COMPRESSOR
T0401126
HEAT DISSIPATION
Page 2 of 2
COPYRIGHT RESERVED
pc
WATER COOLED
V105
V150
V200
V250
Pressure
Bar g
30
21
30
21
30
21
30
21
1000 rpm
kW
J/s
9.6
9600
8.2
8200
14000
14
12
12000
17.6
17600
16
16000
22.4
22400
20.8
20800
FAD (NOZZLE) DUTY

Heat Dissipation
1200 rpm
1500 rpm
kW
J/s
kW
J/s
11
11000
14.9
14900
9.9
9900
12.7
12700
16
16000
21.6
21600
14.4
18400
14400
18.4
25600
21.2
21200
25.6
24000
19200
24
19.2
33.6
33600
26.4
26400
24000
30.4
30400
24
1800 rpm
kW
J/s
16.5
16500
15.4
15400
24
24000
22.4
22400
30400
30.4
28800
28.8
41.2
41200
36
36000
NOT AVAILABLE
Original 2011-06-21
V375
AIR COOLED
VA40
Pressure
Bar g
33
25
20
15
10
7
BOTTLE CHARGING DUTY

Heat Dissipation
1000 rpm
1200 rpm
1500 rpm
J/s
kW
J/s
kW
kW
J/s
1800 rpm
J/s
kW
4.2
4200
5000
6.5
6500
7.3
7300
3.9
3900
4.7
4700
6000
6.8
6800
3.2
3200
4000
4.9
4900
5.9
5900
ECN No.
N0054729
Issue No.
1
2
Date:
22.3.00
31.5.02
Drawn
Checked
Approved
RAV
RAV
AES
for V-Line
Piston Compressors
178492
Rev. 01.06
1. General
Moving parts require the correct lubricant. Good quality lubrication oils increase the service life of
the compressor.
Please note: only the lubrication oil manufacturer knows his products thoroughly. Therefore, it is
advisable to contact him when making your choice.
Ask only the lubricant manufacturer for his recommendation! He is the expert.
2. Lubrication Oil Quality
Original 2011-06-21
Above all, compressor oils must have good lubrication properties for which their viscosity is highly
important. HATLAPA recommends lubrication oils within the following range:
viscosity at 100 C: min. 9 cSt max. 15 cSt
The lubrication oils should have low tendency to ageing and coking in order to prevent oil carbon
deposits on valves and pipelines. HATLAPA recommends to use oils of class VDL according to
DIN 51 506.
3. Guarantee
If lubrication oils are used which do not meet the requirements, damage to the compressor may
occur. This damage is not covered by HATLAPA's guarantee obligations.
4. Lubricant Examples
The following oils are examples which comply with the above specification:
Mineral Oils
Synthetic Oils
BP
ENERGOL RC100
ENERSYN RX100
CASTROL
AIRCOL PD 100
AIRCOL SN 100
CHEVRON TEXACO (FAMM) COMPRESSOR OIL EP VDL100 CETUS DE 100
ELF TOTAL FINA (Lubmarine) DACNIS P100
BARELF CH 100
ESSO (ExxonMobil Marine)
EXXCOLUB 100
SYNESSTIC 100
MOBIL (ExxonMobil Marine)
RARUS 427
RARUS 827
SHELL
CORENA P 100
CORENA AP 100
However, the oil properties are subject to change without notice by the oil manufacturer. Also,
the oil characteristics may vary depending on the regional market. Therefore this list does not
release the operator of the compressor from verifying that the selected oil complies with the
above specification.
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 3
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Instruction Manual
V-Line Water Cooled Compressor
V105, V150, V200, V250, V375
Original 2011-06-21
PCH 1540
ISSUE 8 1105
Uetersener Maschinenfabrik GmbH & Co. KG

Tornescher Weg 5-7
25436 Uetersen / Germany
Telephone: +49-4122-711 0..

Facsimile: +49-4122-711 330
Marine Equipment Ltd.

Discovery Court Business Centre
551-553 Wallisdown Road,
Poole, Dorset BH12 5AG, Great Britain
Telephone: +44 (0) 1202 853 180
Facsimile: +44 (0) 1202 853 190
E-Mail: info@hatlapa-uk.com
Original 2011-06-21
CAUTION
1.
The following manual must be read before proceeding with installation, operation
and maintenance of this equipment.
2.
Health & Safety Act Compliance. Before working on this equipment personnel
should be made aware of, and ensure compliance with, the Health and Safety
Regulations appropriate to this class of work.
3.
The handling points are indicated on the unit and must be used. The hooks of
slings must be fitted to lifting eyebolts using shackles.
4.
Before proceeding with maintenance on the unit, or making adjustments to its

connections and fittings, it must be stopped and isolated electrically and
mechanically and the outlet valves closed. Some units on automatic standby
duty, or isolators are remote from the unit and extra care is then necessary to
ensure that isolation is complete.
Original 2011-06-21
HATLAPA MARINE EQUIPMENT reserves the right to make changes to the design of the machine without
prior notice.
Original 2011-06-21
CONTENTS
1
Original 2011-06-21
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.1
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
3.2.13
3.2.14
3.2.15
3.2.16
3.2.17
3.2.18
3.2.19
3.2.20
3.2.21
3.2.22
3.2.23
3.2.24
3.2.25
3.2.26
3.3
3.3.1
3.4
3.5
3.6
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................... 1-1

LOCATION ................................................................................................................................. 1-1
MOUNTING ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
COMMISSIONING ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
OPERATING PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................... 2-1
DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................... 2-1
CONTROL AND OPERATING PHILOSOPHY .......................................................................... 2-1
NORMAL RUNNING PROCEDURE (AUTOMATIC CONTROL) .............................................. 2-2
MANUAL MODE RUNNING ...................................................................................................... 2-4
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 2-5
MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................... 3-1
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 3-1
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................. 3-3
Lubrication Oil Checking ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Lubrication Oil Changing ............................................................................................................ 3-3
Air Suction Filter/Silencer Removal and Replacement .............................................................. 3-3
First Stage Concentric Valve Removal/Servicing/Replacement ................................................ 3-4
Final Stage Concentric Valve Removal/Servicing/Replacement ............................................... 3-9
First Stage Cylinder and Piston Removal ................................................................................ 3-13
First Stage Cylinder and Piston Reassembly........................................................................... 3-15
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston Removal ............................................................................... 3-16
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston Reassembly .......................................................................... 3-17
Cooler Tubenest and Header Removal ................................................................................... 3-18
Tubenest Clean/Examine/Replace .......................................................................................... 3-18
Cooler box end cover ............................................................................................................... 3-21
Connecting Rod Removal ........................................................................................................ 3-21
Bearing Removal and Reassembly to Connecting Rods ......................................................... 3-21
Connecting Rod Reassembly to Compressor .......................................................................... 3-27
V105, V150, V200, and V250 Drive Motor and Coupling ........................................................ 3-28
V375 Drive Motor and Coupling ............................................................................................... 3-30
Flywheel and Drive End Oil Seals Removal from Compressor ............................................... 3-31
Flywheel and Drive End Oil Seal Reassembly to Compressor ................................................ 3-32
Crankshaft and Main Bearing Removal from Compressor ...................................................... 3-34
Crankshaft and Main Bearings Reassembly to Compressor ................................................... 3-35
Oil Level Switch Remove/Clean/Replace ................................................................................ 3-35
Air and Water Safety Valves .................................................................................................... 3-36
Separator and Diffuser Plate: Removal and Examination ....................................................... 3-36
Separator and Diffuser Plate: Reassembly .............................................................................. 3-37
WATER CIRCULATING PUMP (if supplied)............................................................................ 3-38
General Overhaul ..................................................................................................................... 3-39
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................ 3-39
FAULT FINDING CHART......................................................................................................... 3-39
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR COMPRESSOR MAINTENANCE .................................................. 3-41
TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................................... 4-1
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................. 4-1
PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
OTHER DATA ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
CRANKCASE LUBRICANTS ..................................................................................................... 4-3
Approved Oils ............................................................................................................................. 4-3
Oil Company Equivalents ........................................................................................................... 4-3
Additional Maintenance for Machines Lubricated with Synthetic Oils ....................................... 4-3
DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
Original 2011-06-21
FIGURES
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
Figure 3.5
Figure 3.6
Figure 3.7
Figure 3.8
Figure 3.9
Figure 3.10
Figure 3.11
Figure 3.12
Figure 3.13
Figure 3.14
Figure 3.15
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.4
Figure 5.5
Figure 5.6
Figure 5.7
First Stage Concentric Valve V105/150

First Stage Concentric Valve V375
Final Stage Concentric Valve V105/150
Final Stage Concentric Valve V375
Cooler Header
V105/V150 Fitting and Orientation of Big End Bearings/Con Rods
V375 Big End Bearings Fitting & Con Rod Orientation in the Crankcase
Coupling
Gap between Coupling and Flywheel
Coupling
Location of Angle Steel on Crankcase Rails
Water Circulating Pump
Typical Arrangement of V-Line Water Cooled Compressor with Gauges
Cooler
Crankshaft and Flywheel
First Stage Cylinder and Piston
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston
Separator
Gauges
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-20
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-38
5-1
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
TABLES
Table 3.1
Table 3.2
Table 3.3
Table 3.4
Table 3.5
Table 3.6
Table 3.7
Table 4.1
Table 4.2
Table 4.3
Table 5.1
Table 5.2
Fastener Torque Settings (unlubricated)

Maintenance Schedule
Fixtures to Assist Flywheel Removal
Items List - Water Circulating Pump
Switch Settings
Fault Finding Chart
Tools Required for Compressor Maintenance
Capacity and Power at 30 Bar
Operating Parameters
Recommended Maximum Wear Clearances
List of Parts for Figure 5.1
List Of Parts V-Line Compressors
3-1
3-2
3-31
3-38
3-39
3-39
3-41
4-1
4-1
4-2
5-1
5-9
Spare Parts and Service
Spare Parts can be ordered direct from the following address:

HATLAPA Marine Equipment Ltd.
551 553 Wallisdown Road
BH12 5AG England
Telephone:
Facsimile:
e-mail
+44 (0) 1202 853180

+44 (0) 1202 853190
spares@hatlapa-uk.com
When ordering spare parts, the following information is required to ensure that correct parts are supplied:
Type and serial number of machine:
Obtained from machine nameplate
Item Number and full description of part required:
Obtained from details in this publication
Original 2011-06-21
Technical Service and Advice:

Technical service and advice can be obtained during normal working hours from the above address, on the
following contact numbers
Telephone:
Facsimile:
Email:
+44 (0) 1202 853175

+44 (0) 1202 853190
service@hatlapa-uk.com
Signs used
DANGER
This sign indicates behaviour which if not observed is highly dangerous, or which may lead to
permanent bodily injury.
Observe the warning exactly and pass this to other operators of the equipment also.
CAUTION
This sign indicates behaviour which if not observed may lead to injury to persons, severe
damage, or severe mal-function of the equipment, or to damage to the environment.
PAY ATTENTION
This sign indicates behaviour which if not observed may lead to damage or mal-function of the
equipment.
INFORMATION
This sign indicates tips and useful information which makes the operation of the equipment or
the understanding of the documentation easier.
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
1.1
LOCATION
The suction inlet should be installed in a well ventilated position so that air drawn into the compressor is as
cool and dry as possible and there is adequate circulation to the drive motor integral cooling fan and all the
compressor external surfaces.
The compressor must be positioned with the axis of the crankshaft and motor fore and aft in the vessel to
ensure adequate lubrication during the vessels normal roll, pitch, list and trim modes.
1.2
MOUNTING
The compressor should be mounted on support plates/pads and supported by a ribbed structure suitable for
the type and weight of the compressor. The pads/plates must be clean and flat to within 0.5 mm (1 mm with
anti-vibration mounts). Shims should be used if necessary. Refer to general arrangement drawing supplied
with the compressor documentation package for mounting feet or anti-vibration mounts dimensions and
positions and weight of the compressor.
1.3
COMMISSIONING
Original 2011-06-21
DANGER
Do not make any adjustments to the compressor, its connections or fittings whilst the
compressor is running or on standby duty.
Do not run the compressor unless all protective guards fitted to it and its prime mover
are in place.
1.
Ensure compressor is isolated from its electrical supply.
2.
Check lubricating oil level in crankcase sump.
3.
Before initial start up, or after any servicing has been carried out, or when the compressor has not
been run for 5 weeks or more, carry out the following procedures.
a.
Remove the suction filter of the first stage (see chapter 3.2.3 Air Suction Filter/Silencer Removal
and Replacement) and the plug from the second stage cylinder head.
b.
Pour 20 millilitres of lubricating oil on the valves of first and second stage.
c.
Replace suction filter and plug.

PAY ATTENTION
After adding oil to the valves, the compressor must be barred over at least
3 complete revolutions to ensure lubrication of the cylinder bores during initial
start up and minimise the risk of the piston causing a hydraulic lock when the
compressor is started.
d.
4.
Open air bleed valve (C10 in Figure 5.2) to remove air trapped in water box cooler passages.
Remove guard covering barring over access aperture in crankcase.

CAUTION
Take precautions to prevent injury to personnel whilst observing the direction
of rotation of the flywheel through the unguarded barring over access aperture.
Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION
5.
Using a bar (not supplied) in one of the holes in the flywheel turn over the compressor through at least
three complete revolutions.
6.
Connect the electrical supply and carry out a momentary start and stop.
7.
Check that rotation of compressor is clockwise looking on the drive end of the compressor (indicated
by cast arrow). If direction of rotation is incorrect, take appropriate steps to correct.
8.
Connect compressor control, refit guard (170) covering barring over access aperture.
9.
Start compressor in MAN mode (HATLAPA compressor control: Press MAN button). Check the
following details within the first minute of the run.
10.
a.
Check that the cooling water system is operating and the outlet from the compressor is
registering a flow.
b.
Check that final stage air pressure is increasing over ambient pressure values.
Start compressor in AUT mode (HATLAPA compressor control: Press AUTO button). Allow
compressor to continue to run under the control of the system pressure switch and closely monitor the
temperature differential between cooling water inlet and outlet temperatures, adjusting valves etc as
appropriate to adjust the water flow rate to achieve a temperature differential of approximately 15C.
Original 2011-06-21
This temperature differential equates to the nominal flow rate as specified in

Technical Data
The compressor must run continuously for approximately 30 minutes to reach normal operating
temperature. It may be necessary to bleed off air from the system to prevent the compressor stopping
prematurely.
11.
Check the operation of the system pressure switch.
12.
After satisfactory operation of the pressure control system, the compressor is now commissioned for
use. The compressor may be either left running (AUT mode) to charge the air system or stopped
(HATLAPA compressor control: Press STOP button).
Page 1-2
CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PROCEDURE
OPERATING PROCEDURE
2.1
DESCRIPTION
The standard V-Line compressor is supplied with gauges, a dual set point high air temperature switch, a dual
set point low lubricating oil switch and two solenoid operated drain valves.
The high air temperature switch (double pole) is fitted to protect the compressor by shutting it down if the
temperature rises above the normal maximum operating temperature. As an option, the second pole of the
switch may be connected to give a panel indicated warning of approaching shutdown temperature.
The low lubricating oil switch (double pole) will also shut down the compressor if it detects the oil level is
below the minimum requirement. An adjustable time delay is included to overcome false tripping due to the
roll and pitch of the vessel. The second pole may be connected to give a panel warning of approaching
shutdown oil level.
The compressor starting method can be either star/delta or direct-on-line.
The compressor may be supplied with a water circulating pump if required.
Original 2011-06-21
2.2
CONTROL AND OPERATING PHILOSOPHY
The compressor is fitted with protection devices which immediately stop and unload the compressor, when it
is connected to a suitable compressor control, (supplied by HATLAPA or the customer) if any of the following
events occur:
minimum oil level
shutdown and optional pre-alarm
high final delivery temperature
shutdown and optional pre-alarm
high compressor motor current
shutdown only
high water pump motor current
shutdown only (if water circulating pump supplied)
emergency stop button operation
shutdown only (optionally)
The compressor control should be capable of the following functions:
selection of AUTO mode
start/stop sequence local or remote (optionally)
selection of MAN mode
local start/stop only
If more than one compressor is charging the system a selector switch should be fitted enabling the sequence
in which the compressors should work i.e. lead and follow.
The following functions are optionally:
Emergency stop
shutdown only local or remote (optionally)
selection LOCAL / REMOTE mode
in AUT mode start/stop sequence local or remote
Page 2-1
Original 2011-06-21
2.3
NORMAL RUNNING (AUTOMATIC CONTROL)
2.3.1
Normal Running with HATLAPA Compressor Control
1.
If manual drain valves are installed in parallel to the solenoid valves, close the manual drain valves.
2.
Energise the starter panel by operating the main isolator.

Set LOCAL/REMOTE switch as required.
3.
On pressing the AUTO button, the following events occur:
4.
The compressor starts and runs off load (open solenoid drain valves).
The water shut off valve Y5 (optional) is energised to open (when fitted).
The compressor will run off load for 20 seconds after which solenoid valves are energised to close to
charge the air system.(Note that the compressor will only go on load if the system is not fully charged.)
Check the visual flow indicator (FI, optionally) at the compressor cooling water outlet to ensure that
water is circulating through the compressor. In the event that there is no flow stop the compressor and
investigate the cause.
5.
The compressor is now controlled by the air system pressure switch. At 5 minute intervals (adjustable)
the drain solenoid valves are de-energised for 2 seconds (adjustable) to drain the separator bowls. The
drainage interval and duration should be adjusted to suit climatic conditions, e.g. high humidity short
intervals and longer duration.
6.
On air system charged signal, the solenoid valves are de-energised to open to drain and unload the
compressor until a signal is received:
7.
on recharge signal the solenoid valves are energised to close causing the compressor to charge
the system
if the recharge signal is not received within 5 minutes (adjustable) of the charged signal, the
compressor stops leaving the solenoid valves open. On recharge signal the compressor starts.
On pressing the STOP button the solenoid drain valves are de-energised to open to drain the
separators, the compressor stops off load. With a 2 minutes delay water shut off valve Y5 (optional) is
de-energised to close.
Page 2-2
Original 2011-06-21
2.3.2
Normal Running with Compressor Control by Customer (based on HATLAPA Proposal for
Wiring Diagrams)
1.

Set mode switch S1 to AUTO.
Set local/remote switch S2 as required.
Set drain switch S3 to AUTO (S3 not fitted if hand drain valves supplied).
2.
On pressing the START button, the compressor runs off-load for a short time (approximately
1520 seconds) after which the drain/unloading solenoid valves are energised to close to charge the
system. (Note that the compressor will only go on load if the system is not fully charged.)
3.
The compressor is now controlled by the air system pressure switch. At 5 minute intervals (adjustable)
the drain solenoid valves are de-energised for 2 seconds (adjustable) to drain the separator bowls. The
drainage interval and duration should be adjusted to suit climatic conditions, e.g. high humidity short
intervals and longer duration.
4.
On air system charged signal, the solenoid valves are de-energised to open to drain and unload the
compressor until a signal is received:
on recharge signal the solenoid valves are energised to close causing the compressor to charge
the system
if the recharge signal is not received within 5 minutes (adjustable) of the charged signal, the
compressor stops leaving the solenoid valves open. On recharge signal the compressor starts as
for pressing the START button (and lamp goes out).
5.
On pressing the STOP button (or switching S1 to OFF or MAN) the solenoid valves are de-energised
to open to drain the separator bowls, the compressor continues to run-on unloaded for 5 minutes
(adjustable) before stopping. Pressing the START button during this cycle brings the compressor back
on line to recharge the system.
6.
If the START button is pressed while the air system is fully charged, the compressor starts as
described in 2. The compressor is then controlled by the air system pressure switch as in 4. and 5.
above.
Page 2-3
2.4
MANUAL MODE RUNNING
2.4.1
Manual Running with HATLAPA Compressor Control
1.

Set LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL..
2.
Press the MAN button. The compressor will start and run in this mode only if the high air temperature
switch and oil level switch are not indicating alarm. The emergency stop button and motor overloads
will still stop and unload the compressor. Under Manual mode the air system pressure switch will not
stop the compressor!
Original 2011-06-21
2.4.2
Manual Running with Compressor Control by Customer (based on HATLAPA Proposal for
Wiring Diagrams)
1.

Set mode switch S1 to MAN.
Set local/remote switch S2 as required.
Set drain switch S3 to AUTO (S3 not fitted if hand drain valves supplied).
2.
On pressing the START button, the compressor will start and run in this mode overriding the low oil
level and high air temperature shutdown devices. The emergency stop button and motor thermal
overloads will still stop and unload the machine.
Compressor and air system protection during manual mode running are given by first and final stage air and
water jacket safety valves and any other safety device fitted to the installed system.
Starting, running and run down cycles are as for normal (automatic) running as described with the exception
of the following:
oil level switch overridden.
high air temperature switch overridden.
remote start/stop function disabled.
Page 2-4
2.5
GENERAL
Individual volt-free change-over contacts and control panel mounted indicator lamps are provided as listed
below:
compressor running
water pump running (if fitted)
low oil level shutdown
low oil level warning (if fitted)
high air temperature shutdown
high air temperature warning (if fitted)
compressor motor overload
water pump motor overload (if fitted)
Original 2011-06-21
Terminals are provided for a remote emergency stop push-button (if required).
Warning (pre-alarm) oil level and high air temperature indicator lamps and volt free contacts, are an optional
extra and are not fitted as standard.
Page 2-5
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 3 MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
DANGER
Before proceeding with maintenance or overhaul, the compressor must be stopped and
isolated mechanically and electrically, and visible warning notices displayed.
When working on water and/or air passages the compressor must be vented of all
pressurised air and drained of cooling water.
Viton o-rings and seals are fitted to this compressor. When viton is subjected to
excessive temperatures (above 400 C) it decomposes and can cause serious injury.
When maintaining the equipment protective gloves should be worn.
3.1
GENERAL
Original 2011-06-21
Routine maintenance of the compressor should be carried out at the intervals listed in the Maintenance
Schedule under normal conditions. However, the optimum period between servicing will depend upon the
operating conditions.
Before re-assembly, clean all parts with a suitable cleaning fluid and examine for wear, corrosion, cracks,
distortion, or any other damage. Renew as necessary. Refer to the wear tolerances given in Chapter 4
TECHNICAL DATA.
When re-assembling compressor components, renew all joints, gaskets, and O-rings seals. Great care must
be taken to ensure that they are not damaged.
Item numbers in the text refer to items on the Sectional Arrangement Drawings which are at the end of this
manual.
When using Loctite products for nut and screw retention note the following. The shelf life of Loctite is one
year at a storage temperature of 622C. All components to be fixed with Loctite should be thoroughly
degreased using a Loctite activator. If cured Loctite is present in a tapped hole or external thread, discard
the bolt or nut, or clean with a die and tap internal threads. All fasteners must be torqued to their specified
level (see Table 3.1).
After any servicing has been carried out, refer to Chapter 1.3COMMISSIONING before restarting.
Table 3.1
Standard
Fastener Torque Settings (unlubricated)
M6
M8
M10
M12
6 Nm
16 Nm
32 Nm
70 Nm
170 Nm
70 Nm
170 Nm
Cooler - Header (94)

Gudgeon Pin/Piston
fasteners (41, 65)
Flywheel Cone
Clamping screws (9)
Coupling Pins (G4)
6 Nm
20 Nm
35 Nm
35 Nm
71 Nm
M14
140 Nm
M16
220 Nm
M20
500 Nm
Page 3-1
Maintenance Schedule
Original 2011-06-21
Time required
for operation.
Every 5 years
or 5000 hours.
Every 2 years
or 2000 hours
Normal Operating Services
Daily or every
10 hours
At 50 hours
Daily or every
10 hours
Commissioning
Period
Every 6 months
or 500 hours.
Table 3.2
1.
Check oil level on dipstick.
2.
Drain and refill lubricating oil.
3.
Replace air inlet filter.
4.
Clean and inspect delivery line nonreturn valve.
30 mins
5.
Clean first & second stage valves.

Renew any parts or complete valve
as necessary. Renew seals/ O-rings.
4 hours
6.
Renew first & second stage valves.

Renew seals/O-rings.
2 hours
7.
Check settings of all

pressure safety valves,
replace as necessary.
1 hour
8.
Remove inter/after coolers and

clean.
4 hours
9.
Dismantle and measure moving

parts for wear.
6 hours
10. Check condition of diffuser in 1st

and 2nd stage separators
2 hours
11. Replace bearings
12 hours
A complete overhaul, including bearing replacement, is recommended every 5 years or 5,000 running hours.
After a major service, follow the commissioning procedure detailed in chapter 1 INSTALLATION.
Page 3-2
3.2
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
3.2.1
Lubrication Oil Checking
Refer to chapter 4 TECHNICAL DATA for oil capacities and recommended lubricants.
7.
Remove filler/dipstick (161) and check oil level.
8.
Fill/top up crankcase oil level if necessary with lubricating oil to full level on dipstick.
Periodically examine oil in crankcase and ensure that it is not contaminated with condensate. If the oil is
emulsified (creamy in colour) it must be changed and the crankcase cleaned. To minimise the risk of
emulsification use a recommended oil, ensure that the compressor is not overcooled by fitting a water shut
off valve, and maintaining a 15 C cooling water temperature rise across the machine.
If moisture forms without emulsification, as two separate liquids, condensate may be drained from below the
oil. The oil level should then be restored with fresh oil.
Crankcase oil contamination is often accompanied by an increase in sump oil level, due to oil being
supported by condensate fluid.
Original 2011-06-21
3.2.2
Lubrication Oil Changing
1.
Remove the drain plug (160) after the compressor has been running, whilst the oil is still warm and
drain oil from the compressor. Dispose of used oil in accordance with local regulations.
2.
Clean the magnetic portion of plug before replacing into crankcase.
3.
Remove and clean oil level switch, see chapter 3.2.23 Oil Level Switch Remove/Clean/Replace.
Reassemble oil level switch.
4.
Refill with fresh oil.
3.2.3
Air Suction Filter/Silencer Removal and Replacement
1.
Before removing the air filter silencer assembly, clean the outside of the filter body.
2.
Remove wing nut (F8 V105/150) (168 V200/250/375) on top of filter assembly.
3.
Remove top cover. On V105/V150 only, remove wing nut (F4).
4.
Remove filter body complete, with inlet resonator, hose clip, O ring, and element.
5.
Unless filter/silencer assembly is to be re-assembled immediately, cover valve cage aperture.
6.
Renew element if necessary.
7.
Reassemble filter (Hand tighten only).
Page 3-3
3.2.4
First Stage Concentric Valve Removal/Servicing/Replacement
Removal
Remove air suction filter silencer assembly from valve cage as detailed in chapter 3.2.3 Air Suction
Filter/Silencer Removal and Replacement.
2.
Remove studding (165) and the four nuts (56) and washers (57) from the top of the valve cage (45).
3.
Release crankcase breather hose (32) from the hose connector (46) (not applicable on V375).
4.
Remove valve cage (45) complete with concentric valve (50) using M12 or M16 screws (not supplied)
in the two tapped jacking holes. (On V375 use the eyebolt fitted).
5.
Cover open bores on cylinder and breather hose.
6.
Remove stud connector (54) and washer (55) from concentric valve (A1) central stud.
7.
Remove dome nuts (A2) and joint washers (53) from concentric valve outer side.
8.
Separate concentric valve (50) from valve cage (45).
Original 2011-06-21
1.
Page 3-4
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.1
Page 3-5
Original 2011-06-21
*
*
Figure 3.2
Page 3-6
Original 2011-06-21
*
*
Figure 3.3
First Stage Concentric Valve V375

Page 3-7
Dismantling (See Figure 3.1, Figure 3.2, Figure 3.3)

PAY ATTENTION
A valve assembly must not be held directly between vice jaws. Never hammer a
spanner when loosening or tightening the valve nuts.
1.
Unscrew and remove nut (9 V105/150) (10 V200/250/375).

When dismantling valve, note the method and order of renewal of each valve
component. Refer to the illustration of the valve assembly to ensure that the
components are rebuilt in their correct order.
2.
Clean all components thoroughly. Remove grease and carbon deposits with a soft brush using a hot
water and soda solution. Care must be taken during the cleaning operation as any surface scratch
may cause leakage and ultimately a breakage.
3.
Inspect each component. If any items appear defective, worn or damaged, replace with new parts.
Original 2011-06-21
Re-assembly (See Figure 3.1, Figure 3.2, Figure 3.3)

1.
Assemble the valve components on the lower delivery valve seat (2) and studs.
PAY ATTENTION
Ensure that the components are correctly positioned on their locating pins.
2.
Fit the upper suction valve seat (1) in position and fit nut (9 V105/150) (10 V200/250/375).
3.
Check that the valve functions correctly and that plate movement exists. Extreme care must be taken
to ensure that the valve is not scraped or damaged in this operation.
Page 3-8
Valve Replacement
1.
Renew O rings (48) fitted to valve cage (45) and O rings (51, 52) fitted to concentric valve (50).
2.
Assemble concentric valve to valve cage and loosely fit dome nuts (A2), joint washers (53), stud
connector (54) and washer (55) to concentric valve studs.
3.
Fit valve cage and valve to cylinder (39) and re-connect crankcase breather hose (32) to the hose
connector (46).
V375 only. Refit the valve with the fitting eye uppermost ensuring that the dowel pin
aligns with the mating hole in the cylinder.
4.
Tighten stud connector (54) and dome nuts (A2).
5.
Fit washers (56) and nuts (55) to studs (42) and tighten nuts. Refer to Table 3.1 for tightening torques.
6.
Fit studding (165) to stud connector and tighten.
7.
Reassemble suction filter silencer assembly to valve cage as described in chapter 3.2.3.
3.2.5
Final Stage Concentric Valve Removal/Servicing/Replacement
Original 2011-06-21
Removal
1.
Remove the four nuts (79) and washers (80) from the top of the valve cage.
2.
Remove valve cage (70) complete with concentric valve (75) using screws (not supplied) in the two
tapped jacking holes.
3.
Cover bores on cylinder.
4.
Remove dome nuts (B2) and joint washers (78) from concentric valve studs.
5.
Separate concentric valve (75) from valve cage (70).
Page 3-9
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.4
Page 3-10
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.5
Page 3-11
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.6
Page 3-12
Final Stage Concentric Valve V375
Dismantling (See Figure 3.4, Figure 3.5, Figure 3.6)
1.
Unscrew the three socket head cap screws (8 V105/150) (13 V200/250) (not applicable on V375).
Unscrew the centre nut (9 - V105/150) (10 - V200/250/V375).
When dismantling valve, note the method and order of renewal of each valve
component. Refer to the illustration of the valve assembly to ensure that the
components are rebuilt in their correct order.
2.
Clean all components thoroughly, remove grease and carbon deposits with a soft brush using a hot
water and soda solution. Care must be taken during the cleaning operation as any surface scratch
may cause leakage and ultimately a breakage.
3.
Inspect each component. If any items appear defective, worn or damaged, replace with new parts.
Original 2011-06-21
Re-assembly (See Figure 3.4, Figure 3.5, Figure 3.6)

1.
Assemble the valve components on the lower delivery valve seat (2) and studs and ensure that the
components are correctly positioned on their locating pins.
2.
Fit the upper suction valve seat (1) in position. Fit the three socket head cap screws (8 V105/150)
(13 V200/250) (not V375).
3.
Check that the valve functions correctly and that plate movement exists. Extreme care must be taken
to ensure that the valve is not scraped or damaged in this operation.
Valve Replacement
1.
Renew O rings (71, 72) fitted to valve cage (70) and O rings (76, 77) fitted to concentric valve (75).
2.
Assemble concentric valve (75) to valve cage (70) and tighten dome nuts (B2) and joint washers (78)
to the valve studs.
3.
Fit valve cage and concentric valve assembly to cylinder (66).
4.
Fit 4 off nuts (79) and bright washers (80) to studs (67) and tighten nuts. Refer to Table 3.1 for torque.
3.2.6
First Stage Cylinder and Piston Removal

PAY ATTENTION
When removing 1st stage cylinders, it can be difficult to prevent the piston from
dropping out of the cylinder bore and falling onto the edge of the crankcase. To ensure
that this does not occur, strategically place an appropriate cushioning material
immediately the cylinder becomes clear of the crankcase so that if the piston does fall
no damage can result.
1.
Drain compressor of all cooling water.
2.
Remove water outlet connection from cylinder.
3.
Remove first stage concentric valve and cage assembly from cylinder as detailed in chapter 3.2.4.
4.
Remove guard (170) from crankcase.

If final stage cylinder has been removed take precautions to protect exposed
components in the crankcase.
5.
Using a bar turn over the compressor until the first stage piston (35) is at the top of its stroke in the
cylinder.
6.
Remove the bolts (94, 101, 106) and washers (95, 102, 107) securing the cooler header (93) to the
cylinder.
Page 3-13
7.
Fit an eyebolt (not supplied) into the tapping in the top of the cylinder and connect to suitable lifting
tackle.
8.
Using lifting tackle and by striking the cylinder gently with a soft headed mallet break the seals
between the cylinder and crankcase, cylinder and cooler header.
9.
Lift and guide the cylinder off the piston assembly take care to prevent damage to the piston assembly
as it becomes free from the cylinder.
CAUTION
With cylinder removed protect personnel from injury from the exposed studs
(43) at all times until the cylinder is re-assembled.
10.
Identify with non-destructive marker, orientation of piston side and gudgeon pin end towards front of
compressor.
11.
Slacken the locknuts (42) which secure the cap head screws, from the underside of the piston.
Remove the 2 cap head screws (41) from the underside of the piston (35) which lock the gudgeon pin
(40) in position.
Original 2011-06-21
PAY ATTENTION
Take care when the pin is free to prevent damage of rod striking piston internals and
crankcase.
12.
Push gudgeon pin out of piston and connecting rod (15). Remove piston and pin.
13.
Cover the crankcase aperture.
14.
Examine removed components replacing worn/damaged parts as necessary. For wear allowances see
chapter 4 TECHNICAL DATA.
If required connecting rod small end needle roller bearing (17) may be removed and
refitted without dismantling compressor any further. Chapter 3.2.15 refers.
Page 3-14
3.2.7
1.
First Stage Cylinder and Piston Reassembly

Before commencing reassembly ensure that sufficient Loctite sealant and retainer is available to seal
the cylinder to the crankcase.
Original 2011-06-21
The minimum amount of Loctite flange sealant number 573 required is 50 millilitres.
2.
Remove all traces of sealant on joint faces of cylinder to crankcase and ensure surfaces are grease
free.
3.
Remove all traces of gasketing on joint faces of cylinder to cooler header and ensure faces are grease free.
Do not smooth joint faces. Do not use emery cloth or a metal scraper to abrade or clean them. It is
recommended that a chemical such as Loctite Chisel is used in conjunction with hand brushing with a wire
brush.
4.
If new piston rings are being fitted gap rings to cylinder to a closed gap of 0.175/0.300 mm
(V105/150), 0.20/0.33 mm (V200/250) or 0.26/0.39 mm (V375). Ensure rings are fitted as follows to
the piston.
a.
Barrel faced ring (38) top groove.
b.
Taper faced ring (37) second groove (this ring can be readily identified against the barrel faced
ring by the internal chamfer on the taper faced ring.)
c.
Both rings must be fitted with the face marked Top facing towards the piston crown.
d.
S.O.C. ring (36) bottom groove.
5.
Align adjacent piston ring gaps on piston at 180 to each other.
6.
Ensure threaded holes in piston are clean. Fit lock nuts (42) to cap head screws (41) and ensure that
it is fully onto the screw (within 12 mm of the screw head). Screw cap head screws and lock nuts
into the threaded holes in the piston such that the end of screw is approximately 1 mm from gudgeon
pin bore.
PAY ATTENTION
Care must be taken when passing the ring pack across the cut-out in the cylinder
location spigot.
Ring gaps must not be in this area.
7.
Fit piston into cylinder bore far enough to enclose the ring pack but to leave the gudgeon pin bore
accessible.
PAY ATTENTION
Exercise caution so that the piston does not drop out of the cylinder.
8.
Using suitable lifting tackle connected to the cylinder lifting eye align cylinder assembly on to studs.
9.
Lower cylinder/piston assembly gradually above the con rod and align the gudgeon pin bore of the
piston with the small end of the con rod. Lightly oil the small end roller bearing. Without oiling, fit
gudgeon pin (40) to piston, ensuring marks at piston and gudgeon pin are towards front of
compressor, with marks aligned to each other.
10.
Ensure that locknuts (42) are loose and have not been clamped by cap head screws (41). Tighten
cap head screws (41) - see Table 3.1 for Torques. Fasten locknut.
11.
Lightly oil piston skirt and cylinder bore. Introduce oil into the small end roller bearing.
Page 3-15
12.
Coat underside of cylinder (joint face to crankcase) with Loctite flange sealant 573.
13.
Lower cylinder into contact with crankcase
14.
Fit new gasket (100) between cylinder and cooler header. Do not grease gasket or faces.
15.
Fit bolts (101) and bright washers (102) through cooler header into cylinder and tighten finger tight.
16.
Fit concentric valve and cage assembly to cylinder as detailed in chapter 3.2.4.
17.
Torque bolts (101) to the appropriate level. Refer to Table 3.1 for torque.
18.
Reconnect water outlet pipework/hose to cylinder.
19.
Refit guard (170) to crankcase.
Original 2011-06-21
3.2.8
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston Removal
1.
2.
Remove water inlet connection from cylinder.
3.
Remove concentric valve and valve cage assembly from cylinder as detailed in chapter 3.2.5.
4.
Remove guard (170) from crankcase.

If first stage cylinder has been removed, take precautions to protect exposed
components in the crankcase.
5.
Using a bar turn over the compressor until the second stage piston (60) is at the top of its stroke in the
cylinder.
6.
Remove the 2 screws (117) and washers (118) securing the separator header to the cylinder. Remove
the separator from the cooler box by removing the bolts (112) and stud (113) securing the separator
header (E1) to the cooler box (C1).
7.
Remove the bolts (106) and washers (107) securing the cooler header (93) to the cylinder.
8.
Fit an eyebolt (not supplied) into the tapping in the top of the cylinder and connect to suitable lifting
tackle.
9.
Using lifting tackle and by striking the cylinder gently with a soft headed mallet, break the seals
between the cylinder and crankcase, cylinder and separator, cylinder and cooler header.
10.
Lift and guide the cylinder off the piston assembly taking adequate precautions to prevent damage to
the piston assembly as it becomes free from the cylinder.
CAUTION
With cylinder removed protect personnel from injury from the exposed studs
(67) at all times until the cylinder is re-assembled to crankcase.
11.
Identify with non-destructive marker, orientation of piston side and gudgeon pin end towards front of
compressor.
12.
Only V200/V250/375: Remove the two socket set screws (59) saving the socket set screws (65) from
the underside of the piston (60).
Remove the two socket set screws (65) from the underside of the piston (60) which lock the
gudgeon pin (64) in position.
Page 3-16
PAY ATTENTION
Take care when the pin is free to prevent damage of rod striking piston internals and
crankcase.
13.
Push gudgeon pin out of piston and connecting rod (19). Remove piston and gudgeon pin.
14.
Cover the crankcase aperture.
15.
Examine removed components replacing worn/damaged parts as appropriate. For wear allowances
see chapter 4 TECHNICAL DATA.
If required connecting rod small end needle roller bearing (21) may be removed and
refitted without dismantling compressor any further. Chapter 3.2.15 refers.
3.2.9
Original 2011-06-21
1.
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston Reassembly

Before commencing reassembly ensure that sufficient Loctite sealant and retainer is available to seal
the cylinder to the crankcase and retain the hexagon socket set screws in the piston.
a.
Minimum amount Loctite flange sealant 573 required is 50 millilitres.
b.
Minimum amount Loctite nutlock 243 required is 10 millilitres.
2.
Remove all traces of sealant on joint faces of cylinder to crankcase and ensure surfaces are grease
free.
3.
Remove all traces of gasketing on joint faces of cylinder to cooler header, cylinder to separator and
separator to cooler box, and ensure surfaces are grease free. Do not smooth joint faces. Do not use
emery cloth or a metal scraper to abrade or clean them. It is recommended that a chemical such as Loctite
Chisel is used in conjunction with hand brushing with a wire brush.
4.
Remove Loctite from threads in piston using a tap. If grub screws are to be re-used clean the threads
using a die.
5.
If new piston rings are being fitted gap rings to cylinder to a closed gap of 0.075/0.200 mm
(V105/150), 0.10/0.23 mm (V200/250) or 0.11/0.24 mm (V375). Ensure rings are fitted as follows to
the piston.
6.
a.
Barrel faced ring (63) top groove.
b.
Taper faced ring (62) second groove (this ring can be easily identified against the barrel faced
ring by the internal chamfer on the taper faced ring.)
c.
Both rings are to be fitted with the face marked Top facing towards the piston crown.
d.
S.O.C. ring (61) bottom groove.
For V105/150
Thoroughly clean tapped holes in piston and grub screws (65) with Loctite Activator 7471.
Coat grub screws with Loctite 243 liberally. Screw grub screws into the threaded holes in the
piston. Screw through until tip of grub screw is approximately 1 mm from gudgeon pin bore.
Introduce oil into 2nd stage small end bearing.
Align the gudgeon pin bore of piston with the small end of the con rod. Without oiling, fit
compressor, with marks aligned to each other. Tighten grub screws (65), see Table 3.1 for
tightening torque.
For V200/V250/V375
Thoroughly clean tapped holes in piston and grub screws (65) with Loctite Activator 7471.
Screw grub screws into the threaded holes in the piston. Screw through until tip of grub screw
is approximately 1 mm from gudgeon pin bore.
Page 3-17
Introduce oil into 2nd stage small end bearing.
Align the gudgeon pin bore of piston with the small end of the con rod. Without oiling, fit
compressor, with marks aligned to each other. Tighten grub screws (65), see Table 3.1 for
tightening torque.
Original 2011-06-21
Coat grub screws (59) with Loctite 243 liberally. Screw grub screws into the threaded holes in
the piston for locking grub screws (65), see Table 3.1 for tightening torque.
7.
Align adjacent piston ring gaps on piston at 180 to each other.
8.
Using suitable lifting tackle align cylinder over studs (67) and onto piston. Compressing piston rings to
guide the cylinder over piston.
9.
Coat underside of cylinder (joint face to crankcase) with Loctite flange sealant 573.
10.
Lower cylinder into contact with crankcase.
11.
Fit new gasket (105) between cylinder and cooler header (93). Do not grease gasket or joint face. Fit
bolts (106) and bright washers (107) through cooler header into cylinder and tighten finger tight.
12.
Fit new gasket gasket (111) between separator header (E1) and cooler box. Do not grease gasket or
joint face. Fit bolts (112) and stud bolts (113) along with bright washers (114) through separator
header into cooler box, tighten finger tight.
13.
Fit new gasket (116) between cylinder and separator header (E1). Do not grease gasket or joint face.
Fit screws (117) and washers (118) through separator header into cylinder, tighten finger tight.
14.
Adjust gap between final stage cylinder and cooler header using feeler gauges, to give the best
parallel flange seal. This can be achieved by rotating the cylinder to give an equal gap each end.
15.
Fit concentric valve and cage assembly to cylinder as detailed in chapter 3.2.5.
16.
Torque bolts (106, 112, 113, 117) to the appropriate level. Refer to Table 3.1 for torque.
17.
Reconnect water inlet connection to cylinder.
18.
Refit guard (170) to crankcase.
3.2.10
Cooler Tubenest and Header Removal
1.
2.
Remove gauge pipes.
3.
Remove the bolts (101) and washers (102) securing the cooler header (93) to the first stage cylinder
(39).
4.
Remove the bolts (106) and washers (107) securing the cooler header to the second stage cylinder.
Fit 2 x M12 eyebolts (V200/250/V375 only, not supplied) in the top of the cooler header and connect to
suitable lifting tackle.
5.
Remove the remaining bolts (94) securing the cooler header.
6.
Remove cooler header (93) from tubenest (91) and cylinders by gently tapping with a soft headed
mallet if necessary to separate the gaskets between the cooler header and tubenest, header and first
stage cylinder, header and second stage cylinder.
7.
Remove tubenest (91) from cooler box by gently tapping tubeplate with a soft headed mallet to
separate the gasket (90) between the tubenest and cooler box.
3.2.11
1.
Tubenest Clean/Examine/Replace
Remove tubenest assembly.
Page 3-18
PAY ATTENTION
Take care not to damage the cooler tube surface.
2.
Clean the outside of the cooler tubes to remove any scale or sediment.
3.
Clean the internal faces of the cooler box to remove any scale or sediment.
4.
Chemically clean the tube internals using ARDROX or similar chemical cleaner to solve any scale.
5.
Examine tubes for signs of damage und reduction in tube wall thickness. If there is any doubt in the
condition of the tubenest HATLAPA recommend replacement of the tubenest assembly.
Original 2011-06-21
Faulty cooler tubes that are part of a U tube nest formation cannot be removed
individually, the complete tubenest assembly must be replaced.
Page 3-19
3.2.12 Cooler Tubenest and Header Assembly to Compressor
Original 2011-06-21
The following procedure assumes that the first and final stage cylinder assemblies have been
assembled to the crankcase.
1.
To assist alignment of gaskets, tubenest and header insert 2 threaded bolts (not supplied) into the top
2 outermost tapped holes in the cooler box front face.
2.
Ensure all the joint faces are clean and grease free. Do not smooth joint faces.
3.
Fit cooler box gasket (90) over threaded bolts. Do not grease gasket.
4.
Fit tubenest (91) over bolts.
5.
Fit tubenest gasket (92) over bolts. Do not grease gasket.
6.
Fit cooler header (93) over bolts.
7.
Insert gasket (100) between header and first stage cylinder, loosely fit the bolts (101) and washers
(102) through the header. Do not grease gasket.
8.
Insert gasket (105) between header and final stage cylinder, loosely fit the 3 bolts (106) and washers
(107) through the header. Do not grease gasket.
9.
Loosely fit all but 2 of the bolts (94) and washers (95) through the cooler header and tubenest to the
cooler box.
10.
Remove the lengths of studding used for guidance and insert the remaining 2 bolts and washers.
11.
Tighten the bolts (101, 106) cooler header to cylinders. See Table 3.1 for tightening torques.
Figure 3.7
Cooler Header
12.
Tighten the bolts (94) in the cooler header progressively in numerical order as shown until they are
torqued correctly. Refer to Figure 3.7 for order and Table 3.1 for tightening torques.
13.
Re-connect the gauge pipes.
Page 3-20
3.2.13
Cooler box end cover
Removal
14.
Remove cooler drain plug (C6).
15.
Remove the bolts (C4) and washers (C5) and release cooler box end cover (C2).
16.
Clean and remove all traces of gasket (C3) from joint faces on end cover and cooler box. Ensure joint
faces are grease/oil free. Do not smooth joint faces.
Re-assembly
1.
Assemble gasket (C3) between cover and cooler box. Note: Do not grease gasket or joint faces.
2.
Secure cover to cooler box with bolts (C4) and plain washers (C5). See Table 3.1 for tightening
torques.
3.
Fit cooler drain plug (C6) to cover.
Original 2011-06-21
3.2.14
Connecting Rod Removal
1.
Drain compressor of cooling water.
2.
Drain oil and dispose of in accordance with local regulations.
3.
Remove the first and final stage cylinders and pistons as detailed in chapter 3.2.6. and 3.2.8.
4.
Remove the screws (157) and washers (158) securing the crankcase inspection cover (155).
5.
Using a soft headed mallet gently tap the side faces of the crankcase inspection cover to break its seal
with the crankcase. Remove the cover.
6.
Remove screw (23), tab washer (24) and retaining washer (22).
7.
Using a puller over the second stage connecting rod (19) big end withdraw rod off crankshaft complete
with cylindrical roller (big end) bearing (20).
8.
Remove spacer (18) from crankshaft.
9.
Using a puller over the first stage connecting rod (15) big end withdraw rod off crankshaft complete
with cylindrical roller (big end) bearing (16).
3.2.15
Bearing Removal and Reassembly to Connecting Rods

When the connecting rods have been removed both the big and small end bearings
should be renewed. Gudgeon pins must always be replaced at the same time as the
small end bearings. If the existing big end bearings are undamaged and are to be
refitted, the inner race, rolls and bearing cage must be refitted in the original position.
On a V200/250/375 compressor only, the bearing is supplied as a matched pair and must be
assembled as such.
1.
Press out the big and small end bearings from the connecting rod.
2.
Clean big and small end bores of connecting rod, ensure all traces of old retaining compound and any
oil or moisture is removed from the big end bore.
Page 3-21
3.
V105 and V150

Degrease con rod big end bores (15, 19) and outer race of big end roller bearings (16, 20). Clean with
Loctite Cleaner 7200.
PAY ATTENTION
Ensure no Loctite enters the bearing.
Spread Loctite 603 over the outer race of the big end bearing (16, 20).
Press bearings into con rods. See Figure 3.8 for the correct orientation of the circlip side of the big end
bearing to the dipper.
PAY ATTENTION
Ensure that the lubrication hole in the small end roller bearing is in line with the
lubrication hole in the con rod.
Press small end roller bearings (17, 21) into lightly oiled small end bores of con rods.
V200 and V250
Original 2011-06-21
Heat the con rod to 80 C.
PAY ATTENTION
Position the con rod on a flat surface, ensuring the big end bearings will be fitted according to the
orientation shown on Figure 3.8. Spray the Big End bore with Loctite Activator 7471.
CAUTION
The con rod is hot. Wear protective gloves!
Push the bearing in to the bore by hand to ensure that the bearing has located correctly.
PAY ATTENTION
When the con rod has sufficiently cooled, to clamp the big end bearing, push the small end bearings
(17 and 21; note: The small end bearing consists of two bearings matched) into the con rod.
When the mounted con rod is cool, use (compressor) lubricating oil to protect both the big and small
end bearings. Place assembly in a suitable sealed bag for storage.
Do not fit the assembly to the compressor/crankshaft for a further
24 hours.
Page 3-22
V375
Use Con Rod 3413100301 (15) for the first stage assembly and 3413100302 (19) for the second
stage.
Heat the con rod to 80C.
PAY ATTENTION
For the First Stage Con Rod:
Position the Con Rod on a flat surface with the shoulder face downward. Spray the Big End bore with
Loctite Activator 7471. Position the Big End Bearing in the con rod with the circlip facing up (The circlip
should be on the opposite side to the con rod shoulder.)
CAUTION
Original 2011-06-21
For the Second Stage Con Rod:
Position the Con Rod on a flat surface with the shoulder face downward. Spray the Big End bore with
Loctite Activator 7471. Position the Big End Bearing in the con rod with the circlip facing down (The
circlip should be on the same side to the con rod shoulder.)
CAUTION
PAY ATTENTION
When the con rod has sufficiently cooled, to clamp the big end bearing, push the small end bearings
(17 and 21; note: The small end bearing consists of two bearings matched) into the con rod.
When the mounted con rod is cool, use (compressor) lubricating oil to protect both the big and small
end bearings. Place assembly in a suitable sealed bag for storage.
Do not fit the assembly to the compressor/crankshaft for a further
24 hours.
Page 3-23
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.8
Page 3-24
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.9
Page 3-25
Original 2011-06-21
Figure 3.10
Page 3-26
V375 Big End Bearings Fitting & Con Rod Orientation in the Crankcase
3.2.16
Connecting Rod Reassembly to Compressor
Original 2011-06-21
When the connecting rod has been fitted, it must be free to slide through the bearing range of
side clearance, from shoulder to circlip. If this is not easily achieved the connecting rod must
be removed, the bearing pressed out and the bore cleaned thoroughly prior to re-assembly.
1.
Remove pin (3). Screw a length of M16x2x185 mm long studding (not supplied) into the tapped hole in
the crankshaft pintle.
2.
Arrange the first stage connecting rod (15) with the cast dipper rod pointing downwards and the small
end through the crankcase aperture for the first stage cylinder. Align the big end bearing onto the
crankshaft pintle.
3.
Using the retaining washer (22) and an M16 nut (not supplied) wind the nut onto the studding to push
the big end bearing onto the pintle until the washer is flush with pintle end. Remove washer and nut.
4.
Align spacer (18) with big end bearing on pintle and push bearing and spacer onto pintle with washer
and nut as described above.
5.
Repeat the procedure for the final stage connecting rod (19) until the assembly is pushed solidly
against the shoulder on the crankshaft. Remove studding, nut and retaining washer.
6.
Strike NEW dowel pin (3) into end of crankshaft. Position disc clamp (22) and NEW tab washer (24) and
torque the bolt (23). See Table 3.1 for tightening torques. Fold tab washer to secure bolt.
7.
Assemble first stage cylinder components to compressor as detailed in chapter 3.2.7.
8.
Assemble second stage cylinder components to compressor as detailed in chapter 3.2.9.
9.
Fit drain plug (160) to crankcase.
10.
Clean joint faces of crankcase inspection cover (155) and crankcase. Apply Loctite flange sealant 574
to cover joint face. Fit cover to crankcase and secure with the 4 screws (157) and washers (158)
refitting the 2 cable clips (156) between washer and cover.
11.
Recommission compressor as detailed in chapter 1.3.
Page 3-27
3.2.17
V105, V150, V200, and V250 Drive Motor and Coupling

For V375, see Chapter 3.2.18.
Original 2011-06-21
Removal from Compressor

1.
Isolate compressor.
2.
On compressors fitted with water circulating pumps only, drain the cooling water.
3.
Place a suitable support under the crankcase close to its connection to the drive motor.
4.
For compressors mounted on anti vibration mounts, remove the fasteners securing the mount under
the drive motor to the ship's deck.
5.
For compressors fitted with a water circulation pump disconnect the water inlet connection to the
pump and separate the male union nut on the connector on the pump.
6.
For compressors not mounted on anti-vibration mounts remove the fasteners securing the drive motor
to the ships deck.
7.
Remove the bolts (191) and washers (192) securing the drive motor to the crankcase.
8.
Using suitable lifting tackle, lift and slide the drive motor complete with drive coupling element (G1),
coupling hub (G3), hexagon socket cap screws (G4) out of the crankcase.
9.
If required, remove drive coupling element (G1) from coupling hub (G3) by removing the hexagon cap
screws (G4).
10.
If required, remove drive pins (G2) from flywheel.
Assembly to Compressor
Important notes for fitting Coupling
If the coupling is supplied in a pre-assembled state, do not dismantle it, but fit it in this
condition.
Figure 3.11
Coupling
1.
If removed, reassemble drive coupling pins (G2) to flywheel. Tighten coupling pins. Refer to Table 3.1
for torque.
2.
If removed, assemble drive coupling hub (G3) to drive motor shaft. The grub screw hole should be in
motor direction. Lock the drive coupling hub using the grub screw.
3.
If removed, assemble drive element (G1) onto coupling hub (G3).

Position the element with the side having the rubber free face of the axial aluminium inserts towards
the flywheel.
Page 3-28
PAY ATTENTION
Ensure that on tightening the screws the aluminium bushes in the rubber part of
the coupling element are not twisted.
A small amount of grease should be applied under the head of the screw
before fitting.
Mount the coupling element on the coupling hub using the hexagon socket screws (G4). During this
process, the drive element is pulled together radially and receives its pre-load.
PAY ATTENTION
The hexagon socket screws connecting the coupling element to the coupling
hubs must be tightened to the torque stated. Tightening torques which are too
low will cause damage to the coupling
Tighten hexagon socket screws (G4) to torque settings see Table 3.1.
4.
Lightly grease the coupling pins (G2). Using suitable lifting tackle to lift and slide the drive motor.
Aligning the drive element with the coupling pins, carefully slide the drive element with light axial
pressure onto the coupling pins and the motor flange location diameter onto the crankcase.
Original 2011-06-21
The rubber element is subjected to a little more radial compression by the socket bolts, and the preload is thus increased.
Figure 3.12
Gap between Coupling and Flywheel
To determine the coupling position on the motor shaft, measure the gap between coupling and
flywheel. Gap between the coupling element (G1) and the flywheel shall be 12 mm, dimension "A".
Adjust coupling hub on the motor shaft if necessary.
5.
Fit bolts (191) and spring washers (192) through drive motors flange onto crankcase.
6.
Fit holding down bolts securing drive motor or anti vibration mount to the ship's deck.
7.
On compressors fitted with water circulating pumps, reconnect union nut and male connector on the
circulating pump and water inlet pipework.
8.
Remove support placed under crankcase.
9.

Page 3-29
3.2.18
V375 Drive Motor and Coupling
Figure 3.13
Coupling
Original 2011-06-21
Removal from Compressor

1.
Isolate compressor.
2.
On compressors fitted with water circulating pumps only, drain the cooling water.
3.
Place a suitable support under the crankcase close to its connection to the drive motor.
4.
For compressors mounted on anti vibration mounts, remove the fasteners securing the mount under
the drive motor to the ship's deck.
5.
For compressors fitted with a water circulation pump disconnect the water inlet connection to the
pump and separate the male union nut on the connector on the pump.
6.
For compressors not mounted on anti-vibration mounts remove the fasteners securing the drive motor
to the ships deck.
7.
Remove the bolts (191) and washers (192) securing the drive motor to the crankcase.
8.
Using suitable lifting tackle, lift and slide the drive motor complete with coupling hub (G3) out of the
crankcase.
9.
If required, remove drive coupling element (G1) from flywheel (8) by removing the M10 screws.
Assembly to Compressor
1.
If removed, assemble drive coupling element (G1) onto flywheel (8) with M10 screws.
2.
Using suitable lifting tackle to lift and slide the drive motor. Aligning the coupling hub with the drive
coupling element, slide the coupling hub to engage into the drive coupling element and the motor
flange location diameter onto the crankcase.
3.
Fit bolts (191) and spring washers (192) through drive motors flange onto crankcase.
4.
Fit holding down bolts securing drive motor or anti vibration mount to the ship's deck.
5.
On compressors fitted with water circulating pumps, reconnect union nut and male connector on the
circulating pump and water inlet pipework.
6.
Remove support placed under crankcase.
7.
Page 3-30
3.2.19
Flywheel and Drive End Oil Seals Removal from Compressor

Note coupling pins (G2 V105/150/200/250) and coupling drive element (G1 V375) need
not be removed from the flywheel.
1.
Remove drive motor and coupling as detailed in chapter 3.2.17 & 3.2.18.
2.
Slacken the 8 clamp screws on drive bush (9).
3.
Lay two lengths of 3mm mild steel or similar angle (not supplied) of maximum leg length 30mm on the
2 rails in the crankcase under the flywheel. Alternatively, a fixture can be supplied by HATLAPA.
See Table 3.3 and Figure 3.14.
Fixtures to Assist Flywheel Removal
Machine
Fixture
V150
J31974
V200/250
J32032
V375
J32244
Original 2011-06-21
Table 3.3
Figure 3.14
4.
Location of Angle Steel on Crankcase Rails
Remove 2 clamp screws near each tapped hole in the drive bush. Screw 2 clamp screws into the
tapped holes to jack the bush out of the flywheel. Remove drive bush and ease the flywheel onto the
two pieces of angle (see Figure 3.14).
Note tapped hole in periphery of flywheel is M12.
5.
Using suitable lifting tackle remove flywheel from crankcase.
6.
Remove the screw (157) and washer (158) securing the crankcase inspection cover (155).
7.
Using a soft headed mallet gently tap the side faces of the crankcase inspection cover (155) to break
its seal with the crankcase. Remove cover.
8.
Wedge a piece of clean bar (not supplied), through the front of the compressor between the crankshaft
balance weight and one of the cast webs behind the balance weight to prevent the crankshaft from
rotating.
Page 3-31
9.
Remove grub screw (11). Using a c-spanner or similar tool (not supplied) unscrew the bearing
adjustment sleeve (10).
PAY ATTENTION
Take care not to damage the housing bore in the crankcase.
10.
Lever lip seal (6) out of crankcase with an appropriate tool (not supplied).
11.
Remove O ring (7) from crankshaft.
3.2.20
1.
Flywheel and Drive End Oil Seal Reassembly to Compressor

Fit new radial oil seal (6) to crankcase.
PAY ATTENTION
Original 2011-06-21
Take care in passing the 'O'-ring over the thread on the crankshaft.
2.
Fit new O ring (7) onto crankshaft adjacent to bearing.
3.
Wedge a piece of clean bar (not supplied) through the front of the compressor between the balance
weight and one of the cast webs to prevent the crankshaft from turning and carry out the following
operation.
4.
Screw the bearing adjustment sleeve (10) onto the crankshaft and engage with the drive end bearing
(5). Use a c-spanner or similar implement (not supplied).
5.
Rotate assembly of crankshaft through two complete turns and check, by trying to rock the assembly,
that the taper roller main bearings are seated correctly (i.e. little or no up and down movement of any
part of the assembly).
6.
Attach a dial test indicator to the end face of the crankcase resting on the end of the crankshaft.
7.
Push or pull the crankshaft balance weight and note the end float.
An end float of between 0.05/0.10mm is required in the main bearings which is to be obtained as
follows:
a.
If the end float is greater than 0.10 mm, using a c-spanner as in operation 4, screw the bearing
adjustment sleeve further onto the crankshaft until the required end float is achieved. Rotate the
assembly of crankshaft before each reading through two complete revolutions to centralise the
bearings.
b.
If the end float is less than 0.05 mm or the bearings are preloaded (no end float):
Using a c-spanner as in operation 4 unscrew the bearing adjustment sleeve 90 . Lightly tap the
drive end of the crankshaft to loosen the drive end main bearing inner race. If this technique
does not loosen the bearing, the M16 tapped hole in crankshaft big end bearing pintle may be
used to apply tension to crankshaft to loosen the bearing in conjunction with tapping the drive
end, see chapter 3.2.21. Carry out adjustment technique as in (a) until required end float is
achieved. Replace grub screw (11).
8.
Position the pieces of angle along the rails in the crankcase (refer to chapter 3.2.19 operation 3).
Using suitable lifting tackle locate flywheel (8) onto the pieces of angle and ease the flywheel onto the
crankshaft.
9.
Loosen the drive element clamping screws a couple of turns. Lightly oil the clamping element.
10.
Slide the clamping element onto the crankshaft and locate in the flywheel. Remove the screws from
the release threads and screw into the clamping holes.
Page 3-32
Tighten the clamping screws diagonally by hand while aligning the hub. With a torque wrench tighten
the clamping screws diagonally across with half the tightening torque, refer to Table 3.1 for tightening
torque. Tighten the clamping screws one after the other. Repeat several times. Continue tightening but
with the full torque, also diagonally across and repeating several times. The tightening process is only
completed when none of the screws can be tightened any further.
12.
Remove the pieces of angle or fixture placed over the rails in the crankcase.
13.
Check the flywheel alignment with a dial test indicator does not exceed 0.125 mm. If this alignment is
not achieved release the clamping screws, adjust the flywheel and re-tighten screws as above. Recheck flywheel alignment.
14.
Reassemble drive motor and coupling to compressor as detailed in chapter3.2.17 / 3.2.18.
15.
Clean joint faces of crankcase inspection cover (155) and crankcase. Apply Loctite flange sealant 574
to cover joint face. Fit cover to crankcase and secure with the 4 screws (157) and washers (158)
refitting the 2 cable clips (156) between washer and cover.
16.
Original 2011-06-21
11.
Page 3-33
3.2.21
Crankshaft and Main Bearing Removal from Compressor

If the main bearings are removed it is recommended that they are renewed.
1.
Remove the following parts:

a.
First stage cylinder, see chapter 3.2.6
b.
Second stage cylinder, see chapter 3.2.8
c.
Connecting rods, see chapter 3.2.14
d.
Drive motor and coupling, see chapter 3.2.17 (V105/V150/V200/V250) and 3.2.18 (V375)
e.
Flywheel and oil seals, see chapter 3.2.19
2.
Screw a length of M16x2 studding (not supplied) into the tapped hole in the crankshaft pintle. Place a
bar or similar (not supplied) across open front of compressor, using an M16 nut (not supplied), exert a
force onto the end of the crankshaft.
3.
Gently tap the drive end of the crankshaft with a soft headed mallet and tighten the nut as in
operation 2, drive the crankshaft out of the inner race of the drive end taper roller main bearing.
Original 2011-06-21
Take care to prevent the drive end inner cage dropping off the crankshaft.
4.
Withdraw the crankshaft complete with non-drive end taper roller bearing inner race.
5.
Using a suitable puller (not supplied) or by levering on the inner race lip (not on the rollers) extract the
non drive end taper roller bearing inner race from the crankshaft.
Take care not to damage the housing bore for the lip seal in the crankcase drive end.
6.
Using a mild steel drift (not supplied) drift out the drive end and non drive end taper roller bearing
outer races from the crankcase.
Page 3-34
Original 2011-06-21
3.2.22
Crankshaft and Main Bearings Reassembly to Compressor
1.
Before reassembly ensure crankcase internals and crankshaft are clean.
2.
Lightly oil the drive end main bearing location bore in the crankcase.
3.
Using a mild steel drift (not supplied), drift the outer bearing cup of the drive end main bearing (5) into
position in the crankcase.
4.
Lightly oil the non drive end main bearing location bore in the crankcase.
5.
Using a mild steel drift (not supplied), drift the outer bearing cup of the non drive end main bearing (4)
into position in the crankcase.
6.
Preheat non drive end main bearing inner race assembly to 120C maximum.
7.
Lightly oil crankshaft non drive end bearing journal location.
8.
Fit the heated inner race assembly on to the crankshaft journal (crankshaft in vertical position) and
allow to cool before gently tapping home against shoulder with a mild steel sleeve drift (not supplied).
9.
Preheat drive end main bearing inner race assembly to 120C maximum.
10.
Insert crankshaft into crankcase, wedge crankshaft into position ensuring that the non drive end main
bearing inner race assembly is mated correctly to the outer race.
11.
Lightly oil the crankshaft drive end main bearing journal.
12.
Fit the heated inner race assembly onto the crankshaft and into the bearing outer race.
13.
Refit oil seal and flywheel as detailed in chapter 3.2.20.
3.2.23
Oil Level Switch Remove/Clean/Replace
1.
Drain compressor of lubricating oil as detailed in chapter 3.2.2.
2.
Remove the DIN connector.
3.
Remove screw (142) and washer (143) securing dual oil level switch (140) to crankcase.
4.
Lever switch out of crankcase.
5.
Remove the 2 retaining screws and slide sleeve off body.
6.
Clean switch by removing all metallic particles.
7.
Reassemble switch, fit new O-rings (141), replace DIN connector and re-fill compressor with oil, refer
to chapter 3.2.2.
Page 3-35
3.2.24
Air and Water Safety Valves
These valves are all pre-set at the factory to suit the maximum working pressure duty of the compressor.
The air safety valves are statically set at a pressure, which equates to the 10% statutory over pressure
requirement, making allowance for the dynamic pressure pulses found within the compressor.
The safety valves must NOT be tampered with. It is recommended that a replacement valve is fitted should
there be any doubt as to the valve's condition.
Each valve is screwed into position.
Water Jacket Safety Valve (147):
Located on the cooler box behind the first stage cylinder.
Associated joint washer (148).
When replacing the water jacket safety valve ensure the outlet port is pointing downwards by using up
to 3 joint washers.
Original 2011-06-21
First Stage Air Pressure Safety Valve (145):
Located on the front face of the first stage cylinder on the V200/250/375 and the rear face of the
cylinder on the V105/150.
Final Stage Air Pressure Safety Valve (149):
Located on the inlet to the final stage separator.
3.2.25
Separator and Diffuser Plate: Removal and Examination
1.
Disconnect the DIN plug from the solenoid coils (129).
2.
Disconnect the drain pipes from the bottom of the separators (if fitted).
It is advisable to leave 2 opposite corner bolts (E6) screwed into the bowl when splitting this
assembly as this will take the weight of the bowl when it is free.
3.
Remove the bolts (E6) and washers (E7) holding the separator bowl (E2) to the separator header
(E1).
Separate bowl from the header by gently tapping the bowl with a soft headed mallet.
4.
Remove last bolts (E6) and washers (E7) and remove separator bowl.
5.
Clean and remove all traces of gasket from the joint faces of the header and bowl. Ensure faces are
grease/oil free. Do not smooth joint faces. Do not use emery cloth or a metal scraper to abrade or clean
them. It is recommended that a chemical such as Loctite Chisel is used in conjunction with hand brushing
with a wire brush. Do not remove machining surface finish markings
6.
Inspect 1st and 2nd Stage diffuser plates for looseness (E3, E4). If the diffuser plates are not solidly
held in position, tighten screws (E13, E15).
Page 3-36
3.2.26
Separator and Diffuser Plate: Reassembly

Fit drain connectors (E8, E9) to the base of the separator bowl using joint washers (E10, E11).
2.
Fit diffuser plates (E3, E4) using screws (E13, E15) and washers (E12, E14) see Figure 5.6 for
position.
3.
Position gasket (E5) over bowl (E2). Do not grease gasket. Ensure faces are grease/oil free.
4.
Fit bowl (E2) to separator header (E1) using 6 bolts (E6) and washers (E7).
5.
Tighten the corner bolts and then the central ones progressively until they are torqued correctly. Refer
to Table 3.1 for torque.
6.
Fit separator drain pipes (if fitted).
7.
Fit the DIN connectors to the solenoid valve coils (129).
Original 2011-06-21
1.
Page 3-37
WATER CIRCULATING PUMP (if supplied)
Original 2011-06-21
3.3
Figure 3.15
Item
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Qty
Pump Body
Impeller
Initial Stage
Not Applicable
Final Diffuser
Seal Holding Disc
Motor/Pump Support
Shaft+Rotor+Bearing+Shaft
Motor Case & Wound Stator
Not Applicable
Fan
Fan Cover
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Mechanical Seal
1
2
1
Table 3.4
Page 3-38
Water Circulating Pump
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
5
1
Item
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Description
Qty
Bearings Pump & Fan Side

Not Applicable
Plug-in element
Not Applicable
Terminal Box Cover
Terminal Box
Not Applicable
Cable Gland
Fill/Drain Plug
ORing
Seal Shoulder Washer
Impeller Fixing Washer
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Items List - Water Circulating Pump
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
3.3.1
General Overhaul
After 34 years service the pump should be overhauled, to include changing the mechanical seal and motor
bearings and cleaning. Check for wear and change worn pump parts. Always use new seals on re-assembly.
3.4
ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE
It is recommended that switch settings are periodically checked. Refer to the separate data sheet for
settings:
Table 3.5
Switch Settings
SWITCH
3.5
SETTINGS
Oil level switch
Activates when oil level falls below fill mark.
High air temperature switch
Alarm
60C 10%
Shutdown
80C 10%
FAULT FINDING CHART
Original 2011-06-21
Table 3.6
FAULT
Fault Finding Chart
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDIAL ACTION
Final stage air safety valve

blowing.
Whilst in automatic (default)
mode
Air system charged signal and final

stage air pressure shutdown settings
greater than safety valve set pressure
Reset signal pressure settings lower than safety valve set

pressure (Note: maximum working pressure of compressor
is 33 bar g)
Whilst running in manual

mode
Stop valve closed in final air delivery

pipework
Open all stop valves in pipework
Non-return valve installed incorrectly.
Correct installation.
Air system pressure safety devices set

higher than safety valve setting.
Correct safety device pressure settings as appropriate.
Intercooler blocked
Remove cooler header and tubenest. Clean cooler tubes and

first stage air passageways in header, cooler and first stage
separator.
High first stage pressure

(First stage air safety valve
blowing)
Suction side of final stage valve leaking Remove valve, clean/inspect/renew.

Delivery side of final stage valve
leaking
Remove valve, clean/inspect/renew.
Delivery side of final stage valve

leaking to suction side
Remove valve cage, renew O-rings and check joint washers

under dome nuts.
Page 3-39
FAULT
POSSIBLE CAUSE
Internal knocking noise from Worn big or small end bearings

compressor.
Worn main bearings.
Strip down compressor, check crankshaft end float. Renew

worn parts.
Damaged concentric valve.
Remove valves, clean inspect and renew if necessary.
Piston slap.
Remove cylinders, check clearances, renew worn parts

(cylinder, piston rings.)
Worn drive element.

Compressor will not achieve Concentric valves damaged or dirty.
operating pressure or is
operating at a reduced
capacity.
Original 2011-06-21
Concentric valves require

frequent cleaning.
REMEDIAL ACTION
Strip down compressor for inspection, renew worn parts.
Renew drive coupling element.

Remove valves, clean inspect and renew if necessary. (note
reduced capacity normally indicates first stage fault)
Solenoid drain/unload valve faulty.
Check solenoid valve function, renew parts as necessary.
Worn or damaged piston rings/ piston.
Remove cylinders, check rings are free in piston groove,

renew worn, distorted or damaged rings, piston as
appropriate.
Excessive cylinder component wear
Remove cylinders, renew cylinder, piston, rings as necessary
Suction filter/silencer blocked.
Renew element.
Non-recommended grade of lubricating

oil used.
Drain lubricating oil, replace with recommended grade.
Concentric valves overheating.
Ensure concentric valves, cylinder components (cylinder,

piston, rings) and cooling water system is maintained in good
working order.
Excessive moisture in final

Solenoid drain/unload valve faulty.
air delivery pipe work and/or
final stage cylinder/
intercooler.
Unload drain cycle incorrect for
operating conditions.
Check solenoid valves function, renew components as

necessary.
Reprogram solenoid drain/unload valves dwell and spit

times to suit operating conditions.
Oil seeping out from

Drive end lip or O-ring seal adjustment
underside of crankcase near sleeve to crankshaft leaking.
drive motor.
Remove flywheel adjustment sleeve and drive lip seal and

O-ring. Renew seal and O-ring. Refer to Chapter 3.2.19 and
3.2.20
Water jacket safety valve

blowing.
Excessive cooling water inlet pressure.
Reduce inlet pressure to 7 bar g maximum that compressor is

suitable for.
Intercooler/aftercooler tube failure.
Remove cooler header and tubenest. Renew/refurbish

tubenest.
Worn cylinder components.
Remove cylinders, check cylinder, piston, rings. Renew

components as appropriate.
Excessive oil consumption.
Page 3-40
3.6
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR COMPRESSOR MAINTENANCE

Table 3.7
Tools Required for Compressor Maintenance
TOOL
Original 2011-06-21
V150
V200/250
V375
C spanner 2" - 6"
Fly press
D.T.I. and magnetic base
13 mm a/f x /8" square drive flank adaptor
19 mm a/f x " square drive crowsfoot
n/a
n/a
24 mm a/f x " square drive crowsfoot
n/a
8" screwdriver
Water pump pliers
2 lb steel lump hammer
12" adjustable spanner
Feeler gauges (0.02 - 1.0mm)
24mm a/f combi spanner
n/a
n/a
24mm a/f " square drive socket
n/a
19mm a/f " square drive socket
n/a
13mm a/f " drive socket
3mm a/f hexagon key
4mm a/f hexagon key
6mm a/f hexagon key
n/a
8mm a/f hexagon key
n/a
n/a
3mm a/f hexagon key x " square drive
6mm a/f hexagon key x /8" square drive
n/a
n/a
n/a
" square drive torque wrench (4 - 20 Nm)
/8" square drive torque wrench (8 - 54 Nm)
n/a
" square drive torque wrench (30 - 150 Nm)
n/a
n/a
n/a
" square drive torque wrench (up to 500 Nm)
n/a
n/a
" square female x " square drive adaptor
n/a
n/a
Page 3-41
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 4 TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNICAL DATA
4.1
GENERAL
Compressor Type
4.2
PERFORMANCE
Maximum working pressure

4.3
V105/V150/V200/V250/V375
33 bar.
OTHER DATA
Table 4.1
Capacity and Power at 30 Bar
Nominal Speed RPM

1000
1200
1500
1800
1000
1200
1500
1800
1000
1200
1500
1800
1000
1200
1500
1800
1000
1200
1500
1800
Original 2011-06-21
V105
V150
V200
V250
V375
Output
m/hour
55
70
85
105
80
100
120
150
110
132
166
200
137
165
207
250
208
250
310
375
Absorbed Power
kW
13
15.5
20
22
17
20
25
30
22
26
33
39
28
33
41
49
40
48
60
72
Outputs quoted are bottle charging rates.

Noise - 89 dB (A) at 1 Metre
Table 4.2
Maximum air inlet temperature
Maximum air outlet temperature
Maximum water inlet pressure
Maximum water inlet temperature
Minimum water inlet temperature
Cooling water outlet temperature
Nominal cooling water flow rate
Lubrication system
Sump capacity
Operating Parameters
V105/150
V200/250
V375
50 C
20 C over cooling water inlet
7 bar g
45 C
5 C
10 C above water inlet temperature
20/25 litres/minute
60/70 litres/minute
115/120
litres/minute
Splash
min. 3.5 litres
min. 7 litres
min. 9 litres
max. 4.5 litres
max. 8 litres
max. 12 litres
Page 4-1
Table 4.3
Feature
Recommended Maximum Wear Clearances

Feature Measured
Note: All dimensions are in millimetres.
Renew when
V105/V150
V200/250
V375
First stage cylinder (Nominal bore V105/150 180 / V200/250 200 / V375 260)
Piston
Skirt measured 15 mm up from

base
179.600
199.600
259.6
Cylinder bore
Maximum diameter at any point
180.250
200.250
260.25
Piston to cylinder bore
Clearance between measured

values A & B
> 0.520
> 0.520
> 0.52
Piston ring width
< 3.335
< 3.335
< 4.835
Piston ring groove width
> 3.730
> 3.730
> 5.225

values D and E
> 0.200
> 0.200
> 0.200
Piston ring gap when fitted to bore
> 1.07
> 1.150
> 1.450
Piston ring width
< 4.850
< 4.850
< 7.85
> 5.194
> 5.194
> 8.184

values H and I
> 0.250
> 0.250
> 0.250
Piston ring gap when fitted to bore
> 1.07
> 1.150
> 1.450
Gudgeon pin
< 24.892
< 31.892
< 34.892
Original 2011-06-21
Top and second

D
piston rings, piston ring
grooves.
Conformable slotted oil H

control ring, piston ring
groove
Gudgeon pin and small L

end bearing
Final stage cylinder (Nominal bore V105/150 75 / V200/250 85 / V375 110)

Piston
Skirt measured 15mm up from

base
74.830
84.830
109.730
Cylinder bore
Maximum at any point
75.164
85.164
110.164

values M & N
> 0.210
> 0.210
> 0.210
Piston ring width
< 2.350
< 2.350
< 2.850
> 2.660
> 2.660
> 3.160

values P & Q
> 0.200
> 0.200
> 0.200
Piston ring gap fitted to bore
> 0.710
> 0.800
> 0.890
Piston ring width
< 4.850
< 4.850
< 4.850
> 5.194
> 5.194
> 5.194

values T & U
> 0.250
> 0.250
> 0.250
Piston ring gap fitted to bore
> 0.710
> 0.800
> 0.890
Gudgeon pin
< 24.892
< 31.892
< 34.892
Piston to cylinder bore
Top and second

P
piston rings. piston ring
grooves
Conformable slotted oil T

control ring, piston ring
groove
Gudgeon pin and small X

end bearing
Page 4-2

4.4
CRANKCASE LUBRICANTS
4.4.1
Approved Oils
Shell Corena Oils P100

Castrol Aircol SN100
Extensive tests have been carried out on the V-Line compressor using Shell Corena P100 (mineral) and
Castrol Aircol SN100 (synthetic) lubricants. These oils have been found to give good results over extended
service and HATLAPA recommend their use to ensure satisfactory operation of the compressor.
4.4.2
Oil Company Equivalents

For information regarding oil company equivalents see separate sheet:
Original 2011-06-21
Lubricating Instructions for V-line Piston Compressors.
The V-Line compressor is designed to achieve the best possible results using mineral oils. A recommended
lubricating oil should be used at all times to ensure safe and efficient operation with minimum wear. The
suggested maintenance intervals are based on the results of extensive tests using Shell P100 mineral oil.
Specific measures have been taken to ensure extended service before components need cleaning to remove
carbon.
HATLAPA recommend the use of mineral oil as the most economic lubricant. If synthetic oils are to be used
the following maintenance revisions are necessary.
4.4.3
Additional Maintenance for Machines Lubricated with Synthetic Oils
Initial run and oil change periods to be as detailed in Maintenance chapter.

After initial 500 running hours using mineral oil lubricant:
1.
Drain the old mineral lubricant completely whilst the oil is warm.
2.
Thoroughly clean the crankcase sump.
3.
Inspect and thoroughly clean compressor valves (as detailed in chapter 3 MAINTENANCE).
4.
Replace all items removed, renew any damaged seals or gaskets.
5.
Refill with synthetic oils, and run as normal.
Page 4-3
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
DRAWINGS
1
2
10
3
5
Original 2011-06-21
11
13
12
7
6
Figure 5.1
Typical Arrangement of V-Line Water Cooled Compressor with Gauges

Table 5.1
List of Parts for Figure 5.1
Ref
Description
Gauge panel
Suction filter silencer
First stage safety valve
Final stage safety valve
Dual level oil switch
Oil drain plug
Oil filler/dipstick
Final air delivery
Motor terminal box
10
Lifting lugs
11
Inter and final stage separator
12
First stage solenoid drain valve

Final stage solenoid drain valve
13
Page 5-1
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Notes on Figures
Where parts are specific to a particular model, applicable model numbers are shown next to
the item number.
Figure 5.3
Crankshaft and Flywheel:
For V375, the Drive Coupling Sub-assembly (190) is detailed in Figure 3.13
Figure 5.7
Gauges:
Original 2011-06-21
For V150, steel pipe links adaptors (282), via ball valves (299), to gauges.
For other models, steel pipe runs from adaptors beneath the cooler header (93), via ball
valves (299), to gauges.
Page 5-2
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.2
Cooler
Page 5-3
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.3
Crankshaft and Flywheel

See Notes on page 5-2
Page 5-4
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.4
First Stage Cylinder and Piston
Page 5-5
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.5
Page 5-6
Final Stage Cylinder and Piston
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.6
Separator
Page 5-7
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Figure 5.7
Gauges
See Notes on page 5-2
Page 5-8
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
List Of Parts V-Line Compressors
Original 2011-06-21
Where two numbers are shown in the quantity column the first quantity is for the V105/150
compressor, the second refers to the V200/250/375 compressor. Where the quantity for the
V375 is different it is shown in brackets. Items marked with an asterisk (*) are not shown.
Ref
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Description
Crankcase
Crankshaft
Pin spring tension
Bearing taper roller (main non drive end)
Bearing taper roller (main drive end)
Oil seal
O ring (bearing adjusting sleeve)
Flywheel
Bush cone clamping elements
Bearing adjusting sleeve
Socket set screw
Connecting rod (1st stage)
Bearing - big end cylindrical roller
Bearing - small end needle roller
Spacer - connecting rod/crankshaft
Connecting rod (2nd stage)
Bearing - big end cylindrical roller
Bearing - small end needle roller
Clamping washer - c/shaft-conn. Rod
Set screw
Tab washer
30
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
48
50
51
Hose connector (not V375)

Hose (crankcase breather) (not V375)
Piston (first stage)
Piston ring SOC (first stage)
Piston ring taper faced (first stage)
Piston ring barrel faced (first stage)
Cylinder (first stage)
Gudgeon pin (first stage)
Hexagon socket set screw
Locknut
Stud (first stage cylinder assembly to crankcase)
Valve cage (first stage)
Hose connector (not V375)
O ring (first stage valve cage to cylinder)
Concentric valve (first stage) assembly A
O ring (first stage concentric valve outer groove to
cylinder)
O ring (first stage concentric valve top face to valve
cage)
Joint washer
52
53
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
30 cm
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (8)
Page 5-9
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
Ref
54
55
56
57
59*
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
Original 2011-06-21
73
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
85
86
87
88
90
91
92
93
94
95
100
100A
100B
100C
101
102
105
105A
105B
105C
106
107
Page 5-10
List Of Parts V-Line Compressors (Contd)

Description
Stud connector (not V375)
Bright washer (not V375)
Nut
Bright washer
Socket set screw (V200, V250, V375 only)
Piston (second stage)
Piston ring S.O.C (second stage)
Piston ring taper faced (second stage)
Piston ring barrel faced (second stage)
Gudgeon pin (second stage)
Socket set screw
Cylinder (second stage)
Stud (second stage cylinder Assembly to crankcase)
Valve cage (second stage)
O ring (second stage valve Cage top groove to cylinder)
O ring (second stage valve cage Bottom groove to
cylinder)
Plug
Concentric valve (second stage)
Assembly B
O ring (second stage concentric Valve outer groove to
cylinder)
O ring (second stage concentric Valve top face to valve
cage)
Joint washer
Nut
Bright washer
Anti-extrusion ring (V375 only)
Cooler box assembly C
Eyebolt
Set screw/bolt
Spring washer
Gasket (tubenest to cooler box)
Tubenest assembly
Gasket (tubenest to cooler header)
Cooler header
Bolt/adjusting screw
Bright washer
Gasket (cooler header to first stage cylinder)
(V105/150/200/250 only)
Metal Gasket V375 only)
Gasket Seal (V375 only)
PTFE Sealing Ring (V375 only)
Bolt
Bright washer
Gasket (cooler header to second stage cylinder)
(V105/150/200/250 only)
Metal Gasket V375 only)
Gasket Seal (V375 only)
PTFE Sealing Ring (V375 only)
Bolt
Bright washer
Quantity
1
1
4
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
4/3
4/3
1
1
1
1
13
13
1
1
1
1
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
3
3
Original 2011-06-21
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
Ref
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
120
121
122
123
125
126
127
128
129
140
141
142
143
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153*
154*
155
156
157
158
160
161
165
166
167
F2
168
169
170
171
172
Description
Separator assembly E
Gasket (separator /header - cooler box)
Bolt
Bolt/stud
Bright washer
Nut (not V200/250)
Gasket (separator assembly to Second stage cylinder)
Set screw
Bright/spring washer
Joint washer
Adaptor
Joint washer
Solenoid valve body First stage drain/unload
Washer
Nipple
Washer
Solenoid valve Final stage drain/unload
Coil solenoid valve
Oil level switch - crankcase
O ring (oil switch )
Set screw
Bright washer
Safety valve (air 1st stage cylinder)
Copper washer
Safety valve (water jacket safety)
Copper washer
Safety valve (Air final stage cylinder)
Copper washer
Plug
Joint washer
Plug
Joint washer
Inspection cover
Cable clip
Set screw
Bright washer
Magnetic drain plug with seal
Oil filler/dipstick
Studding
Suction filter/silencer assembly F
Filter element (V200/250/375 only)
Filter element (V150 only)
Wing nut (V200/250/375 only)
Bright washer (V200/250/375 only)
Guard crankcase
Screw
Spring washer
Quantity
1
1
3
1
4
1
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
3
1
3/1
2
2
2
2
1
2/3
4/6
4/6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page 5-11
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
Ref
190
191*
192*
194*
195*
196*
Original 2011-06-21
197*
198*
199*
200*
201*
202*
203*
204*
209*
Page 5-12

Description
Drive coupling sub-assembly G
Bolt/set screw
Spring washer
Motor packing piece (V200/250 only)
Mounting plate drive motor
Mounting plate drive motor
(Water circulating pump models only)
Bolt
Nut
Spring washer
Water circulating pump
Bolt
Spring washer
Bolt
Spring washer
Straight male unionConnector
210
212
213
214
215
216*
217*
218*
222*
Joint washer
Packing piece (V150 only)
Anti-vibration mount
Bolt
Spring washer
Anti-vibration mount
Screw
Spring washer
Flexible hose (water inlet)To final stage
cylinder/Circulating pump
224*
225*
Joint washer (hose tocylinder/circulating pump)

Flexible hose (water outletfrom first stage cylinder
227*
228*
229
230*
231*
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
273
274
Joint washer (hose to cylinder)

Flexible hose (final air delivery)
Joint washer (hose to separator)
Nameplate
Hammer drive screw
Washer
Bolt
Electrical terminal box
Stud (Earth)
Washer
Nut
Washer
Lock washer
Washer
Nut
Nut
Plug
Joint washer
Quantity
1
4/8
4/8
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Original 2011-06-21
Table 5.2
Ref
280*
281*
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289*
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
298
299
300

Description
Pressure gauge (direct mount) 0 10 bar
Pressure gauge (direct mount) 0 60 bar
Adaptor
Joint washer
Pressure gauge (panel mount) 0 10 bar
Pressure gauge (panel mount) 0 60 bar
Gauge panel
Set screw
Bright washer
Legend plate
Legend plate
Drive screw
Steel pipe assembly
Steel pipe assembly
Male stud coupling
Female stud coupling
Joint washer
Joint washer
Ball Valve
Plug
COMPRESSOR WITH MANUAL DRAINS

301
3 way equal tee
302
Adaptor
Quantity
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
4
50/60 cm
50/60 cm
2
2
2
4(1)
2
2
1
1
304
305
307
311
312
314
315
317
Hex adaptor
Ball valve
Joint washer
3 way equal tee
Adaptor
Hex Adaptor
Ball valve
Joint washer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
320
321
Temperature switch
Joint washer
1
1
CONCENTRIC VALVE (1ST STAGE) ITEM 50

Concentric valve body assembly
A1
Dome nut
A2
1
4(8)
CONCENTRIC VALVE (2ND STAGE) ITEM 75

Concentric valve body assembly
B1
Dome nut
B2
1
4(6)
Page 5-13
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
Description
Ref
COOLER BOX SUB-ASSEMBLY ITEM 85
Cooler box
C1
Cover cooler box end
C2
Gasket (cover cooler boxend to cooler box)
C3
Bolt
C4
Plain washer
C5
Plug
C6*
Joint washer
C7*
Plug
C8*
Joint washer
C9*
Bleed Valve
C10
Joint washer
C11
Original 2011-06-21
SEPARATOR SUB-ASSEMBLY ITEM 110

Separator header
E1
Separator bowls
E2
Diffuser Plate (first stage)
E3
Diffuser Plate (second stage)
E4
Gasket (separator header
E5
to separator bowls)
Bolt
E6
Plain washer
E7
Drain Connection (first stage)
E8
Drain Connection (second stage)
E9
Joint washer
E10
Joint washer
E11
Plain washer (brass)
E12
Screw
E13
Plain washer (stainless steel)
E14
not V105/150
Screw
E15
Page 5-14
Quantity
1
1
1
11/9
11/9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
6
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
SUCTION FILTER/SILENCER SUB-ASSEMBLY ITEM 166

V105/150 ONLY
Housing
F1
Element
F2
Seal
F3
Wingnut
F4
Seal
F5
Top Cover
F6
Seal
F7
Wingnut
F8
O Ring
F9
Inlet
Resonator
F10
Clamp
F11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SUCTION FILTER/SILENCER SUB-ASSEMBLY ITEM 166

V200/250/V375 ONLY
Housing
F1
Inlet Resonator
F2
Clamp
F3
1
1
1
CHAPTER 5 DRAWINGS
Table 5.2
DRIVE COUPLING SUB-ASSEMBLY ITEM 190

Drive coupling element
G1
Drive pin (not V375)
G2
Drive coupling hub
G3
Hexagon socket cap screw (not V375)
G4
1
1
1
1
Original 2011-06-21
SEALANTS/RETAINERS
Loctite 603 high strength
J1
Retainer 10ml size
Loctite 243 thread locker 10 ml size
J2
Loctite 573 flange sealant 50 ml size
J3
Loctite 574 multi gasket 50 ml size
J4
1
4
1
4
Page 5-15
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
FOR COMPRESSORS
Shipyard
Original 2011-06-21
Cosco
Guangdong
Shipyard
Co., Ltd.
Newbuilding
N352
N353
Date
22.12.2010
Our ref.
10.2722
10.2723
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DRAWING No.
Spare part list
Connection diagram compressors V105
344181-44070 1-2
Starter / controller compressor 22-30kW
344182-44070 1-8
Sequence selection box for double compr. control
333392-44070 1-2
Connection diagram compressor L20
344183-44070 1
Starter / controller compressor 5,5-7,5kW
344184-44070 1-8
1/1
Tornescher W eg 5-7
Tel.: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-0

Fax: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-104
info@hatlapa.de
www.hatlapa.de
Geschftsfhrer /
Managing Directors:
Dr.-Ing. Alexander Nrnberg
Jrg Tollmien
Amtsgericht Elmshorn:
HRA 0499
Verwaltungsgesellschaft: HRB 1560
UST.ID-Nr. DE 134527127
ELECTRICAL SPARE PARTS

FOR COMPRESSORS
Original 2011-06-21
Shipyard
Newbuilding
Date
02.11.2010
Our ref.
Cosco
Guangdong
Shipyard
Co., Ltd.
N352
N353
10.2722
10.2723
ITEM: QUANTITY:
DESCRIPTION:
IDENT No.:
MAIN CONTACTOR LC1-D50
121496
334706
1/1
Tornescher W eg 5-7
Tel.: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-0

Fax: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-104
info@hatlapa.de
www.hatlapa.de
Geschftsfhrer /
Managing Directors:
Jrg Tollmien
HRA 0499
UST.ID-Nr. DE 134527127

(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-1X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
cable glan 08.12.10

A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
Bearb.
Gepr.
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-1Y1
-1F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 1)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 1)
13
14 15
13-21
6-13
6-13
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM

NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC
Werft-Lieferung
-1Y2
-1F3

Urspr.
1 17
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-1F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 1
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-1M1
Druckluftwchter fr
Fhrungskompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
5 11 12
24V DC
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21



L1 L2 L3
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.

(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-2X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-2Y1
-2F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 2)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 2)
14 15
-2Y2
Ers.d
6-13
6-13
Werft-Lieferung
-2F3
HATLAPA
13
13-21
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM

NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC

Urspr.
1 17
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-2F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 2
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-2M1
24V DC
5 11 12
Druckluftwchter fr
Folgekompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21



L1 L2 L3
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.
600
210
Amperemeter
AMMETER
P2

Q1
Hauptschalter
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
H2

H2
P2
Q2
S2
TD 200
600
HATLAPA
(BU)
S2

Q1
Gewicht: ca. 50kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 50kg
8
Schutzart: IP54
20
Original 2011-06-21
P1
P1
mit Trfeststeller
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.

ON / OFF:


Original 2011-06-21

mode.
compressor starts.
compressor stops.
in automatic mode.
ALARMS:

compressor on / man



the display.

make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
oil level warning
l-Level Voralarm
low oil level
l-Level Alarm

starten.
gestoppt werden.
anlaufen.
ALARME


EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
software.
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
2sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
5min
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
5min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d

gesprungen werden.
festgelegt.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
11
12
0P
5%
-K1
/8.0
-F3
-T1
440V
-Q1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
-Q4
0,63-1A 2
GV2 RT05
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
/7.9
1
1
-Q2
97 95
-F1
37-50A
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
98 96
Original 2011-06-21
/5.0
75/1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-T2
-P1 75A
+ A
-
/5.0
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
3
1L1
51
61
/8.0 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
9 10
HE1 HE2
Heizung
HEATING
25-100W
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
22-30 kW
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
Hamw_7
16t
17t
18t

14 x Inputs
10 x Outputs Relay
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
7b
8b
9b
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7
/6.0
/6.4
/6.4
/6.5
/6.6
/6.7
/6.8
/6.2
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
OIL LEVEL SW.WARNIN
OIL LEVEL SW.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.WARNIN
SPARE
Reserve
SPARE
Reserve
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
2t
3t
4t
5t
8t
9t
10t
13t
11b
12b
13b
14b
15b
16b
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
REMOTE CONTROL ON
REMOTE CONTROL MANU
REMOTE CONTROL AUTO
14t A1.0
15t A1.1
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
A0.6
A0.7
/8.0
/8.5
/8.7
/8.6
/8.2
/8.3
/8.9
PE
N
L1
17b
18b
-A1
M
Exp. L+
1L
Out 2L
3L
1M
In
2M
1t
7t
12t
1b
10b
0V DC
Supply
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
SPARE
STAR CONTACTOR
DELTA CONACTOR
REMOTE CONTROL ACTI
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
0
/5.9
1L+
9
1L+
-A1
-A1
3b
-A1
5b
E0.1
/5.2
/7.0
7b
E0.3
/5.2
E0.5
/5.2
95
lstands-W. Voralarm
-F1
SPARE
Reserve
/4.2 96
Digital Input
-A1
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
Digital Input
PE
Optional ber
2
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
24V DC
lStandsWchter
OIL
LEVEL
SWITCH
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
SPARE
10
NC
T
PE
/5.2
Reserve
Digital Input
11
12
PE
NC
T
COM
COM
-F3
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
LuftTemp.Wchter
AIR
TEMP.
SWITCH
-F13
Bearb.
Gepr.
E0.6
Digital Input
PE
/5.2
24V DC
F13.1
E0.4
Digital Input
SHUTDOWN
-X1
/5.2

F13.2
Digital Input
-F4
E0.2
F3W

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
8b
WARNING
E0.7
-A1
6b
F3S
/5.2
Digital Input
-A1
4b
WARNING
E0.0
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
9b
SHUTDOWN
-A1
2b
Digital Input
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
0
/6.9
1L+
13
FLOATING CONTACTS
-S2
Vorort-Fern
LOCAL-REMOTE
14
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
13
-A1
-A1
11b
E1.0
/5.2
E1.1
REMOTE CONTROL ON
Fernbedienung ein
Original 2011-06-21
13b
/5.2

Digital Input
E1.2
-K5
-K1
-K4
14 /8.0
14 /8.4
13
/5.2

Digital Input
-X1
13
14 /8.6
-A1
12b
13
Digital Input
14 15 PE
26 27 PE
Fernbedienung aktiv
(NO)
22 25 PE
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
(NC)
MAN
0
AUTO
(NO)
20 21 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
-A1
-A1
Digital Output
NETZSCHTZ
2t
3t
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.3
/5.2
A0.2
5t

Fernbedienung aktiv
/5.2
A0.7
13t
A1
A1
-K4
50A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
Original 2011-06-21
Digital Output
4t
-K1
/5.9
-A1
Digital Output
COOLING WATER VALVE

/5.2
A0.1
-A1
Digital Output
DRAIN VALVES
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digital Output
A1
-K5
INCL. A2
VAR.
INCL. A2
VAR.
1N1
1
3
5
13
21
51
/4.8
61
/4.9
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/7.8
2
4
6
14
22
52
62
/7.9 13
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
/7.7 13
14
Fernbedienung aktiv
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
-X1
17 1
-Y1
PE
17 1
-Y2
Entwsserungsventile
DRAIN VALVES
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
18 1
PE
PE
-Y5
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
200
VIEW FROM BEHIND:

200
120
Kompressor 1 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 1 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
Schutzart: IP54
200
200
Gewicht: ca. 3kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 3kg
Kompressor 2 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 2 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
8,7
20
Original 2011-06-21
3S1
20
3S1
Fhrungswahlschalter






Datum
french
A
texts 23.01.09
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
20.02.08
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.
10
14
-3S1
Original 2011-06-21
Fhrungswahlschalter
-3X1
-1F4
PE
11 13 15
PE
PE
-2F4
PE
C
Datum
20.02.08
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.
Schaltschrank Not-Luft-Kompressor (5,5-7,5kW)

STARTER / CONTROLLER EMERGENCY AIR COMPRESSOR (5,5-7,5kW)
(344184-44070)
NO
NC
29 30
31 32
-X1
W
H1 H2
Brcke !
link !
Not-LuftKompressor L20
EMERGENCY AIR
COMPRESSOR L20
6,3 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
30W
-F4
13 14
19 20
21 22
23 24
-F2
25 26
Brcke !
link !
6-13
Entwsserungsventil Abscheider
DRAIN VALVE SEPARATOR
6-13
ldruckschalter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Druckluftwchter fr
Start/Stop in Automatik
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR START/STOP IN AUTOMATIC
HE1 HE2
24V DC
-M1
24V DC
6-13
11 12
Luftteemperatur-Wchter
AIR TEMPERATURE SWITCH
6-13
10
24V DC
6-13
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
9-17
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21
9-17
NO
-F3
6-13
6-13


220-230V AC
L1 L2 L3
-Y4
Gleichstrom-Magnetspulen mu das Kabel
* Bei
am Gleichrichter im Stecker angeschlossen werden.
* IN CASE OF DC SOLENOID COILS THE CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED
TO THE RECTIFIER INSIDE THE PLUG.
Datum
cable gla.08.12.10
A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Bearb.
Gepr.
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
Anschluplan Kompressor L20

CONNECTION DIAGRAM COMPRESSOR L20
Urspr.
342530
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344183-44070
Blatt 1
von 1
Bl.
380
210
P1
P1
Amperemeter
AMMETER
P2

Q1
Hauptschalter
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
H2

INDICATING LIGHT
"MOTOR HEATING HEATING ON"
A
H2
P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
600
(BU)
Q1
Gewicht: ca. 30kg
WEIGHT: APPR. 30kg
Schutzart: IP54
8
20
Original 2011-06-21
Q2
mit Trfeststeller
20
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu
Schaltschrank Kompressor 5,5-7,5kW (440V)

STARTER / CONTROLLER COMPRESSOR 5,5-7,5kW (440V)
Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.

ON / OFF:


Original 2011-06-21
ALARMS:

compressor on / man


mode.
compressor starts.
compressor stops.
in automatic mode.
the display.

make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
low oil pressure
Oeldruck-Alarm
high cooling water temperature
Khlwassertemperatur-Alarm
no cooling water
kein Khlwasserflu

starten.
gestoppt werden.
anlaufen.
ALARME


EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
software.
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
5sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
20min
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
0min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d

gesprungen werden.
festgelegt.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
1L1
/5.0
11
-K1
3
12
/8.1
/8.9
0P
5%
-F1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
97 95
-Q2
98 96
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
Original 2011-06-21
/6.0
9-13A
CLASS 20
-F3
-T1
440V
/5.0
0,63-1A
GV2 RT05
-Q1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-Q3
20A
-P1
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
51
61
/8.1 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
HE1 HE2
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
5,5-7,5 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.25-50W
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
0V DC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
TD200_8
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7
S7-CPU 222 Relais-Ausgnge

8 x Eingnge
/6.0
/6.2
/6.4
/6.6
/6.8
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
AIR TEMPERATURE SWI
COOL.WATER TEMP.SWI
COOL.WATER FLOW SWI
SPARE
SPARE
6 x Ausgnge Relais
2
3
5
6
8
9
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
/8.1
/8.2
/8.5
/8.6
PE
Vers N
L1
M
Erw L+
1M
2M
Ein
1L
Aus 2L
-A1
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
star contactor
delta contactor
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
/5.9
1L+
1L+
/7.0
95
-F1
/4.2 96
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
E0.0
/5.2
E0.1

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
-A1
E0.2
/5.2
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

ldruckk-Wchter
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
PE
-A1
E0.3
/5.2
E0.4

Lufttemperatur-Wchter
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
/5.2
COOL.WATER TEMP.SWITCH
Khlwassertemp.Wchter
Digitaler Eingang
PE
-A1
Digitaler Eingang
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
Optional ber
-F4
-F2 P
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
-F3
ldruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
-F5
HATLAPA
Khlwasser-Temperatur-Wchter
COOLING WATER TEMPERATURE SWITCH
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
/6.9
1L+
7
E0.5
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
/5.2
E0.6
COOL.WATER FLOW SWITCH

Khlwasserdurchfl.Wch
10 PE
/5.2
-A1
E0.7
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
/5.2
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
11 12 PE
13 14 PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
-F6 F
Khlwasser-Durchflu-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
1
-A1
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
NETZSCHTZ
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.1
/5.2
A0.2
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DRAIN VALVES
Digitaler Ausgang
COOLING WATER VALVE
FLOATING CONTACTS
/5.2
A0.3
6
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
A1
A1
-K2
-K1
Original 2011-06-21
18A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
/5.9
13
INCL. A2
VAR.
13
-K1
-K2
14 /8.1
14 /8.5
1N1
1
2
3
4
5
6
13 14
21 22
51 52
/4.8
61 62
/4.9
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
/8.9 13
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/8.8
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
-X1
19 20 PE
21 22 PE
23 24 PE
25 26 PE
29 30 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
(NO)
-Y1
-Y2
-Y3/4
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
(NC)
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
-Y5
Entwsserungsventile (optional)
DRAIN VALVES (OPTIONAL)
Bearb.
Gepr.
31 32 PE
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
Original 2011-06-21
ENGLISH
READ CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING THE MOTOR
RECEIVING CHECK
Check if any damage has occured during
transportation.
Check nameplate data.
Remove shaft locking device (if any) before
operating the motor.
Turn the shaft with the hand to make sure it
is turning freely.
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

1 - General
Insulation Resistance Check
MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY

THE SHAFT, BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS
Original 2011-06-21
In case the motors are stored for more than

two years, the bearings must be replaced or the
lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single phase motors when kept in stock
for 2 years or more must have their capacitors
replaced (if any).
We recommend to turn the shaft (by hands)
at least once a month, and to measure the
insulation resistance before installing it, in cases
of motors stored for more than 6 months or when
subject to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, these
should be switched on.
Lifting devices, when supplied, are

designed only to support the motor. If the motor
has two lifting devices then a double chain must
be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently
without any shocks, otherwise the bearings can
get damaged.
DURING TRANSPORTATION,
MOTORS FITTED WITH ROLLER OR
ANGULAR CONTACT BEARINGS
ARE PROTECTED AGAINST
BEARING DAMAGES WITH A
SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE.
THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE
USED ON ANY FURTHER MOTOR
TRANSPORTATION, EVEN WHEN
THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE
THE MOTOR FROM THE DRIVEN
MACHINE.
STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed,
they must be stored in dry places, free of
dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes,
under constant temperature and in normal
position free from other objects.
Motor storage temperature must remain
between 5C to 60C, with relative humidity not
exceeding 50%.
Measure the insulation resistance before

operating the motor and/or when there is any
sign of humidity in the winding.
The resistance measured at 25C must be:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance is less than 2
megaohms, the winding must be dried
according to the following:
Warm it up inside an oven at a minimum
temperature of 80C increasing 5C every hour
until 105C, remaining under this temperature
for at least one hour.
Check if the stator insulation resistance
remains constant within the accepted values. If
not, stator must be reimpregnated.
INSTALLATION
1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical
installations, either handling, lifting, operation
or maintenance must be well informed and
updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully
follow them.
We strongly recommend that these jobs
are carried out by qualified personnel.
MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC

MOTORS ARE SWITCHED OFF
BEFORE STARTING ANY
MAINTENANCE SERVICE.
Motors must be protected against accidental starts.
When performing any maintenance
service, disconnect the motor from the power
supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust
and/or water into the terminal box, cable glands
or threaded pipe in the lead holes must be
installed.
Do not change the regulation of the
protecting devices to avoid damaging.
Original 2011-06-21
2 - Operating Conditions
Electric motors, in general, are designed
for operation at an altitude of 1000m above sea
level for an ambient temperature between 0C
and 40C. Any variation is stated on the
nameplate.
COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
FREQUENCY, SPEED, OUTPUT AND
OTHER VALUES DEMANDED BY THE
APPLICATION WITH THE DATA GIVEN
ON THE NAMEPLATE.
Motors supplied for hazardous locations
must be installed in areas that comply with that
specified on the motor nameplate.
KEEP AIR INLET AND OUTLET FREE
AND CLEAN. THE AIR BLOWN OUT
BY THE MOTOR SHALL NOT ENTER
AGAIN. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN
THE AIR INLET AND THE WALL
MUST BE AROUND OF THE
INLET OPENING DIAMETER.
3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed
on solid foundations to avoid excessive
vibrations.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the
foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid
corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently tough to support any schock. It must be
designed in such a way to stop any vibration

originated from resonance.
4 - Drain Holes
Make sure the drains are placed in the
lower part of the motor when the mounting
configuration differs from that specified on the
motor purchase order.
5 - Balancing
THE MOTORS ARE DYNAMICALLY
BALANCED WITH HALF KEY, AT NO
LOAD AND UNCOUPLED.
Transmission elements such as pulleys,
couplings, etc must be dynamically balanced
with half key before installation.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and
removal.
6 - Alignment
ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND
USE FLEXIBLE COUPLING,
WHENEVER POSSIBLE.
Ensure that the motor mounting devices
do not allow modifications on the alignment and
further damages to the bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, be sure
to use suitable equipment and tools to protect
the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Check that clearance Y is less than
0.05 mm and that the difference X1 to X2 is less
than 0.05 mm, as well.
Note: Dimension X1 and X2 must be

3mm minimum
Figure and alignment tolerances
7 - Belt Drive
When using pulley or belt coupling, the
following must be observed:
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid
slippage when running, according to the
specifications stated on the belt supplier

recommendation.
WARNING:
Excessive tension on the pulleys will
damage the bearings and lead to a
probable shaft rupture.
8 - Connection
WARNING:
Voltage may be connected at standstill
inside the terminal box for heating elements or
direct winding heating.
WARNING:
The capacitor on single-phase motors
can retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill.
Original 2011-06-21
A WRONG CONNECTION CAN

BURN THE MOTOR.
Voltage and connection are indicated on
the nameplate. The acceptable voltage
variation is 10%; the acceptable frequency
variation is 5% and the total acceptable
variation is 10%.
9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct
starting. In case this is not possible, use
compatible methods to the motor load and
voltage.
The rotation direction is clockwise if the
motor is viewed from DE side and if the
phases are connected according to the
sequence L1, L2, L3.
To change the rotation direction, interchange two of the connecting leads.
THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DONE BY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND WITH
FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE A SAFE
AND PERMANENT CONNECTION.
AFTER CONNECTING THE MOTOR,
CHECK FOR ANY STRANGE BODY
INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE
CLOSED.
Make sure to use the correct cable

dimension, based on the rated current stamped
on the motor nameplate.
BEFORE ENERGIZING THE
TERMINALS, CHECK IF THE
GROUNDING IS MADE
ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT
STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL
AGAINST ACCIDENT RISKS.
When the motor is supplied with
protective or monitor temperature device such
as thermostats, thermistors, termal protector, etc,
connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel.
10 - Start-Up
THE KEY MUST BE FASTENED OR
REMOVED BEFORE STARTING THE
MOTOR.
a) The motor must start and operate
smoothly. In case this does not occur, turn it off
and check the connections and the mounting
before starting it again.
b) If there is excessive vibration, check if
the fastening screws are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a
neighbour machine. Periodical vibration checks
must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a
short period of time and compare if the running
current is equal to that stamped on the
nameplate.
MAINTENANCE
WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST
1 - General Inspection
Check the motor periodically.
Keep the motor clean and assure free air flow.
Check the seals or V Ring and replace them, if
required.
Check the connections as well as supporting
screws.
Check the bearings and observe: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease
condition.
When a change, under normal conditions, is
detected, check the motor and replace the
required parts.
The frequency of the inspections depends

on the motor type and on the application
conditions.
LUBRICATION
FOLLOW THE REGREASING
INTERVALS. THIS IS FUNDAMENTAL
FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION.
1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
Motors up to frame 200 are normally fitted
without grease nipples. In these cases the
regreasing shall be done at the preventive
maintenance job observing the following
aspects:
Disassemble carefully the motors.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with querosene or diesel.
Regrease the bearing immediately.
2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Nipples

It is strongly recommended to grease the
machine while running. This allows the grease
renewal in the bearing housing. When this is
not possible due to turning parts by the grease
device (pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some
risk to the physical integrity of the operator,
proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and
run the motor for 1 minute at full speed.
Then turn off the motor and insert the rest of the
grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in
standstill can make the grease penetrate into the
motor, through the inner seal of the bearing
housing.
FOR LUBRICATION USE ONLY
MANUAL GREASE GUN.
Original 2011-06-21
RELUBRICATION INTERVALS
TABLE 1 - BALL BEARINGS - Series 62/63
II pole
Relubrication intervals (running hours horizontal position)

IV pole
VI pole
Bearing
6209
6211
6212
60Hz
18400
14200
12100
50Hz
20000
16500
14400
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
Bearing
6309
6311
6312
6314
6316
6319
6322
60Hz
15700
11500
9800
3600
-
50Hz
18100
13700
11900
4500
-
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
9700
8500
7000
5100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
11600
10400
9000
7200
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
14200
12800
11000
9200
Serie 62
VIII pole
50Hz
60Hz
20000 20000
20000 20000
20000 20000
Serie 63
50Hz
60Hz
20000 20000
20000 20000
20000 20000
16400 17300
14900 15900
13000 14000
10800 11800
X pole
XII pole
Grease
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
(g)
9
11
13
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
19700
18700
17400
15100
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
19700
18700
17400
15100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
18600
15500
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
18600
15500
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
19300
(g)
13
18
21
27
34
45
60
TABLE 2 - ROLLER BEARINGS - Series NU 3

II pole
Bearing
NU 309
NU 311
NU 312
NU 314
NU 316
NU 319
NU 322
NU 324
60Hz
9800
6400
5100
1600
-
50Hz
13300
9200
7600
2500
-
IV pole
60Hz
20000
19100
17200
7100
6000
4700
3300
2400
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
8900
7600
6000
4400
3500
VI pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
11000
9500
7600
5900
5000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
13100
11600
9800
7800
6600
VIII pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
15100
13800
12200
10700
10000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
16900
15500
13700
11500
10200
X pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
16900
15500
13700
11500
10200
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
19300
17800
15700
13400
12100
XII pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
19300
17800
15700
13400
12100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
17300
15000
Grease
(g)
13
18
21
27
34
45
60
72
Note:
The ZZ bearings from 6201 to 6307 do not
require relubrication as its life time is about
20,000 hours.
Tables 1 and 2 are intended for the lubrication
period under bearing temperature of 70C (for
bearings up to 6312 and NU 312) and
temperature of 85C (for bearings 6314 and NU
314 and larger).
For each 15C of temperature rise, the
relubrication period is reduced by half.
The relubrication periods given above are
for those cases applying Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical
position, their relubrication interval is reduced
by half if compared to horizontal position
motors.
WE RECOMENDED TO USE BALL
BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD.
Original 2011-06-21
WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREACE CAN CAUSE
BEARNING OVERHEATING
RESULTING IN COMPLETE
DAMARGE.
Compatibility of Polyrex EM grease with
other types of grease:
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral
oil, the Polyrex EM grease is compatible with
other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea
and highly refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and
anti-oxidant additive.
Notes:
Although Polyrex EM is compatible with types
of grease given above, we do not recommended
to mix it with any other greases.
If you intend to use a type of grease different
than those recommended above , first contact
HATLAPA.
On applications (with high or low temperatures,
speed variation, etc), the type of grease and
relubrification interval are given on an additional
nameplate attached to the motor.
THE USE OF STANDARD MOTORS
IN SPECIFIC AREAS OR SPECIAL
APPLICATIONS MUST BE DONE BY
CONSULT TO THE GREASE
MANUFACTURER OR HATLAPA
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Disassembly and assembly must be done
by qualified personnel using only suitable tools
and appropriated methods.
The stator grips must be applied over the

side face of the inner ring to be disassembled or
over an adjacent part.
It is essential that bearings assembly be
done under cleanning conditions to ensure
good operation and to avoid damages. New
bearings shall only be taken out from their cases
when assembling them.
Before installing a new bearing it is
required to check the shaft fitting for any sharp
edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner
parts withsuitable equipment - inductive pocess
- or use suitable tools.
SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify
the full type designation and product code as
stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the
nameplate.
MOTORS FOR HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS
Besides the recommendations given
previously, these ones must be also followed:
THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR
INSTALLATION PLACE IS FOR
CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY,
WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE THE
ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS.
Motors for hazardous locations are
manufactured according to specific standards
for such environments and they are certified by
worldwide certifying entities.
1 - Installation
The complete installation must follow
procedures given by the local legislation in effect.
THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS
LOCATION MOTORS MUST BE
CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED PEOPLE,
AND THE THERMAL PROTECTION
MUST BE ALWAYS INSTALLED,
EITHER INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE
MOTOR, OPERATING AT THE RATED
CURRENT.
2 - Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair
shops authorized by HATLAPA.
Repair shops and people without HATLAPAs
authorization who will perform any service on
hazardous location motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any
consequential damage.
ANY ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL

MODIFICATION MADE ON
HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS
WILL VOID THE CERTIFICATION.
When performing maintenance,
installation or relubrication, follow these
instructions:
Check if all components are free of edges,
knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings
with protective oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check for correct bolts tightening.
Use clearance calibrator for correct T-box fitting
(smaller than 0.05mm).
DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR
WORN PARTS. REPLACE THEM BY
NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY.
Original 2011-06-21
MOTORS DRIVEN BY VFD

Applications using VFDs without filter
can affect motor performance as follows:
Lower efficiency.
Higher vibration.
Higher noise level.
Higher rated current.
Higher temperature rise.
Reduced motor insulation.
Reduced bearing life.
1- Standard Motors
Voltages lower than 440V do not require filter.
Voltages equal or higher than 440V or lower
than 575V require filter for motor power supply
cables longer than 20 meters.
Voltages equal or higher than 575V require
filter for any size of power supply cables.
IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS ARE
NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY,
MOTOR WARRANTY WILL BE VOID.
2- Inverter Duty Motors:
Check power supply voltage of the forced
cooling set.
Filters are not required.
for V-Line
Piston Compressors
178492
Rev. 01.06
1. General
the compressor.
Original 2011-06-21
deposits on valves and pipelines. HATLAPA recommends to use oils of class VDL according to
DIN 51 506.
3. Guarantee
Mineral Oils
Synthetic Oils
BP
ENERGOL RC100
ENERSYN RX100
CASTROL
AIRCOL PD 100
AIRCOL SN 100
CHEVRON TEXACO (FAMM) COMPRESSOR OIL EP VDL100 CETUS DE 100
ELF TOTAL FINA (Lubmarine) DACNIS P100
BARELF CH 100
EXXCOLUB 100
SYNESSTIC 100
RARUS 427
RARUS 827
SHELL
CORENA P 100
CORENA AP 100
However, the oil properties are subject to change without notice by the oil manufacturer. Also,
the oil characteristics may vary depending on the regional market. Therefore this list does not
release the operator of the compressor from verifying that the selected oil complies with the
above specification.
Service
Anleitung zur richtigen Bestellung von Ersatzteilen

Fr die Bestellung sind folgende Angaben unbedingt erforderlich:
1) Schiffsname (Ex-Name), Neubau-Nr. und Bauwerft
2) Fabriknummer und Typenbezeichnung (siehe Typenschild)
3) Ersatzteilnummer entsprechend Ersatzteilliste
4) Gewnschte Versandart, Versandadresse und Rechnungsanschrift
Instructions for correctly ordering spare parts

When ordering spare parts, the following details must be given:
Original 2011-06-21
1) Name of vessel (former name), Hull No. and building shipyard

2) Serial number and type of the machine (see name plate)
3) Part number from the Spare Parts List
4) Desired method of dispatch, invoice and consignees address
Instruction pour tablir les commandes de pices de rechange

Les indications suivantes seront indispensables pour la commande:
1 Nom du navire (ex-nom), No. du navire et chantier de construction
2 Numro dusine et type (voir plaque didentit)
3 Numro de pice suivant liste des pices de rechange
4 Mode de transport dsir, adresses du destinataire et de la facture
Instrucciones para pedir correctamente piezas de repuesto.

Cuando se piden piezas de repuesto, deben ser dados los
siguintes datos:
1) Nmero de serie y tipo (ver placa) .

2) Nmero de la pieza segn la Lista de Piezas de Repuesto.
3) Forma de despacho as como consignacin y direccin para la facturacin.
4) Nombre del buque (nombre antgo) nmero de construcin y Astilliero.
Guida alla corretta ordinazione dei pezzi di ricambio

Per ordinare rispettivi pezzi di ricambio sono assolutamente indispensabili i seguenti dati:
1) Nome della nave (ev. nome precedente), numero di Costruzione e nome del Cantiere
Naval e
2) Numero di matricola e tipo del compressore (vedi targhetta)
3) Numero del pezzo di ricambio in base alla Lista dei pezzi di ricambio
4) Mezzo di trasporto, indirizzo di spedizione ed indirizzo di fatturazione desiderati
Service
Um Ersatzteile schnellstens zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich bitte direkt an
oder an unsere Vertretungen (x), Kundendienststellen (o) oder Lizenznehmer ( +) laut

anliegender Liste.
In order to receive spare parts with the least possible delay, please get in touch with us
directly
Original 2011-06-21
or with our representatives (x),service stations (o) or licensees/co-operators (+) as

indicated in the enclosed list.
Pour assurer une fourniture rapide, veuillez vous adresser
ou nos agences (x) , stations-service (o) ,licencis/partenaires de cooperation (+)

Per offenere i rispetti celermente rivolgersi direttamente alla:
od ai rappresentanti (x), centri dassistenza (o) o licenziatari/partner di cooperazione (+)

delta HATLAPA indicati neIlelenco aliegato.
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
OUR MANUFACTURING PROGRAMME:
Deck machinery, compressors, steering gear
Headquarters:
HATLAPA Uetersener Maschinenfabrik GmbH & Co. KG

Tornescher Weg 5-7
25436 Uetersen
GERMANY
Phone: +49 4122 711-0
Mobile: +49 172 9 813292
Fax:
+49 4122 711-104 Sales
711-330 Service
info@hatlapa.de, http://www.hatlapa.de
Subsidiary office for Hamworthy type compressors:
Original 2011-06-21

551-553 Wallisdown Road
POOLE, Dorset BH12 5AG
UNITED KINGDOM
Phone: +44 1202 8531-80
Fax: +44 1202 8531-91 Sales
8531-90 Spares
info@halapa-uk.com, http://www.hatlapa-uk.com
Vertretungen (x), Kundendienststellen (o) und Lizenznehmer (+)

Representatives (x), service stations (o) and licensees/co-operators (+)
Agencies (x), stations-service (o) et licencis/partenaires de cooperation(+)
o Australia
CJA Marine Technology Pty Ltd

Unit 3, 136 Cochranes Road
Moorabbin, Victoria 3189
Tel: +61 3 953213-97 / 953213-86

Fax: +61 3 953214-13
info@cjamarine.com.au
x Belgium
Marine & Industrie

Div. of SA Aciers Marathon Staal NV
Haven 138, Boterhamvaartweg 2 (Unit 1)
B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 82740-91

Fax: +32 3 82740-95
mardus@skynet.be
o Belgium/
Luxembourg
Service Hydro n.v.

Haven 138, Boterhamvaartweg 2
B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 54640-80

Fax: +32 3 54640-81
marcel.de.winter@hydro.be
x Brazil
TRIDENTE Indstria Comrcio Equip Ltda

Rua Visc Inhama
134 Centro, Rio de Janeiro
RJ, 20091-007
Tel: +55 21 2233-1489

Cell: +55 21 9983-3190
Fax: +55 21 2516-7543
japgomes@tridente.com.br
o Brazil
Metalock Brasil Ltda

Rua Visconde do Rio Branco 20/26
Santos, SP 11013-030
Tel: +55 13 322646-86

Fax: +55 13 322646-80
santos@metalock.com.br
Updated 14th December 2010
Page 1
Original 2011-06-21
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
x Bulgaria
Ecatdan ApS
1, Studentska Str.
9010 Varna
Tel: +359 52 383476

zl_alexiev@yahoo.com
xo Canada
Marine and Offshore Canada

29-113 Cushman Rd
St. Catherines
Ontario, L2M 6S9
Tel: +1 905 688 4922 (office)

Fax: +1 905 688 9028
Cell: +1 905 650 3160
roger@marineandoffshore.com
o Chile
Eurotecnica Ltda
Lincoyn # 973
4030485 Conception
Tel: +56 41 22532-75

Fax: +56 41 22532-76
eurotec@eurotecnica.cl
x+ China
HATLAPA Nanjing Representative Office

Asia Pacific Pte Ltd
Room 612, No 19, Zhanyuan Road
Nanjing 210039
Tel: +86 25 52 26 27 90
Fax: +86 25 86 70 33 10
general@hatlapa.com.sg
x China
HATLAPA Shanghai Asia Pacific Pte Ltd

No. 1211 Chang De Road
Room 1011, Baohua Building
Shanghai 200060
Tel:
+86 21 623296-71
Mobile: +86 137 0 17473 14
Fax:
+86 21 623039-71
hatlapa@online.sh.cn
xo Croatia
Nava International d.o.o.

Planciceva 4
21000 Split
Tel: +385 21 385267

Fax: +385 21 385267
mirko.nava@inet.hr
x Cyprus
M.I.E. Services Ltd

The Hawk Building
124 Gladstonos Str..
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 889801

Fax: +357 25 763902
info@mieserv.cy.net
x Cyprus
HATLAPA EastMed Ltd

The Hawk Building
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 8897-00

Fax: +357 25 3660-88
x.papacosta@hatlapa.cy.net
x Denmark
A/S Kelvin Hughes

Gngehusvej 280
DK-2970 Horsholm
Tel:
+45 8734 2270
Mobile: +45 2060 9405
Fax:
+45 8611 2726
bentmitens@kelvinhughes.dk
x Egypt
AMCO Alexandria Maritime

10 Ahmed Yehya Pasha St.
Gleem P.O. Box 1424, Alexandria
Tel: +20 3 58585-70

Fax: +20 3 58285-87
a.alyan@amcoeg.com
x Finland
EPOMARE OY (from 1st January 2011)

Permiehenkatu 11
20810 Turku
Tel: +358 2 2749640

Fax: +358 2 2351499
info@epomare.fi
x France
Wenex Equipments SA
49 Rue de Billancourt
92100 Boulogne
Tel: +33 1 411023-30

Fax: +33 1 411023-45
Wenex.equip@wenex.fr
o Germany
Friedrich Jung Fa.

Knig-Friedrich-Wilhelm-Str. 20
Tel: +49 203 82898

Fax: +49 203 57085-24
Page 2
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
47119 Duisburg
xo Great Britain
HATLAPA Marine Equipment Ltd

Poole, Dorset BH12 5AG
Tel: +44 1202 8531-80

Fax:+44 1202 8531-90
info@hatlapa-uk.com
xo Greece
M.I.E. Co. Ltd.

Kanari 1
18537 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4598-800

Fax: +30 210 4539-234
commercial@mie.gr
o Greece
INJEGOV Advanced Mechanical Services Ltd

Vipa Shistou, Road 2, OT3 Perama
18863 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4323600/1-2

Fax: +30 210 43127-70
info@injegov.gr
xo India
Dolphin Consultants
35 Mittal Chambers
Nariman Point, Maharashtra State
Mumbai 400021
Tel: +91 22 302877-11 to 15 (5 Lines)

Fax:+91 22 302877-10
info@dolphinc.in
xo Indonesia
PT. Assindo Perniagaan Internasional

Victoria Building, 3rd Floor
Jl. Sultan Hasanuddin No. 47 - 51
Jakarta Selatan 12160
Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
ptapijak@indo.net.id
+ Indonesia

Victoria Centre, 3rd Floor
Jl. Sultan Hasanuddin No. 47-51
Jakarta 12160
Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
ptapijak1@indo.net.id
xo Iran
Iran IMEXEN Co.

No.4, Apt. 6, Morvarid Crossing
Goldan St., Africa Ave. (Ex-Jordan)
Tehran 19668
Tel: +98 21 22000008

Fax: +98 21 22004849
info@imexen.com
xo Italy
RTN Srl
Loc. C Verde
29011 Borgonovo Val Tidone (PC)
Tel: +39 0523 869611

Fax: +39 0523 861077
info@retenav.it
xo Korea
Dong Sung Co.

Room 1725, 21 Century City Building
55-1, Daeyeon 3-dong
Nam Gu, Pusan 608-743
Tel: +82 51 61012-33

Fax: +82 51 61012-32
ch_park2@dongsungco.com
xo Korea
HATLAPA Korea Co. Ltd.

1212, Jisa-dong
Gangseo-gu, Busan
Tel: +82 51 97292-66

Fax: +82 51 97292-70
hk.han@hatlapa.co.kr
x Lebanon
M.I.E. (Overseas) Ltd.

The Hawk Building
124 Gladstonos Street
3312 Limassol, Cyprus
Tel: +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
info-ov@mieserv.cy.net
x Middle East
Tel: +357 25 366077

Fax.:+357 25 366088
for steering gear
Saudi Arabia, Oman The Hawk Building

U.A.E., Qatar, Yemen 124 Gladstonos Street
Bahrain, Kuwait,
Page 3
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
Jordan, Israel
xo Netherlands
Hamworthy KSE B.V.

Aploniastraat 33
3084 CC Rotterdam
Tel: +31 10 46247-77

Fax.: +31 10 41590-46
nlangdown@hamworthy.com
xo Norway
Hatlapa Marine Equipment AS

Frithjof Nansens Plass 7,
0117 Oslo
Tel: +47-918-08-546
jens.aaby@hatlapa.de
xo Poland
SANGER METAL Sp-ka Z o.o.

Mostnika Str.10-12
70-672 Szczecin
Tel: +48 91 4623236 / 4623383

Fax: +48 91 4623345
biuro@sangermetal.com
xo Portugal
Javier Lpez-Alonso Morn

Avda. San Luis 166 - 8 E
28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

javlopez1@telefonica.net
x Romania
XEREX SRL
43 Alexandru Cernat str.
800087 Galati, Romania
Tel/Fax: +40 236 462056

Mobile: +40 723 533596
ilniczky@yahoo.com
x Singapore
HATLAPA Asia Pacific Pte Ltd

German Centre, Unit 02-25
25 International Business Park
Jurong, Singapore 609916
Tel:
+65 65 628086 / 628088
Mobile: +65 96 339381
Fax: +65 65 628099
info@hatlapa.com.sg
xo Spain

28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

xo Sweden
Bvik Marin AB
Hlleflundregatan 12
42658 Vstra Frlunda, Gothenburg
Tel: +46 31 290075

info@bovikmarin.se
x Syria

The Hawk Building, 124 Gadstonos Street
Tel : +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
x Taiwan
SHIPCARE Co. Ltd.

Rm1, 2nd fl., no.135, sec.1
Chungking South Road
Taipei 10036
Tel: +886 2 2383-2255

Fax: +886 2 2383-1020
shipcare@shipcare.com.tw
x U.S.A.
MarinSOLVE LLC
PO Box 2176
Clifton, NJ 07015
Tel: +1 973 24657 26

Fax: +1 973 75503 33
sales@marinesolve.com
x U.S.A.
CS Controls
101 Dickson Road
Houma, LA 70363
Tel: +1 985 876 6040

Fax: +1 985 876 0751
timmy.badeaux@cscontrols.com
x U.S.A.
Mariner Hub LLC

917 West 21st Street, Unit H
Houston, TX 77008
Tel: +1 713 822 1252

nelson.sosa@marinerhub.com
Page 4
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
TENAVAL
Av. Fco. De Miranda, Edif. Bco del Orinoco
2, Piso Ofic 2-B
Caracas
Original 2011-06-21
x Venezuela
Page 5
Tel: +58 212 285-2344

+58 212 285-7822
+58 212 285-7631
Fax: +58 212 285-7776
Piston Compressor
for
Piston Compressor Type L 20
of
Original 2011-06-21
GmbH & Co. KG
25436 UETERSEN
GERMANY
Phone: +49-4122-711 0..
Telefax: +49-4122-711 330
Ref.-No.:
10.2722 / 2
Serial-No.:
10.2722 - 2 - 0
operator
Piston Compressor
Original 2011-06-21
Table of Contents
1
Technical Indications
Spare Parts List
E-Diagrams
E - Motor
Service
Original 2011-06-21

Copyright ................................................................................................................................................. 3
Guarantee................................................................................................................................................ 3
Designations ............................................................................................................................................ 4
Signs Used .............................................................................................................................................. 5
Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................... 5

Original 2011-06-21

16 Waste Disposal...................................................................................................................................... 10
2 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
at all times.
2 Copyright
Original 2011-06-21
3 Guarantee
Techen, Kerstin

26.11.2009
3 / 10
4 Designations
Original 2011-06-21
4 / 10

26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
5 Signs Used
Sign for Danger
Danger!
Sign for Caution
Caution!

Pay Attention!
Original 2011-06-21

Information!
6 Intended Use

Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
5 / 10

Original 2011-06-21
9 Safety Equipment
Danger!
operated.
secured.

Caution!
6 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin

Danger!

Danger!
Original 2011-06-21
Deadly voltage!

Danger!
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
7 / 10

Danger!
personnel.
documentation.
Original 2011-06-21

housing!
Caution!
8 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin

Danger!
Original 2011-06-21

approx. 2 hours!
Caution!
of dirt.
compressor.
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
9 / 10
15 Noise Protection
Caution!
operation.
16 Waste Disposal
Original 2011-06-21
10 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
Final Drawings
Original 2011-06-21
for
1x EMERRGENCY AIR COMMPRESSOR L20
2011-06-21
1/1
INDEX
SECTION 1
.............................................. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 2
CONTRACT SPECIFIC DRAWINGS
Original 2011-06-21
DRAWING No.
TITLE
179132049............................ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT L20 30 BAR

450388................................... PIPING DIAGRAM
.............................................. INSTRUMENT LIST
D10183...................................COMP.AIRPRESSURECONTROLSWITCH
177148...................................OILANDWATERSEPARATOR
174502...................................FLEXIBLEHOSEFORCOMPRESSEDAIR
174767...................................EMOTORDATASHEET
344183..................................CONNECTIONDIAGRAM
344184...................................STARTER/CONTROLLER
STANDARD COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS

DRAWING No.
TITLE
178483................................... FLEXIBLE HOSE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

175694................................... LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 3
074608................................... SPARE PART LIST
176968................................... SPARE PART E-MOTOR
020244...................................AIRFILTER
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 1
Our Ref. 10.2722/2K
EMERGENCY AIR COMPRESSOR
1 x ELECTRO-COMPRESSOR SET T y p e L 20
high pressure compressor, single acting, with 2 cylinder/s, 2-staged, air-cooled.
F.A.D. compressed from 0-30 bar
25
m/h (+/-5%)
(20C, 1,013 bar)
Original 2011-06-21
Speed
Final pressure
Power need approx.
Heat to be dissipated
Direction of rotation when facing the driving side
1.750 min-1
30
bar
6,3
kW
5,1
kJ/sec.
clockwise
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Compressor with flywheel and flexible coupling
air-intake filter with silencer
radial fan for cylinder cooling
intermediate and after cooler
force-feed lubrication by means of gearwheel pump
pressure gauges with glycerine filling for 1st and 2nd stage as well as for oil pressure with root
cocks
condensate drain valves on 1st and 2nd stage
safety valves on 1st and 2nd stage
pipe connection for compressed-air outlet
crankcase breather
oil level inspection glass
fusible plug
AUTOMATIC CONTROL
for starting without load, for automatic start/stop operation,
with automatic drainage in "stop" position as per description
and piping and wiring diagram, suitable for control current, consisting of:
a) 1 solenoid valve, ref. Y4
relieving the compressed-air delivery pipe and for
draining the 2nd stage as well as the oil and water
separator ref. D4, fitted to the oil and water separator,
open when not energised.
b) 1 pressure control switch, ref. F4, separate, with 3-way test cock
suitable for control current, switching-on pressure adjustable
between 12 and 27 bar, switching-off pressure at 30 bar.
1 contactor cabinet with motor protection,
consisting of steel casing, containing:
main contactor for the electric motor
transformer
overcurrent relay for the electric motor

main switch
PLC (programmable logic control)
textdisplay for indication of operating modes,
disturbances and service intervals
with push buttons for operating the compressor
potential free contacts for indicating
"compressor on" and "collective alarm"
with cable gland
Oil pressure control switch, ref. F2, splash-tight, with 3-way test cock
switching off the compressor set at insufficient oil pressure
Compressed-air temperature control switch, ref. F3,
splash-tight, switching off the compressor at excessive compressed-air temperature
and making contact with the alarm
Non-return valve, ref. RV, separate for mounting in the compressed-air delivery line.
Original 2011-06-21
Oil and water separator, ref. D4, separate, with solenoid valve for automatic drainage, for
mounting in the compressed-air delivery line.
AC squirrel cage induction motor for direct-on-line starting
make of our choice, type B3/B5, flange diameter 300 mm, protection IP54
for 45C ambient temperature according the rules of NK
6,3 kW nominal out-put at 1.750 min-1, 440 V, 60 Hz,
with space heater and cable gland
Compressor set, three-point mounted, assembly included.
Resilient mounting, separate hose pipe for compressed-air included
FINAL PAINTING of compressor, electric motor and contactor cabinet:

MUNSELL 7.5 BG 7/2
TESTING: by NK of compressor and oil-water separator
1 set of spare parts for compressor according to the rules of NK
1 set of spare parts for electric motor consisting of 1 set anti-friction bearings
1 set of spare parts for contactor cabinet consisting of 1 contactor
1 additional set of air filter inlets for compressor for SYs purpose
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 2
949
540
Temperature switch; F3
409
Air intake filter
Safety valve
2nd stage; SV2
Pressure gauge
1st stage; P1
536
510
Oil pressure gauge; P4

Pressure gauge
2nd stage; P2
Drainage 1st stage
Comp. air outlet
for pipe 16x1,5
100
Foot print
70
649
100
130
158
222
262
Oil pressure switch; F2
Fusible plug; F
Drainage 2nd stage G3/8
Oil level inspection glass
Oil outlet
435
500
minimum distance for
cooling air supply
215
227
382
465
Original 2011-06-21
12
159
241
621
Motor 132M
11
11
70
Safety valve
1st stage; SV1
weight: ~175 kg
Komm.-Nr.:
E-compressor set
L20
Datum :
Bearb. 01.11.10
"Schutzvermerk nach DIN 34 beachten"
Freig.
01.11.10
Pitrowski
Waldow
HATLAPA
D-25436 Uetersen
Masstab:
Zeichnungsnummer
179132-049
Klassennummer
06040
Index
Blatt
v. Blaetter
HATLAPA
Original 2011-06-21
Instrument list
Original 2011-06-21
Instrument:
range / setting point
1st stage air safety valve:

2nd stage air safety valve:
SV1
SV2
Set to:
Set to:
7
32
bar
bar
Oil pressure switch (alarm and trip):
F2
Adjusted to: 1
bar
F3
Adjusted to: 75
Compressed air temperature switch

(alarm and trip):
Pressure switch:
CMG 14.07.08
F4Start: adjst.
Stop: adjst.
bar
bar
>
-I'.
CROSS REFERENCE
151
75,5
-71=. II;
14
cn
AI -srl
VP
ISS
MI
-=-
Z
77
E-E-1
77 =I
P1
(/)
C
,-,
V
V
Ni 1"..-
HMI
-o
11
ll
_68PEN _
IIIM1 I II
212111...1
11,WFAIME
111
ALTERATIONS
=1 Fri
-, C)
I= -I
Eil
MEM
9p_
233
10
I 0.
Y.:
.v.
'71,-
ro
E CH NO.
'_'_.
11111 11111 1
11
11
20
11
11
30 40
-n
, c,-,
c., rn
< , < , ,
==
===
-1-1C--Frif
.-.
-r-Irrif-r-171
rfl
C P1
P1
C) M-1 C/)
C)
=1 C/)
, = -1
C) C
Cr, ''' ' 71 3
-i '-'71-1
rfl C-)
rg -= --r1 = P1 rfl
Fl
pi
a,-1
Z rri
-i 1-- x. -i
50
Z ,7-i
GI
Original 2011-06-21
(A)
ORIGINAL ISSUE
M.mraii.
GI
c,,,, C)
71
-1 (,,,,
.-.
C)
7)
_ ' m
_
z -
>..
I--
-, a>
rn
-I -I .-. = m
.--. = Z 71
GI Fri
r- ed
=
-I td
E-E
71
-1
-'"--
r, ,.,
-I v,
2 m
-I
F,,3
GI
-C1 Z
cr C) cr
71 v)
77 Crl
F-1 C
-.< mi '6,5 c,-)

i.,,,)
C/) 71
(e,
c
= =
70 cz)
z TI -I r-ri
=1
1- 71
=I
-1 0")
71
Fri
rfl rfl
-1
--i --i
(-)71= -I
__, , ,-, ,,,

,
=
i,
, 71 (-,
--1 =
, ,,
71 71
-17 --i
1=1 --o
71 C/)
.-,
"-z
1--) mi-i ,-,--1
p
1-- r- n
= =
-i
rn
(/)
'-'
0',
-e (') (-) =
c-1 Fl c-) = =
--1
(r) 71 rn 71 Fl
c-)
sz,
C-) -0
X>
,,
,=
''
1=1
1-1
ir,
x> -i z
c-)
=
-I
v)
1> '-' 1 - < <

petti
-1,--,,--,
(/)
C
71 71
C) .__,
3> '
-1 _,
rfl P1 C-)
C-) C7
(C7
-I Z = =
7>
-1 P1
Z C-)
-1
-
v)
'T_I
c-)
=
.-.
-F
0.,
c
C)
-1=1
r-
c , = ._, c ._<=1
,__, 2
-1
c')
m 71
rn
Z
-.1
--0 (-)
p 71
-ri
1>
z -1
m
1-1 71
C
[71
r
z 1
-- C)
i o
,-.0
=1
c, -1
=1
D
C)
c
-I
=+
+ ----I
<=>
Fl
1=1
R.
'=, Fri
td ,
,
71
i, ._.
__<
x>
_,
1
X>
a>
c,,,)
cz)
LE1
C7 GI Irg
71
%'
GI
71
(C7
=
az
,,..
=
,__,,
DJ
rt)
=
<
m z
-1
a>
cz) .-.
i- ,>.
v) .-.
,,
C7) 4=a> <
w-
,-71 (=>
to,
v) v),-.
7>
__
vi.
GO
x> co
o
CJ1 n,.)
<
-, o
n..) cr,
Fri
= ,-- -
1-- C
5
a>
n..) ,'5
1(-)
c,
Fri ,_,
= - =
F6
= a>
cr,
1-'1 p Pi 1")
-17
--ri 1- (-)
=I
I-
GI
71
Fri
=,
-i
`..-,
-- ed CZ)
< = cz) 1-.

rn
a> cz)
--,--0. ; ,71 Fl,
Fl
r-
1-
C7)
7>
=
n.)
(-)
P
--I
p
-1
C.,-)
C)
,,
--
3
7>
-1
P1
71
[EIE
-) R
v) =
%
< 5 ,,,
5.7.__.
Ln ,..5
--r-i
..
td 2
cr, rt) .-'--1..

CJ1
-c,
C/) -1 C) UV
C C
IT1
'-' td P1 1-I P1 (/) 1-
-1
cl ip
IT1
td
1-
-T-1
-1,.
a>
(-)
.-i
=
z
rn
V)
-1
(-)
(r)
71
z -I
2
rri-.1 m
R.,
u.,
r-'
_I
L_Ti
-1
rn a.
Zed
__,
P1
r-
--r,
no
,-1)
to
a>
-i
pi
r-
1>
<
11
-Li
Fri
V)
V)
-H
Fri
,, (--)
=
]- =
C-)
1 1
-H
70
'-<
cri
c,
c,
71
V)
71 C/)
Fl
GI
c.,,,,, =
_
=
C
C.,,,
I
V)
-
fu
1--
V)
=
-I
V)
Cr,
td
., .
-0
Fri
,>.
><
-
11
I
C --I
c Fri
ir)
rn -I
C7
=
FIRST ANGLE PROJECTION

ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES
MACHINING SYMBOLS UNSTATED
LIMITS TO T0103
PART NO.
SHT. 1
SH1S. 1
D,1 ,0,1 83
ISS1
PATT. NO.
MAT'L SPEC.
HATLAPA MARINE E QUIPMENT Ltd

Copyrightand All Oth er Ri ghts R eserved
,--. k-,,
= rn
z
a"- i=i
(-)
-
--I Z
7l3
Std
rfl
--,-,
,.. -pc-, ,,, ,. C)
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH - 30 BAR

WITH 3 WAY TEST COCK
AND 40MM TEST FLANGE
71 Z 70 11
2
2 -1 ,--, 2 7 -1 ;-'7 GI
cr c:,., 2 v.)
Gl 5
=
r- -i
71
__i
,
z71
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
12.5 27
12.5
30
600
16
180
140
173986-5

(344184-44070)
NO
NC
29 30
31 32
-X1
W
H1 H2
Brcke !
link !
EMERGENCY AIR
COMPRESSOR L20
6,3 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
30W
-F4
13 14
19 20
21 22
23 24
-F2
25 26
Brcke !
link !
6-13
6-13
ldruckschalter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Druckluftwchter fr
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
HE1 HE2
24V DC
-M1
24V DC
6-13
11 12
6-13
10
24V DC
6-13
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
9-17
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21
9-17
NO
-F3
6-13
6-13


220-230V AC
L1 L2 L3
-Y4
* Bei
Datum
cable gla.08.12.10
A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Bearb.
Gepr.
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342530
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344183-44070
Blatt 1
von 1
Bl.
380
210
P1
P1
Amperemeter
AMMETER
P2

Q1
Hauptschalter
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
H2

INDICATING LIGHT
A
H2
P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
600
(BU)
Q1
Gewicht: ca. 30kg
WEIGHT: APPR. 30kg
Schutzart: IP54
8
20
Original 2011-06-21
Q2
mit Trfeststeller
20
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.

ON / OFF:


Original 2011-06-21
ALARMS:

compressor on / man


mode.
compressor starts.
compressor stops.
in automatic mode.
the display.

make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
low oil pressure
Oeldruck-Alarm
no cooling water
kein Khlwasserflu

starten.
gestoppt werden.
anlaufen.
ALARME


EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
software.
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
5sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
20min
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
0min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d

gesprungen werden.
festgelegt.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
1L1
/5.0
11
-K1
3
12
/8.1
/8.9
0P
5%
-F1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
97 95
-Q2
98 96
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
Original 2011-06-21
/6.0
9-13A
CLASS 20
-F3
-T1
440V
/5.0
0,63-1A
GV2 RT05
-Q1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-Q3
20A
-P1
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
51
61
/8.1 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
HE1 HE2
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
5,5-7,5 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.25-50W
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
0V DC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
TD200_8
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7

8 x Eingnge
/6.0
/6.2
/6.4
/6.6
/6.8
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
AIR TEMPERATURE SWI
COOL.WATER TEMP.SWI
COOL.WATER FLOW SWI
SPARE
SPARE
6 x Ausgnge Relais
2
3
5
6
8
9
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
/8.1
/8.2
/8.5
/8.6
PE
Vers N
L1
M
Erw L+
1M
2M
Ein
1L
Aus 2L
-A1
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
star contactor
delta contactor
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
/5.9
1L+
1L+
/7.0
95
-F1
/4.2 96
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
E0.0
/5.2
E0.1

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
-A1
E0.2
/5.2
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

ldruckk-Wchter
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
PE
-A1
E0.3
/5.2
E0.4

Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
/5.2
Digitaler Eingang
PE
-A1
Digitaler Eingang
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
Optional ber
-F4
-F2 P
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
-F3
ldruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
-F5
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
/6.9
1L+
7
E0.5
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
/5.2
E0.6

10 PE
/5.2
-A1
E0.7
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
/5.2
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
11 12 PE
13 14 PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
-F6 F
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
1
-A1
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
NETZSCHTZ
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.1
/5.2
A0.2
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DRAIN VALVES
Digitaler Ausgang
COOLING WATER VALVE
FLOATING CONTACTS
/5.2
A0.3
6
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
A1
A1
-K2
-K1
Original 2011-06-21
18A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
/5.9
13
INCL. A2
VAR.
13
-K1
-K2
14 /8.1
14 /8.5
1N1
1
2
3
4
5
6
13 14
21 22
51 52
/4.8
61 62
/4.9
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
/8.9 13
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/8.8
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
-X1
19 20 PE
21 22 PE
23 24 PE
25 26 PE
29 30 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
(NO)
-Y1
-Y2
-Y3/4
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
(NC)
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
-Y5
Bearb.
Gepr.
31 32 PE
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
2/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
adaptors.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
3/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
4/4
1 General
in case of failure.

sharp objects!
resp. hose line!
Original 2011-06-21




this period.
date 18.04.2005
Created by Tanz
page 1 of 1
for HATLAPA W- and L-type
Piston Compressors
175694
Rev. 01.06
1. General
the compressor.
Original 2011-06-21

viscosity at 100 C: min. 9.4 cSt max. 15 cSt
deposits on valves and pipelines. HATLAPA recommends to use mineral oils of class VDL
according to DIN 51 506.
The use of synthetic oils is not recommended for HATLAPA W- and L-type compressors.
3. Guarantee
The following mineral oils are examples which comply with the above specification:
ARAL
MOTANOL HE100
BP
ENERGOL RC100
CASTROL
AIRCOL PD100
CHEVRON TEXACO (FAMM)
COMPRESSOR OIL EP VDL100
ELF TOTAL FINA (Lubmarine)
DACNIS P100
EXXCOLUB 100
RARUS 427
SHELL
CORENA P100
However, the oil properties are subject to change without notice by the
oil manufacturer. Also, the oil characteristics may vary depending on the
regional market. Therefore this list does not release the operator of the
compressor from verifying that the selected oil complies with the above
specification.
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 3
Komm.-Nr.:
Spare Parts
HATLAPA
UETERSENER MASCHINENFABRIK
D-25436 Uetersen
Reserveteile L15/L20
074608 - 07083
(dent-no.
Qt
(according to
manual)
Designation
Sketch
piston ring
1
20.30.10.40
94x1,5
..J
20.30.10.50
stepped scraper ring

94x1,75
20.30.10.60
oil scraper ring
r
&..)
?tr
..)
Original 2011-06-21
94x4
20.30.20.50
taper faced compr. ring
41
'
42x2
20.30.20.40
rm
..J
stepped scraper ring

42x2
20.20.10
compl. suction and

pressure valve 1st stage
20.20.20
compl. suction and

pressure valve 2nd stage
11
098
(NI
.n.
098
09.01.97
074610
set of packing rings
(see separate
(for valves)
sheet)
Sagroll
21.Juni 2008
16:52:16
HATLAPA
Set packing rings for valves
Komm.-Nr.:
D-25436 Uetersen
L15 / L20
Qt
(dent-no.
Designation
20.20.50
Gasket
074610 - 08004
Sketch
,,
Ln
,
(cylinder head 2nd stage)
Original 2011-06-21
20.20.40
074610.30
074610.40
20.20.30
(cylinder head 2nd stage)
SERi
0)
Packing ring 68x55x1
co
4'-k
(Copper)
s WI,
Packing ring 42x32x1
Gasket
Krafft
"
[Tr*
_M-W
CD
(cylinder head 1st stage)
22.04.08
L.--/
t=1
Gasket
(Copper)
a' ,
21.Juni 2008 16:52:16
FP
%0
t=1
HATLAPA
Spare parts
Kamm Nr
D-25436 Uetersen
Of
Ident-no.
084177-03400
for E-motor
Designation
grooved ball bearing
Original 2011-06-21
6308 ZZ
003549-03400
grooved ball bearing

6207 ZZ
Motor. WEG 132 M
20.03 01
Sagroll
176968 - 07080
Sketch
Original 2011-06-21
0115
CNJ
0 40
MaBe o hne Toleranzang abe
Andorung von
in
Ealwerhm
Gezekkeet
24.9.69 Adas."---
Nr.
CT
Datum Name
L90 L13118
&miff
Nenecepr.
Ail &orbit uag sutural!
Havetail
Auswirtstell
Diimpferfilter
HATLAPA
Ma/stab:
1:1
20244-04330
Ersatz tar
Uetersen / Holstein
O./m.11110Mo Rothe 2 DIN 3141 - zul. groBIe Rauh/Ude:
Ersotzt dunk
unboarbolle gktt
v----ostoo pv=0,025
0VV.0,006
Original 2011-06-21
Instruction manual
Piston compressor
L15 - L20 - L35
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
INTRODUCTION:
This Instructions Manual contains a brief technical description and important instructions
on commissioning, maintenance and servicing of the compressor.
We recommend to read this manual carefully in order to be able, in case of trouble, to detect
the cause quickly and care for remedy and, in case of repairs, to make provisions for proper
mounting acc. to the instructions.
This manual assumes a general technical knowledge of piston compressors and does not
claim to be complete. If repairs become necessary, only original HATLAPA spare parts must
be used in order to maintain the operational reliability and efficiency of the machine.
For identification and supply of spare parts, an order must contain the following
information:
1. Serial No. and type designation (see name plate).
2. Ident No. from the spare parts list.
3. Method of the required dispatch, as well as consignee and address for the invoice.
Original 2011-06-21
4. Name of the vessel (ex-name), Yard No., and Shipyard.

In order to receive spare parts with the least possible delay, get in touch direct with

Tornescher Weg 5-7 D-25436 Uetersen / Germany
D-2549 Uetersen / Germany
Phone:
Telex:
Cable:
Fax:
E-mail:
Internet:
(+49) 4122 / 711- 0

218510 htlu d
HATLAPA Uetersen
(+49) 4122 / 711 - 330
info@hatlapa.de
http://www.hatlapa.de
or with our accredited agents, after-sales service stations or licensees/co-operators as per

attached list.
We wish to point out that repairs and/or modifications to the compressor which are carried
out without our approval during the guarantee period, will release us from our guarantee
obligations. The manufacturer cannot be rendered liable for damage to the compressor
which can be shown to have been caused by the use of unsuitable lubricants or failure to
comply with the operating instructions.
Reprint of the text or illustrations, or even extracts therefrom is prohibited.
Subject to alterations at all times due to technical development.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
Page:
1 Description ..................................................................................................................4
1.1 Design........................................................................................................................4
1.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................5
1.3 Working method.........................................................................................................5
1.4 Cooling.......................................................................................................................5
1.5 Lubrication of Working Parts......................................................................................6
1.6 Condensate Separation .............................................................................................6
1.7 Starting without Back-Pressure..................................................................................6
Original 2011-06-21
2 Setting-up and Installation.........................................................................................7

3 Commissioning...........................................................................................................8
3.1 Safety References .....................................................................................................8
3.2 Before Starting...........................................................................................................9
3.3 After Starting..............................................................................................................9
3.4 During Operation .......................................................................................................9
3.5 After Stopping ............................................................................................................9
4 Servicing and Maintenance......................................................................................10
4.1 General Servicing Instructions .................................................................................10
4.2 Servicing Schedule ..................................................................................................11
4.3 Overhaul of Valves ..................................................................................................13
4.4 Overhaul of Pistons and Cylinders...........................................................................13
4.5 Overhaul of crankshaft and connecting rod .............................................................14
4.6 Overhaul of Lubrication System...............................................................................15
4.7 Protection against Corrosion during prolonged Shut-Down .....................................16
5 Trouble Shooting ......................................................................................................17
6 Spare Parts................................................................................................................18
7 Instructions for Correctly Ordering Spare Parts....................................................19
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
1 Description
1.1 Design
Original 2011-06-21
Two-stage, single acting, air-cooled, 2-cylinder trunk piston machine with

90-V cylinder , arrangement.
The equalization of mass of the crank mechanism and the special arrangement of
the two cylinders together with the use of trunk pistons guarantee low vibrations
during operation. They enable a 3-point resilient mounting without any problems..
The large-dimensioned and slide bearings of the crankshaft and connecting
rods,and force feed lubricated oil, make the machine insensitive to internal and
external vibration loading in both standstill and operating modes.
The use of trunk pistons at all stages guarantees low wear and an safe lubrication
with high service life expectancy for pistons and cylinders.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
Original 2011-06-21
1.2 Specifications
Typ
L15 L20
L35
Number of Cylindersr
Cylinder Bore 1st Stage [mm]
94
94
94
Cylinder Bore 2nd Stage [mm]
42
42
42
Piston Stroke [mm]
52
52
71
Crankshaft-Axial Clearance [mm]
0,2- 0,20,3 0,3
0,20,3
Quantity of Lub. Oil min. [l]
1,75 1,75
1,75
Quantity of Lub. Oil max. [l]
2,25 2,25
2,25
Weight without E-Motor [approx. kg] 110 110
110
Setting Oil pressure

Machine [approx. bar]
at
warm 4
Setting Oil Pressure Contol Switch 1

[approx. bar]
1.3 Working method

The compressor compresses the ambient air sucked in through the air-intake filter
with silencer in two stages to the selected final pressure. Combined concentric ring
plate valves with large flow cross-sections control automatically the gas exchange
in the compression chambers. After every stage the heated compressed air flows
through a large-dimension cooler. To monitor the correct functioning of the
compressor a pressure gauge is installed after each compression stage. Safety
valves, installed after every compression stage, prevent the pressure from rising
above the admissible limit.
1.4 Cooling
The heat generated in the machine by air compression and mechanical friction is
led off to the atmosphere. A radial-flow fan fixed directly on the shaft and a hood
guide to suit the air flow guide the cooling air at high speed over the strongly ribbed
cylinders, valves and cylinder heads and over the ribbed cooler of the first and
second stages installed on the circumference.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
1.5 Lubrication of Working Parts

Only compressor oils according to the enclosed oil specification chart may be used.
Crankshaft and conn. rod bearings are force-feed lubricated by means of a
gearwheel oil pump driven directly by the crankshaft. This pump sucks the oil from
the crankcase through a sieve and forces it to the two main bearings of the
crankshaft, as well as to the conn. rod bearings. The lub. oil pressure is limited by a
spring-loaded pressure limiting valve and is indicated by a pressure gauge. The lub.
oil pressure is monitored by a pressure switch, which switches off the compressor
in case of insufficient oil pressure.
Original 2011-06-21
1.6 Condensate Separation

Together with the moist ambient air which is sucked in, water enters the
compressor in form of vapour. By compression and subsequent cooling of the
compressed air, this water vapour condenses. The water separated from the
compressed air blends with the oil which is entrained in very small quantities from
the lubricated working surfaces of the cylinders. This water-oil mixture is extracted
from the compressed-air stream in special condensate collector chambers.
At regular intervals after every 15 min. for about 10 sec. - as well as on starting
and stopping of the compressor, the collector chambers must be drained by
opening the manual valves or optionally by automatic devices. Such condensate
separation reduces wear and tear due to corrosion in the compressor components,
and in the connected pipelines and prevents the compressor from damage due to
water shocks. Disposal of the condensate has to be carried out according to the
locally valid prescriptions.
1.7 Starting without Back-Pressure

During starting-up, the driving motor must be unloaded by opening the drain valves.
In automatically controlled compressors, unloading is effected by time-lagged
closing of these valves.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
2 Setting-up and Installation

The compressor is driven by a directly-coupled electric motor through a flexible
coupling, the shaft centres of motor and compressor must lie in exactly the same
axis. Under no circumstances may the shaft centres be offset.
In case of resilient mounting there must be sufficient room for movement. All
pipelines must then be connected to the consumer system by flexible hoses, strictly
adhering to the installation instructions.
Original 2011-06-21
All drain pipelines are to be laid with constant descent and must discharge into an
open funnel after the shortest possible distance. Each compression stage needs a
separate drain pipeline in order to guarantee perfect drainage of the individual
stages; stop valves are to be installed as closely as possible to the compressor.
For sufficient supply of cooling air, the minimum distance to the cooler must be
observed (see final drawing). The air inlets may not be influenced by the warm
exhaust of other machinery.
Further instructions on the installation of valves, pipelines, and control equipment
are to be taken from the enclosed piping diagrams with their respective
descriptions.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
3 Commissioning
3.1 Safety References
The compressor has been produced according to the State-of-art and is
operationally reliable.
Original 2011-06-21
The compressors are a source of danger if inexpertly or improperly used.
Only authorised and trained persons are allowed to operate and repair the
machine or to do maintenance work. Make sure that these persons have read
and understood the complete operating instructions and safety instructions.
The compressor may only be used for compressing air.
The compressor may not be operated without safety or protecting devices.
Only sealed safety valves may be used, readjustment is not allowed. They
have to be replaced immediately when defective.
Before starting any maintenance work it is necessary to stop the compressor

system and to prevent it from re-starting. The system has to be voltagefree,
all parts containing compressed air have to be depressurized.
The compressor system may only be operated in perfect working condition. It

must be free of foreign parts.
Rebuilding or any other changes to the compressor system that may

influence the safety are strictly prohibited.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
At initial commissioning, after a several months` interruption in operation, or

after extensive repair work the operator must observe the following points (see
also 4.7 Protection against corrosion during prolonged Shut-Down).
Original 2011-06-21
3.2 Before Starting
The compressor must be filled to the upper oil level mark with prescribed
compressor oil (see list of recommended oils).
Check that the crankshaft is moving easily by turning over the flywheel by
hand; but make sure that the compressor set cannot be started
unintentionally.
Open the shut-off valve in the pipeline leading to the compressed-air

receiver.
Open drain valves.
3.3 After Starting
Check the direction of rotation of the shaft (see also arrow).
Watch the pressure gauge for rise in oil pressure.
Close the drain valves and check for leakage.
3.4 During Operation
Once the final pressure is attained, check the safety valves for proper
functioning: Slightly turn the knurled nut until the valve blows off. After
closure, check for leakage.
After fitting of new working parts (repair), run in the compressor for about
one hour at low final pressure (5 to 10 bar).
3.5 After Stopping
Open the drain valves at the condensate separators.
Check that the automatic drain valves open properly.
Check the non-return valve in the pipe to the compressed-air receiver for
leakage.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
4 Servicing and Maintenance

For trouble-free operation, it is necessary to check regularly and carefully the
safety devices and the wear and tear parts of the compressor as well as the
functioning of fitted valves and instruments. Regularly check the stock of spare
parts and seals which must be protected against corrosion, and stock up to the
specified quantity again after any servicing and overhaul work.
The following maintenance and overhaul instructions must be adhered to.
However, they do not claim to be complete.
Observance of the servicing intervals as mentioned below guarantees great
reliability and long service life of the compressor.
Original 2011-06-21
In this connection, reference is made to the requirements of the rules of the

classification societies and seafarer unions.
4.1 General Servicing Instructions
a) Check the oil level daily. Fill the crankcase with the prescribed compressor oil,
however, not exceeding the top oil level mark. Too much oil results in foaming
due to immersion of rotating parts, with the compressor at extremely inclined
position. Intense misting of the oil and uncontrolled cylinder lubrication would
result in increased oil consumption and coking of the working valves.
b) Drain off the lub. oil at the prescribed intervals - when the compressor is still hot
from running - and fill in fresh compressor oil after having cleaned the oil sieve.
c) Regularly and carefully check the oil pressure as well as the air pressure of all
stages. Varying operating pressure values indicate anomalies in the lubricating
system and valves, as well as leaks in the piping system.
d) At regular intervals dismantle and strip down the combined suction and
pressure valves and clean all parts. Packing rings between valve and cylinder
head must be replaced in sets only. For details, see 4.3 Overhaul of Valves.
e) Check the safety valves on the compressor by slightly turning the knurled nut at
short intervals.
10
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
4.2 Servicing Schedule

After first commissioning, after a general overhaul, and after repairs to the crank
mechanism or cylinder, the following maintenance work should be done:
After 100 working hours
1.) Change the oil.
2.) Clean the oil suction sieve.
3.) Check the safety valves.
Original 2011-06-21
4.) Check the bolts and nuts on crankcase, cylinders, and pipelines for
tightness (See list of tightening torques).
5.) Check the drainage system.
After that the following intervals are to be kept:

After every 500 working hours:
1.) Check the safety valves
2.) Clean the air-intake filter
3.) Check the drainage system
After every 1000 working hours (however, at least once a year):

1.) Change the oil.
2.) Clean the oil suction sieve.
3.) Clean the ribbed coolers, the ribbed cylinders and the radial-flow fan
Rev.: 15.09.1999
11
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
After every 1000 working hours:

1.) Clean the combined suction and pressure valves and check for wear.
2.) Check parts which come into direct contact with hot compressed air, such
as valves, cylinder heads and compressed-air pipelines for carbon residues
and, if necessary, clean them with solvents.
Original 2011-06-21
The admissible servicing intervals of the valves are determined above all by the
operating conditions and by the properties of the lubricant used. We
recommend to reduce the servicing intervals in case of severe operating
conditions.
12
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
4.3 Overhaul of Valves
Original 2011-06-21
The combined suction and pressure valves of the compressor require

conscientious care and maintenance. Their springs and plates are the most
intensely stressed parts of the compressor.
For cleaning, the concentric valves have to be dismantled by removal of the fitting
bolt. Soaking of the components in paraffin facilitates removal of coked deposits.
Care should be taken that the ground sealing surfaces, and valve plates are neither
scratched nor damaged. Springs and valve plates should be checked for damage
and wear and replaced, if necessary. For reassembly, adhere strictly to the
assembly diagram (parts list). Parts of different valves must not be mixed. Tighten
the fitting bolt with the prescribed torque. After reassembling check the soft running
of the valve plates against the spring pressure using a rounded pin. Valves and
valve parts must be clamped in a vice with smooth jaws only. When fitting the
valves, use new packing rings in sets and see that they are properly positioned.
Cylinder head nuts and bolts for pipes should first be tightend by hand. Then nuts
should be initially tightened cross-wise using a torque wrench at approx. 10 Nm
(1 kpm) and then tightened securely in the same sequence to the necessary torque.
4.4 Overhaul of Pistons and Cylinders

Pistons and cylinders can be removed for cleaning and checking of wear without
dismantling the connecting rod and crankshaft. All components must first be
marked so as to maintain pairings (assignment of pistons and cylinders) and the
positioning of the parts for reassembly.
To dismantle the pistons after pulling out the cylinders, firstly remove each of the
retainer rings of the wrist pins using a pair of circlip pliers, and then push the wrist
pin out of the piston with a set bolt or other suitable device.
Heating the piston to between approx. 60C and 80C facilitates insertion of the
wrist pin. Piston rings should be removed and inserted only using piston-ring
pliers.Observe that the piston rings are correctly positioned (see parts list) and
stagger the joints when fitting. On inclined cylinders, the oil scraper ring joint
should point upwards when fitting.
To measure clearance and wear, first of all, all parts must be cleaned and checked
for damage. The measurement of the cylinder diameter is carried out using a
precision internal gauge applied in the operational way of the piston rings.
The nominal diameter of the piston is stamped on top of the piston head. The actual
diameter should be checked at the bottom end of the piston stem, at right angles to
the wrist pin axis. For fitting clearances and wear limits refer to the attached list.
To check the joint clearance, the piston rings should be inserted at a right angle into
Rev.: 15.09.1999
13
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
the upper cylinder aperture and positioned at a location where the cylinder liner
shows no signs of wear. The joint clearance is measured using a feeler gauge.
Before fitting the pistons and cylinders, the seal-face on the crankcase and
underside of the cylinder must be carefully cleaned. Use new cylinder gaskets.
Apply oil to pistons and cylinders. Compress piston rings with a tensioning band
and slip the cylinders over the pistons by hand.
Take care that the cylinder head bolts do not touch the cooling ribs of the cylinders.
Parts, which have reached or exceeded their service life (see List of Wear Limits),
should be replaced.
Original 2011-06-21
4.5 Overhaul of crankshaft and connecting rod

Crankshaft and connecting rods move in force-feed lubricated slide bearings.
Connecting rods and bearing covers are identified by punched figures. Association
and location of the covers must not be changed. Mark the individual parts to
maintain correct positions during reassembly. After disassembly, clean all parts,
check all bearings and journals for wear and damage and measure the wear. Check
the axial and radial clearance by means of a precision gauge.
Refitting of the crankshaft
Clean the oil ducts and blow through compressed air. Thoroughly oil the bearings
and journals as well as the associated components before assembly. Insert the
crankshaft in the crankcase first without shaft seals and then screw on the housing
cover with its gasket. Check whether the axial clearance of the crankshaft is within
the admissible clearance. Fit the shaft seals and tighten the housing cover screws
to the prescribed torque. When fastening the flywheel and the fan wheel, secure the
crankshaft against rotation by inserting a rod from outside through the opening of
the flywheel housing into the flywheel bore.
14
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
Refitting of the connecting rods
Oil the crank pin and bolt threads.

Place the upper part of the connecting rod with bearing shell on the crank pin and
see that the shell is correctly positioned in the connecting rod.
Put the lower part of the connecting rod with bearing shell from the opposite side,
pass through the fitting bolts and screw them into the upper part of the connecting
rod.
Tighten the fitting bolts to the prescribed torque. (Slight distortions between the
bearing halves can be corrected by applying light blows to both connecting rod
parts close to the joint.)
Original 2011-06-21
4.6 Overhaul of Lubrication System

The lubrication oil pump driven directly by the crankshaft is located on the fan side
in the bearing cover of the crankcase. The gearwheels are installed in a pump cover.
Due to the symmetrical design this can be used in both clockwise and anticlockwise
direction of the crankshaft.
With clockwise running - normal design of the compressor with electric drive - this
pump cover is to be installed in such a way that the internally toothed gear points in
the direction of the 2nd stage cylinder (TOP-marking).
The following instructions are to be observed for pump installation. Firstly insert the
bearing cover with slide bearing into the crankcase and screw tight. Oil both
gearwheels and insert into pump cover. The punched point markings on the wheels
remain visible and point in the direction of the flywheel! Insert the pump cover
together with the gearwheels into the bearing cover. Turn the crankshaft by hand
until the internally toothed gear slides over the guide onto the shaft. After removing
the cover screws check easymovement of the shaft. Replace damaged or hardened
O-rings. The spring-loaded oil pressure limit valve is inserted into the crankcase
from the bottom on the fan side. In the event of operational breakdowns this can be
loosened directly for checking.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
15
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
4.7 Protection against Corrosion during prolonged Shut-Down

Compressors must be stored in a dry room. In case of long storage a protection
of all inner components should be carried out according to the manual at least
every 8 months. Before first commissioning, the compressors must be checked
by a trained engineer for damage which may result from long storage. A report
of inspection must be sent to HATLAPA. Noticed damage during this check are
not covered by our guarantee. The date of commissioning or supply of the
vessel to owner must be advised to us.
Compressors which will be put out of operation for several months must be
protected against corrosion.
Original 2011-06-21
Internal protection:
Open drain valves of 1st and 2nd stage under pressure.
Run the compressor without pressure while the drain valves are open.
Close the drain valves.
Remove the air-intake filter-and pour about 250 cm of anti-corrosion oil into the
air-intake socket within approx. 2 minutes.
Shut down the compressor and open the drain valves.
External protection:
After cleaning, apply rust-preventive paint to all parts.
Components made of light alloy, copper or brass need no treatment.
16
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
5 Trouble Shooting
The following details are intended to provide a brief guide to determining the
cause of abnormal operation. We do not claim that this information is complete.
It only deals with the faults most frequently encountered, as known from
experience.
a) Oil pressure too low:
Too low oil level in the crankcase (oil pressure display fluctuating).
Clogged suction sieve.
Leaking oil pressure limiting valve (dirt).
Damaged bearing (in general together with knocking noise).
Original 2011-06-21
b) Intermediate pressure too low and / or compressed-air delivery too low:

Combined suction/pressure valve damaged or leaking.
Leaking piston rings
Leaking cooler or compressed-air delivery line.
Still open or leaking drain valves.
c) Intermediate pressure too high and / or compressed-air delivery too low:
Combined suction/pressure valve damaged or leaking.
Leaking cooler or compressed-air delivery line.
d) Safety valve blowing off although pressure is normal:
Defective safety valve.
e) Safety valve 1st stage blowing off / Intermediate pressure too high
sea c)
f) Safety valve of final stage blowing off, final pressure too high :
Closed valve on compressed-air receiver.
Non-return valve does not open.
Defective pressure control switch (of the automatic system).
Rev.: 15.09.1999
17
Type
Instruction manual
L15 - L20 - L35
Piston Compressors
6 Spare Parts
We recommend to keep some spare parts in stock in order to allow quick
remedy of minor failures due to the natural wear and tear.
1 set of valve plates and valve springs for each stage

1 set of piston rings incl. oil scraper ring for each stage
1 set of sealing rings and gaskets for each stage
If the compressor is intended for continuous operation, in addition stock:
Original 2011-06-21
1 combined suction and pressure valve for each stage

1 set of crankshaft bearings and connecting-rod bearings
1 piston with wrist pin and piston rings for each stage
18
Rev.: 15.09.1999
Instruction manual
Type
Piston Compressors
L15 - L20 - L35
7 Instructions for Correctly Ordering Spare Parts

1.) Serial No. and type designation (see name plate).
2.) Ident. No. from the spare parts list.
3.) Method of the required dispatch, as well as consignee and address for the
invoice.
4.) Name of the vessel (ex-name), Yard No., and Shipyard.
Original 2011-06-21
In order to receive spare parts with the least possible delay, get in touch direct
with

Tornescher Weg 5-7 D-25436 Uetersen / Germany
D-2549 Uetersen / Germany
Phone:
Telex:
Cable:
Fax:
E-mail:
Internet:
(+49) 4122 / 711- 0

218510 htlu d
HATLAPA Uetersen
(+49) 4122 / 711 - 330
info@hatlapa.de
http://www.hatlapa.de
or with our accredited agents, after-sales service stations or licensees/cooperators as per attached list.
Rev.: 15.09.1999
19
Technische Hinweise
Technical indication
Indications techniques
Original 2011-06-21
Technische Hinweise
Kolbenkompressor
Piston compressor
Compresseur piston
Technische Hinweise
Anzugsdrehmomente / tightening Torques

Verschleigrenzen / wearing limits
Original 2011-06-21
Sicherheitshinweise fr Schlauchleitungen / Safety

Instructions for Hoses
Montagehinweise fr Schlauchleitungen / flexible hose
installation guidelines
Anzugsdrehmomente
Tightening Torques
Couples de serrage
Typ
L15 - L20 - L35
Zylinderkopf
1. Stufe / 1st Stage / 1re tage
32 Nm
cylinderhead
2. Stufe / 2nd stage / 2me tage
32 Nm
Pleuel
33 Nm
1)
connecting rod
33 Nm
1)
Ventilzentralschraube
19 Nm
valve fitting bolt
10 Nm
culasse de cylindre
bielle
goujon de soupape
Lagerdeckel Kurbelgeh.
crankshaft bearing cover
45 Nm
Original 2011-06-21
couvercle palier/carter
1)
Kurbelzapfen und Gewinde einlen

Oil crank pin and bolts threads
Huilage tourillon de vilebr. et filetage
Stand: 24.09.1999
Verschleigrenzen
Wearing limits
Limites dusure
Durchmesser Zylinder / Zylinderlaufbuchse
diameter cylinder / cylinder liner
diamtre du cylindre / chemise du cylindre
Original 2011-06-21
Kolbenringspaltma
piston ring gap clearance
jeu de joint des segments du piston
von oben nach unten

from top to bottom
de haut en bas
Typ
L15 - L20 - L35
1. Stufe
1st stage
1re tage
94,35 mm
2. Stufe
2nd stage
2me tage
42,3 mm
1. Stufe
1st stage
1 re tage
1,3 mm
1,3 mm
1,0 mm
2. Stufe
2nd stage
2me tage
0,7 mm
0,7 mm
0,7 mm
radiales Lagerspiel Kurbelwellenhauptlager

radial bearing clearence crank shaft main bearing
jeu radial du palier principale de vilebrequin
1)
1)
1)
0,25mm
radiales Lagerspiel Pleuelhauptlager

radial bearing clearence connecting rod main bearing
jeu radial du palier principale de la bielle
1)
1)
1)
0,25 mm
radiales Lagerspiel Pleuelbuchse

radial bearing clearence connecting rod wrist pin bushing
jeu radial de la douille du pied de la bielle
1)
1)
1)
0,10 mm
1) Um das radiale Lagerspiel zu bestimmen, zieht man den gemessenen Zapfendurchmesser vom
gemessenen Lagerdurchmesser ab.
1) In order to find out the radial bearing clearance, subtract the measured journal diameter from the measured
bearing inside diameter.
1) Pour trouver le jeu du palier radial, dduire le diamtre mesur du tourillon du diamtre dalsage mesur
du palier.
Stand: 24.09.1999
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
Note:
No pressure
Original 2011-06-21
High pressure
incorrect
correct
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
1/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
2/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
adaptors.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
3/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
4/4
1 General
in case of failure.

sharp objects!
resp. hose line!
Original 2011-06-21




this period.
date 18.04.2005
Created by Tanz
page 1 of 1
Original 2011-06-21
Ersatzteil-Verzeichnis
List of spare parts
Liste des pices de rechange
Kolbenkompressor
Piston compressor
Compresseur piston
L 15 & L 20
zum Verzeichnis
to the list
vers la liste
Original 2011-06-21
Ersatzteilverzeichnis
List of spare parts
Liste des pices de rechange
Benennung / designation / dsignation
Kompressor L15-L20
Compressor L15-L20
Compresseur L15-L20
Tafel / table / planche
Schnittzeichnung / sectional drawing / plan de coupe

Kurbelgehuse / crank case / carter ................................................................1-1010-010
Kurbelwelle / crankshaft / arbre manivelle ......................................................2-501-010
Schmiersystem / lubricating system / systme de lubrification .....................3-999-010
Fuschiene / support / support ........................................................................4-999-010
Zylinder und Zylinderkopf / cylinder and cylinder head /
cylindre et culasse ...........................................................................................1-1006-020
Ventile / valves / soupapes...............................................................................2-999-020
Kolben / pistons / pistons .................................................................................3-999-020
Original 2011-06-21
Pleuelstangen / connecting rods / bielles ......................................................4-1102-020

Khlsystem / cooling system / systme de refroidissement ..........................1-807-030
Armaturen / fittings / robinetterie .....................................................................1-206-040
Schwungrad und Kupplung / flywheel and coupling /
volant et accouplement ...................................................................................1-999-014
Ansaugsystem / suction system / systme daspiration.................................1-999-032
Starre Lagerung Flanschdurchmesser 250mm / rigid mounting flange
diameter 250mm / fixation rigide diamtre de la bride 250mm......................1-999-045
Starre Lagerung Flanschdurchmesser 300mm / rigid mounting flange
diameter 300mm / fixation rigide diamtre de la bride 300mm......................2-999-045
Elastische Lagerung Motorgre 112 / resilient mounting motor type 112 /
suspension lastique type de moteur 112 .....................................................1-999-046
Elastische Lagerung Motorgre 132 / resilient mounting motor type 132 /
suspension lastique type de moteur 132 .....................................................2-999-046
Anbau ldruckwchter / oil pressure control switch mounted on the
compressor / contrleur dhuile lubrifiante mont sur le compresseur .....1-1100-052
Automatische Entwsserung 1.Stufe / automatic drainage 1st stage /
vidange automatique 1er tage.......................................................................1-303-053
Automatische Entwsserung 2.Stufe / automatic drainage 2nd stage /
vidange automatique 2me tage ...................................................................2-303-053
Stand: 10.10.2006
Original 2011-06-21
Kurbelgehuse
Crank case
Carter
L 15 / L 20
Tafel / Table / Planche
1-1010-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Ident-Nr. / Ident-No.
Benennung / Designation
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
10.10.10.10
Kurbelgehuse
Crank case
Carter
2
10.10.10.20
Kurbelwellenlager
Crankshaft bearing
Pallier darbre-manivelle
3
10.10.10.30
lsaugrohr
Pipe
Tuyaux
4
10.10.10.40
Verschluschraube
Screw plug
Original 2011-06-21
Vis de fermeture
5
10.10.10.50
Verschluschraube
Screw plug
Vis de fermeture
6
10.10.10.60
Verschluschraube
Screw plug
Vis de fermeture
7
10.10.20.10
Gehusedeckel
Housing cover
Couvercle de carter
8
10.10.20.20
Kurbelwellenlager
Crankshaft bearing
Palier darbre-manivelle
9
10.10.30
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
10
10.10.40
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
11
10.10.50
Sicherung
Securing ring
Segment de scurit
Kurbelgehuse
Crank case
Carter
L 15 / L 20
1-1010-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
10.10.60
Wellendichtring
Radial packing ring

Bague dtanchit radiale
13
10.10.70
O-Ring
O-ring
Joint torique
14
10.10.110
lstandsauge
Oil level inspection glass

Verre de regard de niveau dhuile
15
10.10.120
leinfllstutzen
Filler tube for oil
Original 2011-06-21
Tuyau de remplissage dhuile

16
10.10.130
Gegenmutter
Counter nut
Contre-crou
17
10.10.140
Tragsenverschluschraube
Eye bolt/screw plug

Boulon oeillet/vis de fermeture
18
10.10.150
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
19
10.10.160
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
20
10.10.170
Druckfeder
Pressure spring
Ressort de pression
21
10.10.180
Kugel
Ball
Boulet
22
10.10.190
Gewindestift
Threaded pin
Cheville filete
Kurbelgehuse
Crank case
Carter
L 15 / L 20
1-1010-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
23
10.10.200
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
24
10.10.210
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
25
10.10.220
Hutmutter
Cap nut
crou borgne
26
10.10.230
lsaugsieb
Oil suction sieve
Original 2011-06-21
Tamis huile
27
10.10.240
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
28
10.10.250
Schutzblech
Protection plate
Protection
29
10.10.260
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
30
10.10.270
Schutzblech
Protection plate
Protection
Original 2011-06-21
Kurbelwelle
Crank shaft
Arbre manivelle
L 15 / L 20
2-501-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
10.20.10.10
Kurbelwelle
Crank shaft
Arbre manivelle
2
10.20.10.30
Pafeder
Fitting key
Clavette dajustage
3
10.20.10.40
Pafeder
Fitting key
Clavette dajustage
4
10.20.20
Pascheibe
Fitting disc
Original 2011-06-21
Disque dajustage
5
10.20.30
Pascheibe
Fitting disc
Disque dajustage
Original 2011-06-21
Schmiersystem
Lubricating system
Systme de lubrification
L 15 / L 20
3-999-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
10.30.10
lpumpendeckel
Oil pump cover

Couvercle de la pompe huile
2
10.30.20
Wellendichtring
Radial packing ring

Bague dtanchit radiale
3
10.30.30
O-Ring
O-ring
Joint torique
4
10.30.40
lpumpenzahnrad
Gear wheel for oil pump
Original 2011-06-21
Roue dente de la pompe huile

5
10.30.50
lpumpenzahnrad
Gear wheel for oil pump

Roue dente de la pompe huile
6
10.30.60
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
7
10.30.70
Dichtscheibe
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
Original 2011-06-21
Fuschiene
Support
Support
L 15 / L 20
4-999-010
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
10.40.10
Fuschiene
Support
Support
2
10.40.20
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
3
10.40.30
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Original 2011-06-21
Segment de scurit
Original 2011-06-21
Zylinder und Zylinderkopf

Cylinder and cylinder head
Cylindre et culasse
L 15 / L 20
1-1006-020
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
20.10.10
Zylinder 1. Stufe
st
Cylinder 1 stage
Cylindre 1er tage
2
20.10.20
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
3
20.10.30
Zylinderkopf 1. Stufe
st
Cylinder head 1 stage

Culasse 1er tage
4
20.10.40
Zylinder 2. Stufe
Cylinder 2nd stage
Original 2011-06-21
Cylindre 2me tage

5
20.10.50
Zylinderkopf 2. Stufe
Cylinder head 2nd stage

Culasse 2me tage
6
20.10.60
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
7
20.10.70
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
8
20.10.80
Scheibe
Disc
Disque
9
20.10.100
Distanzring (nur bei L15)

Distance ring (for L15 only)
Baque dcartement (seulement pour L15)
Original 2011-06-21
L 15 / L 20
Ventile
Valves
Soupapes

2-999-020
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
20.20.10
Kombiniertes Saug- und Druckventil 1. Stufe
st
Comb. Suction and pressure valve 1 stage

Soupape combine daspiration et de refoulement 1er tage
20.20.10.10
1 Satz Ventilplatten und Federn
1 set of valveplates and springs

1 jeu de disques et ressorts de soupape
3
20.20.10.20
Zylinderstift
Pin
Goupille
4
20.20.20
Kombiniertes Saug- und Druckventil 2. Stufe
Comb. Suction and pressure valve 2nd stage
Original 2011-06-21
Soupape combine daspiration et de refoulement 2me tage
20.20.20.10
1 Satz Ventilplatten und Federn
1 set of valveplates and springs

1 jeu de disques et ressorts de soupape
6
20.20.30
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
7
20.20.40
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
8
20.20.50
Dichtung
Gasket
Joint
Original 2011-06-21
L 15 / L 20
Kolben
Pistons
Pistons

3-999-020
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
20.30.10
Kolben 1. Stufe, komplett
st
Piston 1 stage, complete

Piston 1er etage, compl.
2
20.30.10.10
Kolben
Piston
Piston
3
20.30.10.20
Kolbenbolzen
Wrist pin
Axe du piston
4
20.30.10.30
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Original 2011-06-21
Segment de scurit
5
20.30.10.40
Rechteckring
Piston ring
Segment de piston
6
20.30.10.50
Nasenring
Stepped scraper ring

Segment talon
7
20.30.10.60
Schlauchfederring
Double-bevelled oil control ring

Racleur dhuile
8
20.30.20
Kolben 2. Stufe, komplett
Piston 2nd stage, complete

Piston 2me tage, compl.
9
20.30.20.10
Kolben
Piston
Piston
10
20.30.20.20
Kolbenbolzen
Wrist pin
Axe du piston
11
20.30.20.30
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Segment de scurit
Kolben
Pistons
Pistons
L 15 / L 20
3-999-020
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
20.30.20.40
Nasenring
Stepped scraper ring

Segment talon
13
20.30.20.50
Minutenring
Taper faced compression ring
Original 2011-06-21
Segment compresseur face conique
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Pleuelstangen
Connecting rods
Bielles
L 15 / L 20
4-1102-020
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
20.40.10.10
Pleuelstange 1. Stufe, komplett
st
Connecting rod 1 stage, complete

Bielle 1er tage, compl.
2
20.40.10.20
Pleuellagerschale
Connecting rod bearing

Coussinet de bielle
3
20.40.20.30
Pleuelstange 2. Stufe, komplett
Connecting rod 2nd stage, complete

Bielle 2me tage, compl.
4
20.40.20.30.20
Nadellager
Needle bearing
Original 2011-06-21
Pallier aiguilles
5
20.40.20.20
Pleuellagerschale
Connecting rod bearing
Coussinet de bielle
Original 2011-06-21
Khlsystem
Cooling system
Systme de refroidissement
L 15 / L 20
1-807-030
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
30.10.10
Khler 1. Stufe
st
Cooler 1 stage
Refroidisseur 1er tage
2
30.10.20
Gerade Einschraubverschraubung
Straight male stud coupling

Union simple mle
3
30.10.30
Schwenkverschraubung
Banjo coupling
querre orientable
4
30.10.40
Anschluschraube
Connecting screw
Original 2011-06-21
Raccord
5
30.10.50
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
6
30.10.60
Khler 2 Stufe
Cooler 2nd stage

Refroidisseur 2me tage
7
30.10.70

Union simple mle
8
30.10.80
Luftausla
Compressed air outlet

Sortie air comprim
9
30.10.90
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder head bolt

Vis tte cylindrique
10
30.10.100
Verschluschraube
Screw plug
Vis de fermeture
11
30.10.110
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
Khlsystem
Cooling system
L 15 / L 20
1-807-030
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
30.10.120
Befestigungsschelle
Double clamp
Agrafe double de serrage
13
30.10.130
Halter
Fastener
Support
14
30.10.140
Haltebgel
Double clamp
Agrafe double de serrage
15
30.10.150
Senkschraube
Countersunk head screw
Original 2011-06-21
Vis tte fraise

17
30.10.170
Sicherheitsmutter
Safety nut
crou de blocage
18
30.10.180

Union simple mle
19
30.10.190
Lfterhaube
Air blast housing

Carter du ventilateur
20
30.10.200
Frontplatte
Front cover
Couvercle avant
21
30.10.210
Haubenhalter
Fastening angle
querre de fixation
22
30.10.220
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
23
30.10.230
Scheibe
Disc
Disque
Khlsystem
Cooling system
L 15 / L 20
1-807-030
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
24
30.10.240
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
25
30.10.250
Radiallfterrad
Radial fan wheel

Roue du ventilateur radiale
26
30.10.260
Scheibe
Disc
Disque
27
30.10.270
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Original 2011-06-21
Vis hexagonale
28
30.10.280
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Segment de scurit
29
30.10.290
Schutzschlauch
Protection hose
Tuyau de protection
30
30.10.300
Schutzschlauch
Protection hose
Tuyau de protection
Original 2011-06-21
L 15 / L 20
Armaturen
Fittings
Robinetterie

1-206-040
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
40.10.10
Manometer 1. Stufe
st
Pressure gauge 1 gauge

Manomtre 1er tage
2
40.10.20
Manometer 2. Stufe
Pressure gauge 2nd gauge

Manomtre 2me tage
3
40.10.30
ldruckmanometer
Oil pressure gauge

Manomtre de pression dhuile
4
40.10.40
Manometer-Anschlustck
Coupling for pressure gauge connection
Original 2011-06-21
Raccord pour manomtre

5
40.10.50
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
6
40.10.60
Wika-Dichtring
Wika packing ring

Rondelle de joint Wika
7
40.10.70
Manometerhalter
Pressure gauge holder

Porte-manomtre
8
40.10.80
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
9
40.10.90
Rohr
Pipe
Tuyau
10
40.10.100

Union simple mle
11
40.10.160
Sicherheitsventil 1. Stufe
Safety valve 1st stage
Soupape de sret 1er tage
Armaturen
Fittings
Robinetterie
L 15 / L 20
1-206-040
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
40.10.170
Sicherheitsventil 2. Stufe
Safety valve 2nd stage

Soupape de sret 2me tage
13
40.10.180
Dichtring
Packing ring
Rondelle de joint
14
40.10.190
Einstellbare Winkelverschraubung
Adjustable elbow coupling

querre orientable
15
40.10.200
Original 2011-06-21
Union simple mle

16
40.10.210
Muffenkugelhahn
Ball valve
Robinet boisseau sphrique
17
40.10.110
L-Verschraubung
L- coupling
T mle renvers
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Schwungrad und Kupplung

Flywheel and coupling
Volant et accouplement
L 15 / L 20
1-999-014
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
14.10
Kupplungsteil
Coupling part
Partie daccouplement
2
14.20
Scheibe
Disc
Disque
3
14.30
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
4
14.40
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Original 2011-06-21
Segment de scurit
5
14.50
Schwungrad
Flywheel
Volant
6
14.60
Kupplungsstern
Flexible gear rim
Couronne dente lastique
Original 2011-06-21
Ansaugsystem
Suction system
Systme daspiration
L 15 / L 20
1-999-032
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
32.10
Ansaugfilter komplett
Suction filter complete

Filtre daspiration complet
2
32.20
Schlauch
Hose
Tuyau flexible
3
32.30
Schlauchschelle
Hose clip
Original 2011-06-21
Agrafe de serrage
Original 2011-06-21
Starre Lagerung
Rigid mounting
Fixation rigide
L 15 / L 20
1-999-045
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
45.10
Kompressorfu
Support for compressor

Support pour compresseur
2
45.20
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
3
45.30
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonale
4
45.40
Fuschiene
Support
Original 2011-06-21
Support
5
45.50
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
6
45.60
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
7
45.70
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonale
8
45.80
Zwischenflansch
Intermediate flange
Bride intermdiaire
9
45.90
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder head bolt
Vis tte cylindrique
Original 2011-06-21
Starre Lagerung
Rigid mounting
Fixation rigide
L 15 / L 20
2-999-045
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
45.10
Kompressorfu
Support for compressor

Support pour compresseur
2
45.20
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
3
45.30
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonale
4
45.40
Fuschiene
Support
Original 2011-06-21
Support
5
45.50
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
6
45.60
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
7
45.70
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonale
Original 2011-06-21
Elastische Lagerung
Resilient mounting
Suspension lastique
L 15 / L 20
1-999-046
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
46.10
Platte
Plate
Plaque
2
46.20
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
3
46.30
Schwingmetallelement
Rubber to metall bonded foot

Jointure mtallo-caoutchouc
4
46.40
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Original 2011-06-21
Vis hexagonale
5
46.50
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
6
46.60
Schwingmetallpuffer
Rubber to metal bonded foot

Pied en caoutchouc-mtal
7
46.70
Grundplatte fr Schwingmetallpuffer
Base plate for rubber to metal bonded foot

Platine pour pied en caoutchouc-mtal
8
46.80
Motorfu
Support for electric motor

Support pour moteur lectrique
9
46.90
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
10
46.100
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
11
46.110
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Vis hexagonale
Elastische Lagerung
Resilient mounting
Suspension lastique
L 15 / L 20
1-999-046
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
46.120
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
13
46.130
Zwischenflansch
Intermediate flange
Bride intermdiaire
14
46.140
Zylinderschraube
Cylinder head bolt
Original 2011-06-21
Vis tte cylindrique
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Elastische Lagerung
Resilient mounting
Suspension lastique
L 15 / L 20
2-999-046
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
46.10
Platte
Plate
Plaque
2
46.20
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt

Vis hexagonale
3
46.30
Schwingmetallelement
Rubber to metall bonded foot

Jointure mtallo-caoutchouc
4
46.40
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Original 2011-06-21
Vis hexagonale
5
46.50
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
6
46.60
Schwingmetallpuffer
Rubber to metal bonded foot

Pied en caoutchouc-mtal
7
46.70
Grundplatte fr Schwingmetallpuffer
Base plate for rubber to metal bonded foot

Platine pour pied en caoutchouc-mtal
8
46.80
Motorfu
Support for electric motor

Support pour moteur lectrique
9
46.90
Stiftschraube
Stud bolt
Goujon prisonnier
10
46.100
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
11
46.110
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Vis hexagonale
Elastische Lagerung
Resilient mounting
Suspension lastique

2-999-046
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
12
46.120
Sechskantmutter
Hexagon nut
crou hexagonal
Original 2011-06-21
L 15 / L 20
Original 2011-06-21
Original 2011-06-21
Anbau ldruckwchter
Oil pressure switch mounted on compressor
Contrleur dhuile lubrifiante mont
sur le compresseur
L 15 / L 20
1-1100-052
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
52.10
Rohr
Pipe
Tuyau
2
52.20
Reduzierstutzen
Reducing socket
Raccord de rduction
3
52.30
ldruckwchter
Oil pressure control switch

Contrleur dhuile lubrifiante
4
52.40
Sechskantschraube
Hexagon head bolt
Original 2011-06-21
Vis hexagonale
5
52.50
Sicherungsring
Securing ring
Segment de scurit
6
52.60
Schwenkverschraubung
Banjo coupling
querre orientable
Original 2011-06-21
Automatische Entwsserung 1.Stufe

Automatic drain 1st stage
Vidange automatique 1er tage
L 15 / L 20
1-303-053
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
53.10
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil 1.Stufe
st
2/2-way solenoid valve 1 stage

Soupape lectro-magnetique 2/2 orifices 1er tage
2
53.20
Verschraubung

Union simple mle
3
53.30
Dichtring
Packing ring
Original 2011-06-21
Rondelle de joint
Original 2011-06-21
L 15 / L 20
Automatische Entwsserung 2.Stufe
Automatic drain 2nd stage
Vidange automatique 2me tage

2-303-053
Teil-Nr. / Part-No.
Menge / Qty.
No. de pices
No. didentific
Dsignation
Qt.
53.10
2/2-Wege-Magnetventil 2.Stufe
nd
2/2-way solenoid valve 2 stage
Original 2011-06-21
Soupape lectro-magnetique 2/2 orifices 2me tage
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
FOR COMPRESSORS
Shipyard
Original 2011-06-21
Cosco
Guangdong
Shipyard
Co., Ltd.
Newbuilding
N352
N353
Date
22.12.2010
Our ref.
10.2722
10.2723
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DRAWING No.
Spare part list
Connection diagram compressors V105
344181-44070 1-2
Starter / controller compressor 22-30kW
344182-44070 1-8
Sequence selection box for double compr. control
333392-44070 1-2
Connection diagram compressor L20
344183-44070 1
Starter / controller compressor 5,5-7,5kW
344184-44070 1-8
1/1
Tornescher W eg 5-7
Tel.: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-0

Fax: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-104
info@hatlapa.de
www.hatlapa.de
Geschftsfhrer /
Managing Directors:
Jrg Tollmien
HRA 0499
UST.ID-Nr. DE 134527127
ELECTRICAL SPARE PARTS

FOR COMPRESSORS
Original 2011-06-21
Shipyard
Newbuilding
Date
02.11.2010
Our ref.
Cosco
Guangdong
Shipyard
Co., Ltd.
N352
N353
10.2722
10.2723
ITEM: QUANTITY:
DESCRIPTION:
IDENT No.:
121496
334706
1/1
Tornescher W eg 5-7
Tel.: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-0

Fax: + 49-(0) 4122 / 711-104
info@hatlapa.de
www.hatlapa.de
Geschftsfhrer /
Managing Directors:
Jrg Tollmien
HRA 0499
UST.ID-Nr. DE 134527127

(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-1X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
cable glan 08.12.10

A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
Bearb.
Gepr.
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-1Y1
-1F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 1)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 1)
13
14 15
13-21
6-13
6-13
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM

NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC
Werft-Lieferung
-1Y2
-1F3

Urspr.
1 17
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-1F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 1
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-1M1
Druckluftwchter fr
Fhrungskompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
5 11 12
24V DC
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21



L1 L2 L3
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.

(344182-44070)
NO
NO
NC
26 27
20 21
22 25
-2X1
16-28
H1 H2
16-28
6-13
10
6-13
X1
11 12
17
17
18
13 14 15
16-28
16-28
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu
343260
NO
-2Y1
-2F13
Ers.f
NO
(Klemmenkasten
Kompressor 2)
(TERMINAL BOX
COMPRESSOR 2)
14 15
-2Y2
Ers.d
6-13
6-13
Werft-Lieferung
-2F3
HATLAPA
13
13-21
24V DC
COM
F3W
COM

NC
1 18
220-230V AC
NC
T
WARNING
220-230V AC

Urspr.
1 17
AIR TEMPERATURE
SWITCH
lstands-Wchter
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
-2F4
CONTACTS
SHOWN
WITHOUT
OIL
Datum
1 17
10
F3S
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
50W
SHUTDOWN
MAIN AIR
COMPRESSOR 2
V105
24 kW
24V DC
F13.1
SHUTDOWN
HE1 HE2
F13.2
24V DC
-2M1
24V DC
5 11 12
Druckluftwchter fr
Folgekompressor
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
WARNING
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
X1
5 9 10
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
5 7 8
COMPRESSOR
SELECTION BOX
MAN
0
AUTO
(333392)
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21



L1 L2 L3
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344181-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.
600
210
Amperemeter
AMMETER
P2

Q1
Hauptschalter
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
H2

H2
P2
Q2
S2
TD 200
600
HATLAPA
(BU)
S2

Q1
Gewicht: ca. 50kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 50kg
8
Schutzart: IP54
20
Original 2011-06-21
P1
P1
mit Trfeststeller
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.

ON / OFF:


Original 2011-06-21

mode.
compressor starts.
compressor stops.
in automatic mode.
ALARMS:

compressor on / man



the display.

make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
oil level warning
l-Level Voralarm
low oil level
l-Level Alarm

starten.
gestoppt werden.
anlaufen.
ALARME


EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
software.
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
2sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
5min
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
5min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d

gesprungen werden.
festgelegt.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
11
12
0P
5%
-K1
/8.0
-F3
-T1
440V
-Q1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
-Q4
0,63-1A 2
GV2 RT05
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
/7.9
1
1
-Q2
97 95
-F1
37-50A
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
98 96
Original 2011-06-21
/5.0
75/1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-T2
-P1 75A
+ A
-
/5.0
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
3
1L1
51
61
/8.0 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
9 10
HE1 HE2
Heizung
HEATING
25-100W
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
22-30 kW
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
Hamw_7
16t
17t
18t

14 x Inputs
10 x Outputs Relay
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
7b
8b
9b
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7
/6.0
/6.4
/6.4
/6.5
/6.6
/6.7
/6.8
/6.2
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
OIL LEVEL SW.WARNIN
OIL LEVEL SW.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.SHUTDO
AIR TEMPERAT.WARNIN
SPARE
Reserve
SPARE
Reserve
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
2t
3t
4t
5t
8t
9t
10t
13t
11b
12b
13b
14b
15b
16b
E1.0
E1.1
E1.2
E1.3
E1.4
E1.5
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
REMOTE CONTROL ON
REMOTE CONTROL MANU
REMOTE CONTROL AUTO
14t A1.0
15t A1.1
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
A0.6
A0.7
/8.0
/8.5
/8.7
/8.6
/8.2
/8.3
/8.9
PE
N
L1
17b
18b
-A1
M
Exp. L+
1L
Out 2L
3L
1M
In
2M
1t
7t
12t
1b
10b
0V DC
Supply
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
SPARE
STAR CONTACTOR
DELTA CONACTOR
REMOTE CONTROL ACTI
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
0
/5.9
1L+
9
1L+
-A1
-A1
3b
-A1
5b
E0.1
/5.2
/7.0
7b
E0.3
/5.2
E0.5
/5.2
95
lstands-W. Voralarm
-F1
SPARE
Reserve
/4.2 96
Digital Input
-A1
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
Digital Input
PE
Optional ber
2
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
24V DC
lStandsWchter
OIL
LEVEL
SWITCH
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
SPARE
10
NC
T
PE
/5.2
Reserve
Digital Input
11
12
PE
NC
T
COM
COM
-F3
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
LuftTemp.Wchter
AIR
TEMP.
SWITCH
-F13
Bearb.
Gepr.
E0.6
Digital Input
PE
/5.2
24V DC
F13.1
E0.4
Digital Input
SHUTDOWN
-X1
/5.2

F13.2
Digital Input
-F4
E0.2
F3W

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
8b
WARNING
E0.7
-A1
6b
F3S
/5.2
Digital Input
-A1
4b
WARNING
E0.0
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
9b
SHUTDOWN
-A1
2b
Digital Input
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
0
/6.9
1L+
13
FLOATING CONTACTS
-S2
Vorort-Fern
LOCAL-REMOTE
14
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
13
-A1
-A1
11b
E1.0
/5.2
E1.1
REMOTE CONTROL ON
Fernbedienung ein
Original 2011-06-21
13b
/5.2

Digital Input
E1.2
-K5
-K1
-K4
14 /8.0
14 /8.4
13
/5.2

Digital Input
-X1
13
14 /8.6
-A1
12b
13
Digital Input
14 15 PE
26 27 PE
Fernbedienung aktiv
(NO)
22 25 PE
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
(NC)
MAN
0
AUTO
(NO)
20 21 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
Fernbedienung
REMOTE CONTROL
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
-A1
-A1
Digital Output
NETZSCHTZ
2t
3t
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.3
/5.2
A0.2
5t

Fernbedienung aktiv
/5.2
A0.7
13t
A1
A1
-K4
50A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
Original 2011-06-21
Digital Output
4t
-K1
/5.9
-A1
Digital Output
COOLING WATER VALVE

/5.2
A0.1
-A1
Digital Output
DRAIN VALVES
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digital Output
A1
-K5
INCL. A2
VAR.
INCL. A2
VAR.
1N1
1
3
5
13
21
51
/4.8
61
/4.9
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/7.8
2
4
6
14
22
52
62
/7.9 13
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
/7.7 13
14
Fernbedienung aktiv
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
-X1
17 1
-Y1
PE
17 1
-Y2
Entwsserungsventile
DRAIN VALVES
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
343261
Ers.f
Ers.d
18 1
PE
PE
-Y5
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344182-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
200
VIEW FROM BEHIND:

200
120
Kompressor 1 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 1 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
Schutzart: IP54
200
200
Gewicht: ca. 3kg

WEIGHT: APPR. 3kg
Kompressor 2 =
Fhrungskompressor
COMPRESSOR 2 =
LEADING COMPRESSOR
8,7
20
Original 2011-06-21
3S1
20
3S1
Fhrungswahlschalter






Datum
french
A
texts 23.01.09
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Name
20.02.08
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 1
von 2
Bl.
10
14
-3S1
Original 2011-06-21
Fhrungswahlschalter
-3X1
-1F4
PE
11 13 15
PE
PE
-2F4
PE
C
Datum
20.02.08
Bearb. Bre
Gepr. cpu
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Urspr.
330141
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
333392-44070
Blatt 2
von 2
Bl.

(344184-44070)
NO
NC
29 30
31 32
-X1
W
H1 H2
Brcke !
link !
EMERGENCY AIR
COMPRESSOR L20
6,3 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.
30W
-F4
13 14
19 20
21 22
23 24
-F2
25 26
Brcke !
link !
6-13
6-13
ldruckschalter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Druckluftwchter fr
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
HE1 HE2
24V DC
-M1
24V DC
6-13
11 12
6-13
10
24V DC
6-13
440V 60Hz
440V 60Hz
9-17
Einspeisung
SHIP SUPPLY
Original 2011-06-21
9-17
NO
-F3
6-13
6-13


220-230V AC
L1 L2 L3
-Y4
* Bei
Datum
cable gla.08.12.10
A
sizes
Zust. nderung
Datum
bre
Bearb.
Gepr.
Name
Norm
02.11.10
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342530
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344183-44070
Blatt 1
von 1
Bl.
380
210
P1
P1
Amperemeter
AMMETER
P2

Q1
Hauptschalter
ISOLATING SWITCH
Q2
H2

INDICATING LIGHT
A
H2
P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
600
(BU)
Q1
Gewicht: ca. 30kg
WEIGHT: APPR. 30kg
Schutzart: IP54
8
20
Original 2011-06-21
Q2
mit Trfeststeller
20
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 1
von 8
Bl.
3
P2
Original 2011-06-21
RESET
HATLAPA
SHIFT
black on red
STOP
TD 200
MAN
schwarz auf rot

SIEMENS
STOP
AUTO
schwarz auf
hell-blau
black on
light blue
AUTO
ESC
schwarz auf grn
schwarz auf wei
black on green
black on white
MAN
ENTER
RESET
HATLAPA
dark blue on white
dunkel-blau auf wei
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 2
von 8
Bl.

ON / OFF:


Original 2011-06-21
ALARMS:

compressor on / man


mode.
compressor starts.
compressor stops.
in automatic mode.
the display.

make maintenance !
Wartung fllig !
motor overload
Motor berlast
low oil pressure
Oeldruck-Alarm
no cooling water
kein Khlwasserflu

starten.
gestoppt werden.
anlaufen.
ALARME


EINSTELLUNGEN
SETTINGS:
software.
"ENTER" again.
workings hours
xxxxx h
Betriebsstunden
drainage time
5sec
Entwsserungsdauer
drainage interval
20min
star delta time
4sec
Stern-Dreieck-Zeit
delayed start
0sec
verzgerter Anlauf
cooling water delay
2min
Khlwassernachlauf
continuous time
0min
Durchlaufzeit
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
EIN / AUS
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d

gesprungen werden.
festgelegt.
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 3
von 8
Bl.
7
-F2
2A
1L1
/5.0
11
-K1
3
12
/8.1
/8.9
0P
5%
-F1
220V
250VA
0S
2A
Heizungs-Spannung
HEATING VOLTAGE
97 95
-Q2
98 96
3 Hauptschalter
Heizung
MAIN SWITCH
4 HEATING
Original 2011-06-21
/6.0
9-13A
CLASS 20
-F3
-T1
440V
/5.0
0,63-1A
GV2 RT05
-Q1
1N1
Trafo-Einspeisung
TRANSFORMER SUPPLY
-Q3
20A
-P1
Steuerspannung
CONTROL VOLTAGE
51
61
/8.1 52
62
-K1
X1
-H2
Heizung ein
HEATING ON
220V
X2
SHIP SUPPLY 440V
440V
Zuleitung
H1 H2 PE
PE
60Hz
L1 L2 L3 PE
60Hz
-X1
-M1
HE1 HE2
Kompressor
COMPRESSOR
5,5-7,5 kW
Heizung
HEATING
appr.25-50W
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 4
von 8
Bl.
0
/4.9
/4.9
1L1
1N1
1N1
1L+
+24V DC
/8.0
/6.0
0V DC
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Original 2011-06-21
Softwareversion
TD200_8
E0.0
E0.1
E0.2
E0.3
E0.4
E0.5
E0.6
E0.7

8 x Eingnge
/6.0
/6.2
/6.4
/6.6
/6.8
/7.1
/7.3
/7.5
MOTOR PROTECTION RE
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
AIR TEMPERATURE SWI
COOL.WATER TEMP.SWI
COOL.WATER FLOW SWI
SPARE
SPARE
6 x Ausgnge Relais
2
3
5
6
8
9
A0.0
A0.1
A0.2
A0.3
A0.4
A0.5
/8.1
/8.2
/8.5
/8.6
PE
Vers N
L1
M
Erw L+
1M
2M
Ein
1L
Aus 2L
-A1
MOTOR MAIN CONTACTO

DRAIN VALVES Entws
DISTURBANCE RELAY
COOLING WATER VALVE
star contactor
delta contactor
-P2
TD 200
HATLAPA
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 5
von 8
Bl.
/5.9
1L+
1L+
/7.0
95
-F1
/4.2 96
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
E0.0
/5.2
E0.1

Motorschutzrelais
/5.2
-A1
E0.2
/5.2
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH

Luftdruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

ldruckk-Wchter
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
PE
-A1
E0.3
/5.2
E0.4

Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
/5.2
Digitaler Eingang
PE
-A1
Digitaler Eingang
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
Optional ber
-F4
-F2 P
OPTIONAL VIA
COMPRESSOR
SEQUENCE
fr Auto Start/Stop
AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
FOR AUTO START/STOP
-F3
ldruck-Wchter
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
-F5
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 6
von 8
Bl.
/6.9
1L+
7
E0.5
Original 2011-06-21
-A1
/5.2
E0.6

10 PE
/5.2
-A1
E0.7
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
-X1
-A1
/5.2
SPARE
Reserve
Digitaler Eingang
Digitaler Eingang
11 12 PE
13 14 PE
Option mit Brcke

OPTIONAL WITH LINK
-F6 F
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Datum 02.11.10
Bearb.
Gepr.
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm
Bre
cpu

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 7
von 8
Bl.
1
-A1
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
NETZSCHTZ
/5.2
A0.0
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DISTURBANCE RELAY
Strungs-Kontakt
/5.2
A0.1
/5.2
A0.2
-A1
Digitaler Ausgang
DRAIN VALVES
Digitaler Ausgang
COOLING WATER VALVE
FLOATING CONTACTS
/5.2
A0.3
6
11
-Q1
/4.1 12
A1
A1
-K2
-K1
Original 2011-06-21
18A
A2
INCL.
VAR.
/5.9
13
INCL. A2
VAR.
13
-K1
-K2
14 /8.1
14 /8.5
1N1
1
2
3
4
5
6
13 14
21 22
51 52
/4.8
61 62
/4.9
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
/8.9 13
/4.2
/4.2
/4.2
/8.8
14
Strungskontakt
DISTURBANCE RELAY
-X1
19 20 PE
21 22 PE
23 24 PE
25 26 PE
29 30 PE
Kompressor ein
COMPRESSOR ON
(NO)
-Y1
-Y2
-Y3/4
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Norm

Urspr.
342531
Ers.f
(NC)
Datum 02.11.10
Bre
cpu
STRUNG
DISTURBANCE
-Y5
Bearb.
Gepr.
31 32 PE
Ers.d
HATLAPA
Gruppe :
Ort
D-25436 Uetersen
344184-44070
Blatt 8
von 8
Bl.
Original 2011-06-21
ENGLISH
READ CAREFULLY THIS MANUAL
BEFORE INSTALLING THE MOTOR
RECEIVING CHECK
Check if any damage has occured during
transportation.
Check nameplate data.
Remove shaft locking device (if any) before
operating the motor.
Turn the shaft with the hand to make sure it
is turning freely.
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION

1 - General
Insulation Resistance Check
MOTORS MUST NOT BE LIFTED BY

THE SHAFT, BUT BY THE EYEBOLTS
Original 2011-06-21
In case the motors are stored for more than

two years, the bearings must be replaced or the
lubrication grease must be totally removed after
cleaning.
Single phase motors when kept in stock
for 2 years or more must have their capacitors
replaced (if any).
We recommend to turn the shaft (by hands)
at least once a month, and to measure the
insulation resistance before installing it, in cases
of motors stored for more than 6 months or when
subject to high humidity areas.
If motor is fitted with space heaters, these
should be switched on.
Lifting devices, when supplied, are

designed only to support the motor. If the motor
has two lifting devices then a double chain must
be used to lift it.
Lifting and lowering must be done gently
without any shocks, otherwise the bearings can
get damaged.
DURING TRANSPORTATION,
MOTORS FITTED WITH ROLLER OR
ANGULAR CONTACT BEARINGS
ARE PROTECTED AGAINST
BEARING DAMAGES WITH A
SHAFT LOCKING DEVICE.
THIS LOCKING DEVICE MUST BE
USED ON ANY FURTHER MOTOR
TRANSPORTATION, EVEN WHEN
THIS MEANS TO UNCOUPLE
THE MOTOR FROM THE DRIVEN
MACHINE.
STORAGE
If motors are not immediately installed,
they must be stored in dry places, free of
dust, vibrations, gases, corrosive smokes,
under constant temperature and in normal
position free from other objects.
Motor storage temperature must remain
between 5C to 60C, with relative humidity not
exceeding 50%.
Measure the insulation resistance before

operating the motor and/or when there is any
sign of humidity in the winding.
The resistance measured at 25C must be:
Ri (20 x U) / (1000 + 2P) [M]
(measured with a MEGGER at 500 V d.c.)
where U = voltage (V); P = power (kW).
If the insulation resistance is less than 2
megaohms, the winding must be dried
according to the following:
Warm it up inside an oven at a minimum
temperature of 80C increasing 5C every hour
until 105C, remaining under this temperature
for at least one hour.
Check if the stator insulation resistance
remains constant within the accepted values. If
not, stator must be reimpregnated.
INSTALLATION
1 - Safety
All personnel involved with electrical
installations, either handling, lifting, operation
or maintenance must be well informed and
updated concerning safety standards and
principles that govern the work and carefully
follow them.
We strongly recommend that these jobs
are carried out by qualified personnel.
MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRIC

MOTORS ARE SWITCHED OFF
BEFORE STARTING ANY
MAINTENANCE SERVICE.
Motors must be protected against accidental starts.
When performing any maintenance
service, disconnect the motor from the power
supply. Make sure all accessories have been
switched off and disconnected.
In order to prevent from penetrating dust
and/or water into the terminal box, cable glands
or threaded pipe in the lead holes must be
installed.
Do not change the regulation of the
protecting devices to avoid damaging.
Original 2011-06-21
2 - Operating Conditions
Electric motors, in general, are designed
for operation at an altitude of 1000m above sea
level for an ambient temperature between 0C
and 40C. Any variation is stated on the
nameplate.
COMPARE THE CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
FREQUENCY, SPEED, OUTPUT AND
OTHER VALUES DEMANDED BY THE
APPLICATION WITH THE DATA GIVEN
ON THE NAMEPLATE.
Motors supplied for hazardous locations
must be installed in areas that comply with that
specified on the motor nameplate.
KEEP AIR INLET AND OUTLET FREE
AND CLEAN. THE AIR BLOWN OUT
BY THE MOTOR SHALL NOT ENTER
AGAIN. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN
THE AIR INLET AND THE WALL
MUST BE AROUND OF THE
INLET OPENING DIAMETER.
3 - Foundation
Motors provided with feet must be installed
on solid foundations to avoid excessive
vibrations.
The purchaser is fully responsible for the
foundation.
Metal parts must be painted to avoid
corrosion.
The foundation must be uniform and sufficiently tough to support any schock. It must be
designed in such a way to stop any vibration

originated from resonance.
4 - Drain Holes
Make sure the drains are placed in the
lower part of the motor when the mounting
configuration differs from that specified on the
motor purchase order.
5 - Balancing
THE MOTORS ARE DYNAMICALLY
BALANCED WITH HALF KEY, AT NO
LOAD AND UNCOUPLED.
Transmission elements such as pulleys,
couplings, etc must be dynamically balanced
with half key before installation.
Use always appropriate tools for installation and
removal.
6 - Alignment
ALIGN THE SHAFT ENDS AND
USE FLEXIBLE COUPLING,
WHENEVER POSSIBLE.
Ensure that the motor mounting devices
do not allow modifications on the alignment and
further damages to the bearings.
When assembling a half-coupling, be sure
to use suitable equipment and tools to protect
the bearings.
Suitable assembly of half-coupling:
Check that clearance Y is less than
0.05 mm and that the difference X1 to X2 is less
than 0.05 mm, as well.
Note: Dimension X1 and X2 must be

3mm minimum
Figure and alignment tolerances
7 - Belt Drive
When using pulley or belt coupling, the
following must be observed:
Belts must be tighten just enough to avoid
slippage when running, according to the
specifications stated on the belt supplier

recommendation.
WARNING:
Excessive tension on the pulleys will
damage the bearings and lead to a
probable shaft rupture.
8 - Connection
WARNING:
Voltage may be connected at standstill
inside the terminal box for heating elements or
direct winding heating.
WARNING:
The capacitor on single-phase motors
can retain a charge which appears across the
motor terminals, even when the motor has
reached standstill.
Original 2011-06-21
A WRONG CONNECTION CAN

BURN THE MOTOR.
Voltage and connection are indicated on
the nameplate. The acceptable voltage
variation is 10%; the acceptable frequency
variation is 5% and the total acceptable
variation is 10%.
9 - Starting Methods
The motor is rather started through direct
starting. In case this is not possible, use
compatible methods to the motor load and
voltage.
The rotation direction is clockwise if the
motor is viewed from DE side and if the
phases are connected according to the
sequence L1, L2, L3.
To change the rotation direction, interchange two of the connecting leads.
THE CONNECTION TO THE POWER
SUPPLY MUST BE DONE BY
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND WITH
FULL ATTENTION TO ASSURE A SAFE
AND PERMANENT CONNECTION.
AFTER CONNECTING THE MOTOR,
CHECK FOR ANY STRANGE BODY
INSIDE THE TERMINAL BOX. THE
CABLE INLETS NOT IN USE MUST BE
CLOSED.
Make sure to use the correct cable

dimension, based on the rated current stamped
on the motor nameplate.
BEFORE ENERGIZING THE
TERMINALS, CHECK IF THE
GROUNDING IS MADE
ACCORDING TO THE CURRENT
STANDARDS. THIS IS ESSENTIAL
AGAINST ACCIDENT RISKS.
When the motor is supplied with
protective or monitor temperature device such
as thermostats, thermistors, termal protector, etc,
connect their terminals to the corresponding
devices on the control panel.
10 - Start-Up
THE KEY MUST BE FASTENED OR
REMOVED BEFORE STARTING THE
MOTOR.
a) The motor must start and operate
smoothly. In case this does not occur, turn it off
and check the connections and the mounting
before starting it again.
b) If there is excessive vibration, check if
the fastening screws are correctly fastened.
Check also if the vibration comes from a
neighbour machine. Periodical vibration checks
must be done.
c) Run the motor under rated load for a
short period of time and compare if the running
current is equal to that stamped on the
nameplate.
MAINTENANCE
WARNING:
SAFETY CHECK LIST
1 - General Inspection
Check the motor periodically.
Keep the motor clean and assure free air flow.
Check the seals or V Ring and replace them, if
required.
Check the connections as well as supporting
screws.
Check the bearings and observe: Any excessive
noise, vibration, bearing temperature and grease
condition.
When a change, under normal conditions, is
detected, check the motor and replace the
required parts.
The frequency of the inspections depends

on the motor type and on the application
conditions.
LUBRICATION
FOLLOW THE REGREASING
INTERVALS. THIS IS FUNDAMENTAL
FOR PROPER MOTOR OPERATION.
1 - Machines without Grease Nipples
Motors up to frame 200 are normally fitted
without grease nipples. In these cases the
regreasing shall be done at the preventive
maintenance job observing the following
aspects:
Disassemble carefully the motors.
Take all the grease out.
Wash the bearing with querosene or diesel.
Regrease the bearing immediately.
2 - Machines Fitted with Grease Nipples

It is strongly recommended to grease the
machine while running. This allows the grease
renewal in the bearing housing. When this is
not possible due to turning parts by the grease
device (pulleys, bushing, etc) that offer some
risk to the physical integrity of the operator,
proceed as follows:
Clean the area near the grease nipple.
Put approximately half of the total grease and
run the motor for 1 minute at full speed.
Then turn off the motor and insert the rest of the
grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor in
standstill can make the grease penetrate into the
motor, through the inner seal of the bearing
housing.
FOR LUBRICATION USE ONLY
MANUAL GREASE GUN.
Original 2011-06-21
RELUBRICATION INTERVALS
TABLE 1 - BALL BEARINGS - Series 62/63
II pole

IV pole
VI pole
Bearing
6209
6211
6212
60Hz
18400
14200
12100
50Hz
20000
16500
14400
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
Bearing
6309
6311
6312
6314
6316
6319
6322
60Hz
15700
11500
9800
3600
-
50Hz
18100
13700
11900
4500
-
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
9700
8500
7000
5100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
11600
10400
9000
7200
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
14200
12800
11000
9200
Serie 62
VIII pole
50Hz
60Hz
20000 20000
20000 20000
20000 20000
Serie 63
50Hz
60Hz
20000 20000
20000 20000
20000 20000
16400 17300
14900 15900
13000 14000
10800 11800
X pole
XII pole
Grease
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
(g)
9
11
13
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
19700
18700
17400
15100
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
19700
18700
17400
15100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
18600
15500
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
18600
15500
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
19300
(g)
13
18
21
27
34
45
60
TABLE 2 - ROLLER BEARINGS - Series NU 3

II pole
Bearing
NU 309
NU 311
NU 312
NU 314
NU 316
NU 319
NU 322
NU 324
60Hz
9800
6400
5100
1600
-
50Hz
13300
9200
7600
2500
-
IV pole
60Hz
20000
19100
17200
7100
6000
4700
3300
2400
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
8900
7600
6000
4400
3500
VI pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
11000
9500
7600
5900
5000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
13100
11600
9800
7800
6600
VIII pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
15100
13800
12200
10700
10000
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
16900
15500
13700
11500
10200
X pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
16900
15500
13700
11500
10200
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
19300
17800
15700
13400
12100
XII pole
60Hz
20000
20000
20000
19300
17800
15700
13400
12100
50Hz
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
17300
15000
Grease
(g)
13
18
21
27
34
45
60
72
Note:
The ZZ bearings from 6201 to 6307 do not
require relubrication as its life time is about
20,000 hours.
Tables 1 and 2 are intended for the lubrication
period under bearing temperature of 70C (for
bearings up to 6312 and NU 312) and
temperature of 85C (for bearings 6314 and NU
314 and larger).
For each 15C of temperature rise, the
relubrication period is reduced by half.
The relubrication periods given above are
for those cases applying Polyrex EM grease.
When motors are used on the vertical
position, their relubrication interval is reduced
by half if compared to horizontal position
motors.
WE RECOMENDED TO USE BALL
BEARINGS FOR MOTORS DIRECTLY
COUPLED TO THE LOAD.
Original 2011-06-21
WARNING:
EXCESS OF GREACE CAN CAUSE
BEARNING OVERHEATING
RESULTING IN COMPLETE
DAMARGE.
Compatibility of Polyrex EM grease with
other types of grease:
Containing polyurea thickener and mineral
oil, the Polyrex EM grease is compatible with
other types of grease that contain:
Lithium base or complex of lithium or polyurea
and highly refined mineral oil.
Inhibitor additive against corrosion, rust and
anti-oxidant additive.
Notes:
Although Polyrex EM is compatible with types
of grease given above, we do not recommended
to mix it with any other greases.
If you intend to use a type of grease different
than those recommended above , first contact
HATLAPA.
On applications (with high or low temperatures,
speed variation, etc), the type of grease and
relubrification interval are given on an additional
nameplate attached to the motor.
THE USE OF STANDARD MOTORS
IN SPECIFIC AREAS OR SPECIAL
APPLICATIONS MUST BE DONE BY
CONSULT TO THE GREASE
MANUFACTURER OR HATLAPA
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Disassembly and assembly must be done
by qualified personnel using only suitable tools
and appropriated methods.
The stator grips must be applied over the

side face of the inner ring to be disassembled or
over an adjacent part.
It is essential that bearings assembly be
done under cleanning conditions to ensure
good operation and to avoid damages. New
bearings shall only be taken out from their cases
when assembling them.
Before installing a new bearing it is
required to check the shaft fitting for any sharp
edge or strike signals.
For bearing assembly warm their inner
parts withsuitable equipment - inductive pocess
- or use suitable tools.
SPARE PARTS
When ordering spare parts, please specify
the full type designation and product code as
stated on the motor nameplate. Please also
inform the motor serial number stated on the
nameplate.
MOTORS FOR HAZARDOUS

LOCATIONS
Besides the recommendations given
previously, these ones must be also followed:
THE SPECIFICATION OF THE MOTOR
INSTALLATION PLACE IS FOR
CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY,
WHO WILL ALSO DETERMINE THE
ENVIRONMENT CHARACTERISTICS.
Motors for hazardous locations are
manufactured according to specific standards
for such environments and they are certified by
worldwide certifying entities.
1 - Installation
The complete installation must follow
procedures given by the local legislation in effect.
THE INSTALLATION OF HAZARDOUS
LOCATION MOTORS MUST BE
CARRIED OUT BY SKILLED PEOPLE,
AND THE THERMAL PROTECTION
MUST BE ALWAYS INSTALLED,
EITHER INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE
MOTOR, OPERATING AT THE RATED
CURRENT.
2 - Maintenance
Maintenance must be carried out by repair
shops authorized by HATLAPA.
Repair shops and people without HATLAPAs
authorization who will perform any service on
hazardous location motors will be fully
responsible for such service as well as for any
consequential damage.
ANY ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL

MODIFICATION MADE ON
HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTORS
WILL VOID THE CERTIFICATION.
When performing maintenance,
installation or relubrication, follow these
instructions:
Check if all components are free of edges,
knocks or dirt.
Make sure all parts are in perfect conditions.
Lubricate the surfaces of the endshield fittings
with protective oil to make the assembly easier.
Use only rubber hammer to fit the parts.
Check for correct bolts tightening.
Use clearance calibrator for correct T-box fitting
(smaller than 0.05mm).
DO NOT REUSE DAMAGED OR
WORN PARTS. REPLACE THEM BY
NEW ONES SUPPLIED BY THE
FACTORY.
Original 2011-06-21
MOTORS DRIVEN BY VFD

Applications using VFDs without filter
can affect motor performance as follows:
Lower efficiency.
Higher vibration.
Higher noise level.
Higher rated current.
Higher temperature rise.
Reduced motor insulation.
Reduced bearing life.
1- Standard Motors
Voltages lower than 440V do not require filter.
Voltages equal or higher than 440V or lower
than 575V require filter for motor power supply
cables longer than 20 meters.
Voltages equal or higher than 575V require
filter for any size of power supply cables.
IF SUCH RECOMMENDATIONS ARE
NOT FOLLOWED ACCORDINGLY,
MOTOR WARRANTY WILL BE VOID.
2- Inverter Duty Motors:
Check power supply voltage of the forced
cooling set.
Filters are not required.
for HATLAPA W- and L-type
Piston Compressors
175694
Rev. 01.06
1. General
the compressor.
Original 2011-06-21

viscosity at 100 C: min. 9.4 cSt max. 15 cSt
deposits on valves and pipelines. HATLAPA recommends to use mineral oils of class VDL
according to DIN 51 506.
The use of synthetic oils is not recommended for HATLAPA W- and L-type compressors.
3. Guarantee
The following mineral oils are examples which comply with the above specification:
ARAL
MOTANOL HE100
BP
ENERGOL RC100
CASTROL
AIRCOL PD100
COMPRESSOR OIL EP VDL100
DACNIS P100
EXXCOLUB 100
RARUS 427
SHELL
CORENA P100
specification.
Service


Original 2011-06-21



siguintes datos:


Naval e
Service

anliegender Liste.
directly
Original 2011-06-21



Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Headquarters:

Tornescher Weg 5-7
25436 Uetersen
GERMANY
Phone: +49 4122 711-0
Mobile: +49 172 9 813292
Fax:
+49 4122 711-104 Sales
711-330 Service
Original 2011-06-21

UNITED KINGDOM
Phone: +44 1202 8531-80
Fax: +44 1202 8531-91 Sales
8531-90 Spares

o Australia

Tel: +61 3 953213-97 / 953213-86

Fax: +61 3 953214-13
x Belgium
Marine & Industrie

B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 82740-91

Fax: +32 3 82740-95
mardus@skynet.be
o Belgium/
Luxembourg
Service Hydro n.v.

B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 54640-80

Fax: +32 3 54640-81
x Brazil

Rua Visc Inhama
RJ, 20091-007
Tel: +55 21 2233-1489

Cell: +55 21 9983-3190
Fax: +55 21 2516-7543
o Brazil

Tel: +55 13 322646-86

Fax: +55 13 322646-80
Page 1
Original 2011-06-21
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
x Bulgaria
Ecatdan ApS
1, Studentska Str.
9010 Varna
Tel: +359 52 383476

xo Canada

29-113 Cushman Rd
St. Catherines
Ontario, L2M 6S9
Tel: +1 905 688 4922 (office)

Fax: +1 905 688 9028
Cell: +1 905 650 3160
o Chile
Eurotecnica Ltda
Lincoyn # 973
4030485 Conception
Tel: +56 41 22532-75

Fax: +56 41 22532-76
x+ China

Nanjing 210039
Tel: +86 25 52 26 27 90
Fax: +86 25 86 70 33 10
x China

Shanghai 200060
Tel:
+86 21 623296-71
Mobile: +86 137 0 17473 14
Fax:
+86 21 623039-71
xo Croatia

Planciceva 4
21000 Split
Tel: +385 21 385267

Fax: +385 21 385267
mirko.nava@inet.hr
x Cyprus
M.I.E. Services Ltd

The Hawk Building
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 889801

Fax: +357 25 763902
info@mieserv.cy.net
x Cyprus
HATLAPA EastMed Ltd

The Hawk Building
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 8897-00

Fax: +357 25 3660-88
x Denmark
A/S Kelvin Hughes

Gngehusvej 280
DK-2970 Horsholm
Tel:
+45 8734 2270
Mobile: +45 2060 9405
Fax:
+45 8611 2726
x Egypt

Tel: +20 3 58585-70

Fax: +20 3 58285-87
a.alyan@amcoeg.com
x Finland

Permiehenkatu 11
20810 Turku
Tel: +358 2 2749640

Fax: +358 2 2351499
info@epomare.fi
x France
Wenex Equipments SA
92100 Boulogne
Tel: +33 1 411023-30

Fax: +33 1 411023-45
o Germany
Friedrich Jung Fa.

Tel: +49 203 82898

Fax: +49 203 57085-24
Page 2
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
47119 Duisburg
xo Great Britain

Tel: +44 1202 8531-80

Fax:+44 1202 8531-90
info@hatlapa-uk.com
xo Greece
M.I.E. Co. Ltd.

Kanari 1
18537 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4598-800

Fax: +30 210 4539-234
commercial@mie.gr
o Greece

18863 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4323600/1-2

Fax: +30 210 43127-70
info@injegov.gr
xo India
Dolphin Consultants
35 Mittal Chambers
Mumbai 400021
Tel: +91 22 302877-11 to 15 (5 Lines)

Fax:+91 22 302877-10
info@dolphinc.in
xo Indonesia

Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
+ Indonesia

Jakarta 12160
Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
xo Iran
Iran IMEXEN Co.

Tehran 19668
Tel: +98 21 22000008

Fax: +98 21 22004849
info@imexen.com
xo Italy
RTN Srl
Loc. C Verde
Tel: +39 0523 869611

Fax: +39 0523 861077
info@retenav.it
xo Korea
Dong Sung Co.

Tel: +82 51 61012-33

Fax: +82 51 61012-32
xo Korea

1212, Jisa-dong
Gangseo-gu, Busan
Tel: +82 51 97292-66

Fax: +82 51 97292-70
x Lebanon

The Hawk Building
Tel: +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
x Middle East
Tel: +357 25 366077

Fax.:+357 25 366088
for steering gear

Bahrain, Kuwait,
Page 3
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
Jordan, Israel
xo Netherlands
Hamworthy KSE B.V.

Aploniastraat 33
3084 CC Rotterdam
Tel: +31 10 46247-77

Fax.: +31 10 41590-46
xo Norway

0117 Oslo
Tel: +47-918-08-546
xo Poland

Mostnika Str.10-12
70-672 Szczecin
Tel: +48 91 4623236 / 4623383

Fax: +48 91 4623345
xo Portugal

28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

x Romania
XEREX SRL
Tel/Fax: +40 236 462056

Mobile: +40 723 533596
ilniczky@yahoo.com
x Singapore

Tel:
+65 65 628086 / 628088
Mobile: +65 96 339381
Fax: +65 65 628099
info@hatlapa.com.sg
xo Spain

28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

xo Sweden
Bvik Marin AB
Hlleflundregatan 12
Tel: +46 31 290075

info@bovikmarin.se
x Syria

Tel : +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
x Taiwan
SHIPCARE Co. Ltd.

Taipei 10036
Tel: +886 2 2383-2255

Fax: +886 2 2383-1020
x U.S.A.
MarinSOLVE LLC
PO Box 2176
Clifton, NJ 07015
Tel: +1 973 24657 26

Fax: +1 973 75503 33
x U.S.A.
CS Controls
101 Dickson Road
Houma, LA 70363
Tel: +1 985 876 6040

Fax: +1 985 876 0751
x U.S.A.
Mariner Hub LLC

Houston, TX 77008
Tel: +1 713 822 1252

Page 4
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
TENAVAL
2, Piso Ofic 2-B
Caracas
Original 2011-06-21
x Venezuela
Page 5
Tel: +58 212 285-2344

+58 212 285-7822
+58 212 285-7631
Fax: +58 212 285-7776
Screw Compressors
for
Screw Compressors Type HSC 11
of
Original 2011-06-21
GmbH & Co. KG
25436 UETERSEN
GERMANY
Phone: +49-4122-711 0..
Telefax: +49-4122-711 330
Ref.-No.:
10.2722 / 3
Serial-No.:
10.2722 - 3 - 0
operator
Screw Compressors
Original 2011-06-21
Table of Contents
1
Spare Parts List
E- Diagrams
Service
Original 2011-06-21

Copyright ................................................................................................................................................. 3
Guarantee................................................................................................................................................ 3
Designations ............................................................................................................................................ 4
Signs Used .............................................................................................................................................. 5
Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................... 5

Original 2011-06-21

16 Waste Disposal...................................................................................................................................... 10
2 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
at all times.
2 Copyright
Original 2011-06-21
3 Guarantee
Techen, Kerstin

26.11.2009
3 / 10
4 Designations
Original 2011-06-21
4 / 10

26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
5 Signs Used
Sign for Danger
Danger!
Sign for Caution
Caution!

Pay Attention!
Original 2011-06-21

Information!
6 Intended Use

Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
5 / 10

Original 2011-06-21
9 Safety Equipment
Danger!
operated.
secured.

Caution!
6 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin

Danger!

Danger!
Original 2011-06-21
Deadly voltage!

Danger!
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
7 / 10

Danger!
personnel.
documentation.
Original 2011-06-21

housing!
Caution!
8 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin

Danger!
Original 2011-06-21

approx. 2 hours!
Caution!
of dirt.
compressor.
Techen, Kerstin
26.11.2009
9 / 10
15 Noise Protection
Caution!
operation.
16 Waste Disposal
Original 2011-06-21
10 / 10
26.11.2009
Techen, Kerstin
Final Drawings
Original 2011-06-21
for
1x WORKING AIR COMMPRESSOR HSC 11
2011-06-21
1/1
INDEX
DRAWING No.
TITLE
SECTION 1
................................................ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
................................................ TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 2
177572.................................... GENERAL ARRANGEMENT HSC11 7 BAR
177470.................................... INTERNAL VIEW
178025.................................... PIPING DIAGRAM
................................................ OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
177934.................................... FLEXIBLE HOSE FOR COMPRESSED AIR AND DRAINAGE
178483.................................... FLEXIBLE HOSE INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
177469.................................... LUBRICATING INSTRUCTIONS
................................................ CONNECTION DIAGRAM
SECTION 3
177469.................................... SPARE PART LIST
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 1
Our Ref. 10.2722/3K
WORKINGAIR COMPRESSOR
1 x SCREW COMPRESSOR T y p e HSC 11
Original 2011-06-21
fully automatic belt-driven screw compressor, built as compact unit, noise-protected and ready
to connect, air cooled
F.A.D. compressed from 0-7 bar
(20C, 1,013 bar)
Operating pressure
Max. pressure
Min. pressure
Power consumption approx.
Voltage
Residual oil content
Cooling air flow
Compressed air delivery connection
Ambient temperature (min./max.)
Length x width x height
Noise level acc. to DIN 46653
105
m/h (+/-5%)
7
bar
7,5
bar
5
bar
11
kW
440V/ 60 Hz
2-4
mg/m
36,6 m/min
1
+3/+45 C
805 x 695 x 1170
mm
71 (66)
dB(A)
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Compressor
HSC Screw Compressors are belt-driven by a marine type motor, protection IP 54, with PTCresistor and insulation class F. This facilitates smooth starting, absorbing the ensuing starting
torques effectively.
All components built on base frame (designed as oil pan) completely piped and wired, ready
for installation, including:
Air intake filter
Compact aluminium after cooler
Compression unit of robust design with low circumference speed and long life time
Fixed internal pipe connections
Oil level indication
With air receiver (with oil plug) and integrated oil filtration unit for 3-step oil separation to guarantee the above oil content.
Air outlet with external oil and water separator, automatic mechanical drainage valve
level control and flexible hose
Air-end with High-Tech Profile

Modern, asymmetric profile as well as operation within a range of revolutions offering highest
specific efficiency factor that means you get more air with less energy compared to conventional profiles.
Original 2011-06-21
Microprocessor Control Unit

HSC screw compressors are equipped as standard with an integrated microprocessor control
system, unifying simplest operation with extraordinary performance features. All settings can
be made conveniently on a control panel. Thanks to the modern microprocessor-based control
unit operating costs are minimized.
Numerous operating modes allow an optimum adjustment to the existing conditions:
An integrated diagnostic system monitors all safety-relevant operating parameters
System self-test before each start
Service indicator to notify when maintenance work is due
Automatic start-up after power failure
Reaching final pressure control system calculates the actual follow-up time. This saves
up to 60% of energy cost during idle operation
The pressure sensor ensures precise operation in the adjusted pressure range (up to 0.2
bar difference)
The motor only runs when necessary in automatic mode
Galvanic isolated contacts for possible connection to a master control system/ remote
control
Switchable remote and local operation
Alarm indication for high lub oil temperature and high discharge air temperature
Potential free contacts for connection to ships alarm system
Compressor resiliently mounted

Final coating shade: Munsell 7.5 BG 7/2 (blue green)
TESTING: works certificate
1 set of spare parts consisting of:
- 1 oil filter
- 1 air filter
- 1 fine filter
- 1 set of belts
1 additional set of air filter for compressor for SYs purpose
Hatlapa Screw Compressor

Model: HSC 11
Belt-driven screw compressor built as compact unit, noise-protected and ready to
connect, fully automatic control air cooled
Compressor
HSC Screw Compressors are belt-driven. This facilitates smooth starting, absorbing
the ensuing starting torques effectively.
Air intake filter
Compact aluminium after cooler
Compression unit of robust design with low circumference speed and long life time
Fixed internal pipe connections
Air-end with High-Tech Profile
Modern, asymmetric profile as well as operation within a range of revolutions offering
highest specific efficiency factor that means you get more air with less energy
compared to conventional profiles.
Compressed air passes air receiver (with oil plug) and integrated oil filtration unit for
3-step oil separation to guarantee the above oil content.
Air outlet with external oil and water separator, automatic mechanical drainage valve
level control and flexible hose (with DIN flange)
Original 2011-06-21
Microprocessor Control Unit

HSC screw compressors are equipped as a standard with an integrated
microprocessor control system, unifying the simplest operation with extraordinary
performance features. All settings can be made conveniently on a control panel.
Numerous operating modes allow an optimum adjustment to the existing conditions:
An integrated diagnostic system monitors all safety-relevant operating
parameters
System self-test before each start
Service message indicates outstanding when maintenance work,
Automatic start-up after power failures
Reaching final pressure control system calculates the actual follow-up time. This
saves up to 60% of energy cost during idle operation
The pressure sensor ensures precise operation in the adjusted pressure range
(up to 0.2 bar difference)
The motor only runs when necessary in automatic mode
Galvanic isolated contacts make possible connection to a master control system
Switchable remote and local operation
Alarm indication for high lub oil temperature and high discharge air temperature
Potential free contacts for connection to ships alarm system
HSC_11_10
Motor IP 54, PTC-resistor and F-coiling offer complete control of the unit. Thanks to
the modern microprocessor-based control unit operating costs are minimized.
All components built on base frame (designed as oil pan) completely piped and
wired, ready for installation. No special foundation is required.
HATLAPA
GmbH & Co.
Tornescher Weg 5 7,
25436 Uetersen
Telefon: ++49 4122 711- 0
Telefax: ++49 4122 711 - 104
eMail info@hatlapa.de
Internet www.hatlapa.de
Hatlapa Screw Compressor

Model: HSC 11
Technical Data Sheet:
Flow Capacity 0-7,5 bar
Max. operating pressure
Min. operating pressure
Motor power at shaft
Idle capacity requirement
Oil contents
Residual oil contents
Cooling air flow
Noise level acc. to DIN 46653
Ambient temperature (min./max.)
Motor Power
Motor revolutions
Voltage (option)
Frequency (option)
Protection Mode
Insulation Class
Mode of construction
105
7.5
5
11
2,8
6
2-4
2200
71
+3 /+45
Electric Motor acc. to IEC standard

11
3000
380
50
IP 54
F
B3/B5
m3/h
bar
bar
kW
kW
l
mg/m3
m3/h
dB(A)
C
kW
min-1
V
Hz
Dimensions
Original 2011-06-21
Connection
Length x Bright x Height
Weight
1"
805 x 695 x 1170
334
i
mm
kg
HSC_11_10
Hatlapa Screw Compressor (opened)
HATLAPA
GmbH & Co.
Tornescher Weg 5 7,
25436 Uetersen
Telefon: ++49 4122 711- 0
Telefax: ++49 4122 711 - 104
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 2
10 .=
071-
L
o
,.1,. cNi
1_LL.
ro
co CU
u)
GJ
i_
0_ 1(1
co _
(N
ro r \o
0 Li)
\o
U o
O
E
rs
ro P
E
0 H7
GJ
U . 5
Ci)
_c,C
N,
/1
1)
cr)
j7
In
099
09/
O
1_1-1
D-25436 Uetersen
2.4
0
En
117
CU
LJ
U)
rD
rI7
10
'Sc hdzve rmerk nach DIN 34 heac h[en'
O
CO
O
CD
O
O
U
ro
ro
\J
L_D
cu
C
ro
U
0 0 9 11 ! w
0
U
S6
SZS
565
000
oD
O
J!E builooD
.
.......... .
- . __
CO
ro
S9Z
O
O
cn
C
O
0
U
co n de nsa te
with au to ma tic dra in
Original 2011-06-21
ru
HATLAPA Screw Compressor

Internal view
177470
Original 2011-06-21
Equipment with V belt drive (example)
Equipment with direct drive (example)

1
2
3
4
5
6
8
10
14
15
Condenser
Separator tank
Separator cartridge
Electric motor
Fan wheel valve
Operational controls
Proportional controller(option)
Rating plate
Drainage pipe
Pressure control device
02.12.2002
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Safety valve
Switch box
Oil temperature regulator
Electricity supply cable
Oil and condensate drain valve
Boiler plate
Oil filler neck
Pulley for V belt
Drainage coil regulator
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Intake regulator
Control valve
Relief valve
Intake filter
Oil filter
Compressed air outlet with cut-off
Aftercooler
Oil cooler
Super noise cover
Original 2011-06-21
Operational description of
HATLAPA screw compressors HSC
Basic air delivery:
The screw compression stage (3) sucks in air through the suction filter (1), if the suction valve (2)
is open. During the compression inside the screw compression stage (3) the air is mixed with an
extensive amount of oil.
The air and oil mixture flows through the air pressure pipe (4) to the primary cyclone (5) and then
into the compressed air and oil reservoir (6).
Most of the oil remains in the reservoir (6) and only a small content reaches the oil fine filter (7).
After this filtration the oil content is minimized to 2-4 mg/m.
The compressed air passes through the minimum pressure valve (8) to the compressed air
cooler (9).
Original 2011-06-21
Oil circuit:
Due to the pressure inside the oil and air reservoir (6) the oil is pressed back to the suction side of
the screw compression stage (3), passing through an oil filter (12).
The thermostatic valve (11) switches to its open position when the oil has reached its working
temperature. The temperature is held constant by regulating an oil flow through the largely
designed oil cooler (10).
The small amount of oil filtered from the compressed air inside of the oil fine filter (7) is sucked
back into the screw compression stage (3) through the oil drainage line (17). The throttle (19) is
installed to avoid a short circuit of the compressed air. The check valve (18) prevents oil being
pressed back into the fine filter (7) from the compression stage when the compressor is shut off.
Control and monitoring:
The minimum and maximum network pressures are adjusted by setting the respective values of
the electronic control system PROCON. The network pressure signal is taken from the pressure
sensor (20) and is indicated under usual running conditions on the display.
Furthermore the display of the PROCON indicates the temperature of the oil and air mixture
inside of the oil and air reservoir (6). The temperature is taken from the sensor (21) which is
installed behind the screw compression stage (3) or directly in the air/oil reservoir (6). If more than
105 C are reached the PROCON will show an alarm, after reaching 110 C the compressor will
trip.
In the unlikely case that the internal pressure becomes too high the safety valve (22) will protect
the system by blowing off the air.
For correct operation of the screw compression stage (3), of the oil flow and of the control valves
there has to be a minimum pressure inside the system between screw compression stage (3) and
minimum pressure valve (8). The minimum pressure valve (8) opens at approx. 4 bar(g).
If the final pressure in the network is reached the PROCON will switch the solenoid valve (15) into
the drawn position, as indicated in the piping diagram. This results in an open relief valve (14) and
a closed suction valve (2), as shown in the piping diagram. The compressor will continue idle
running for a certain period of time, as programmed in the PROCON (approx. 2 to 5 min.), without
delivering compressed air to the network. To hold the minimum system pressure there is a small
throttle inside of the suction valve (2), still allowing a small amount of air to be sucked in. The
same amount of air is flowing to the suction line through the relief valve (14).
If the minimum network pressure is not reached within the programmed time the PROCON stops
the compressor. The internal pipings are made pressureless by the opened relief valve (14) up
to the minimum pressure valve (8) with check-valve.
If the network pressure is falling under the minimum value the PROCON will switch the solenoid
valve (15) which results in an open suction valve (2) and a closed relief valve (14). The
compressor will then start delivering its full amount of air into the network.
21.06.2005
Original 2011-06-21
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
Note:
No pressure
Original 2011-06-21
High pressure
incorrect
correct
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
1/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
2/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
incorrect
correct
adaptors.
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
3/4
178483
FLEXIBLE HOSE
incorrect
correct
Original 2011-06-21
16.01.2006
122/Pitrowski
4/4
1 General
in case of failure.

sharp objects!
resp. hose line!
Original 2011-06-21




this period.
date 18.04.2005
Created by Tanz
page 1 of 1
for HATLAPA HSC
Screw Compressors
177469
Rev. 08.10
1. General
Moving parts require the correct lubricant. Good quality lubrication oils increase the service life
of the compressor.

Above all, compressor oils must have good lubrication properties for which their viscosity is
highly important. HATLAPA recommends lubrication oils within the following range:
ambient temperature
0 .. +25 C
constantly over 25 C
(engine room of sea going ships)
Original 2011-06-21
viscosity class
ISO VG 46
ISO VG 68
2
viscosity at 40C
41 .. 51 mm /s
61 .. 75 mm /s
flash point
> 200 C
> 200 C
pourpoint
at least 5 C under the lowest

ambient temperature
The screw compressor oils should have low tendency to ageing and foaming.
3. Guarantee
BP
ENERSYN RC-S 68
CASTROL
AIRCOL SR-68
CETUS PAO 68
BARELF SM-68 / DACNIS SH-68
RARUS SHC-1026
SHELL
CORENA AS-68
specification.
Schaltplne Schraubenkompressoren
Connection diagram - screw compressor
4 37
Original 2011-06-21
HSC
Jahr/Building Year: 200_____
Serien Nr/SerialNo.:______________
HATLAPA Uetersener Maschinenfabrik GmbH & Co.

Tornescher Weg 5 7, 25436 Uetersen ++49 4122 711- 0, FAX ++49 4122 711 104
E03071606 b - 06/05
Frequence
5G4
5G6
50A
5G10
29,3A
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
nderung
Name
Kster
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
Urspr.
Ers.f.
Kompressor/compressor/compresseur
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Ers.d.
Ben.
E990903
775089
22,0 kW
400-440V
5G10
50A
5G25
55,0A
63A
E990927
775024
30,0 kW
5G25
68,0A
80A
E990927
775024
37,0 kW
5G35
81,0A
100A
E990928
7750281
45,0 kW
4G50
99,0A
125A
E990929
7750281
55,0 kW
4G70
134,0A
160A
E030222
7750291
75,0 kW
Schaltschrank Daten
Dates of control cabinet
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Ort:
Anlage:
Folge
Blatt
verknpft mit Exel-Liste E03071608.xls
A t t ent i o n !
Le dimensionnement de la conduite dalimentation, ainsi que de t ous les cblages externes, a

lieu en propre responsabilit de la socit lectrique excutant ces travaux.
Avant mise en service et en cas de travaux dentretien il f aut serrer les vis de contact, ou bien
vrifier sils sont bien fixs.
Avant mise en service il faut vrifier la tension et f rquence ainsi que les valeurs de cosigne de
la protection du moteur et du relais temporis.
Inf o r mat io ns imp o r t ant es!
5G16
41,0A
50 - 60 Hz
36,0A
50A
230V / 19V / 10V
A t t ent io n !
5G2,5
35A
21,7A
3/PE 50-60Hz 400-440V
E990903
A cht ung !
5G2,5
25A
15,3A
E990701
775089
18,5 kW
The dimensioning of the conducting cable as well as all external cables are the responsibility
of the electrician ef fect ing the wiring.
Cble d'alimentat ion
20A
11,3A
E990701
775087
15,0 kW
Die Dimensionierung der Zuleit ung sowie alle ext ernen Verkabelungen erfolgt in Eigenverantwortung der ausf hrenden Elekt rof irma.
Zuleitung
16A
8,5A
E990802
775087
11,0 kW
Before initial st arting and during maintenance works, all contact screws have t o be checked
and retightened respectively.
Frequency
Supply line
Frequenz
Branchement de courant
Fusible de puissance
E990802
7,5 kW
775083
Vor Inbetriebnahme und bei Wartungsarbeiten sind alle Kontakt schrauben nachzuziehen
bzw. auf festen Sitz zu kontrollieren.
Connecting current
Anschlustrom
E990802
5,5 kW
775083
Before initial st arting, volt age and frequency as well as t he values at which motor protect ion
and t ime relay are set have to be checked.
Preliminary locking device
max. Vorsicherung
Tension de gchette
4 kW
775083
Vor Inbetriebnahme sind Spannung und Frequenz sowie die Einstellwerte der
M ot orschut z und Zeitrelais zu prfen.
Control voltage
Steuersspannung
Tension du moteur
Alimentat ion
C har g es d e co nnexi o n
Dessin No.
EDV No.
I mp o r t ant d i r ect io ns !
M otor volt age
M ot orspannung
Pr o jet d o nnes
Compresseur hlice
W icht i g e Hinweise !
C o nnect ed lo ad
Zeichnung Nr
Power supply
Drawing No.
EDV - Nr
Einspeisung
EDV - No.
Schraubenverdichter
A nschl u w er t e
Pr o ject D at a
screw compressor
Pr o jekt D at en
Schaltschrank Daten / dates of control cabinet / Donnes Armoire, instruments
Original 2011-06-21
1.1
2
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
nderung
Name
Kster
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
PROCON A1
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Gehuse 01
housing 01
Carter 01
Ers.d.
620mm
S1
Ben.
Original 2011-06-21
Frontansicht
front view
3P1
3Q1
EDV Nr.:
Amperemeter
ammeter
amperemeter
Hauptschalter
Power switch
interrupteur
principal
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
290mm
Tiefe: 170mm
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
2
3
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
3F0
nderung
Bauseits
at site
L3
L2
L3
PE
see attachment
siehe Anhang
PE
Name
Kuester
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
Alimentation
voir annexe
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
Castouche fusible
puissance de branchement nominale
Courant en rgime
power supply
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
back up fuse max.
rating
current rated
Einspeisung
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
Sicherungseinsatz max.
Nennanschluleistung
Nennbetriebstrom
L1
L2
L1
Motorstromrelais
motor power relais
relais motoris
Option
U1
V1
W1
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
* 3F6
7.7
7K1
3T2
5.2
96
95
PE
PE
Ers.d.
3M1
1X1
98
97
3P1
Commande compresseur hlice
Alimentation
2
Antrieb Schraubenkompressor
screw compressor drive
Einspeisung
power supply
1X1
3Q1
Hauptschalter
Power switch
interrupteur
principal
0
4
7.5
7K2
W2
U2
Ben.
V2
Original 2011-06-21
1
4
3
6
Einspeisung / Antrieb
power supply / drive
Alimentation / Commande
7.6
7K3
1X1
230
12
11
3F3
400 - 440
3F1
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
3F2
PE
3F5
3S1
3T1
EDV Nr.:
PE
Transformator
transformer
transformateur
19
3F4
10
Ort:
Anlage:
Transformator
transformer
transformateur
Folge
Blatt
3.1
4
/4.0
/7.0
/4.0
/4.0
/4.0
/4.0
PE /4.0
L10
L11
L50
L51
L60
L61
L3
L2
L1
L51
L50
L60
3.9/
3.9/
3.9/
nderung
Datum
PE
L61
3.9/
3.9/
L11
3.9/
Name
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
5/03
Datum
0V / 10V AC
0V / 19V AC
19V AC
10V AC
230V 50Hz
4A1
32
33
31
11
0X7
12
13
0X3
30
10
29
28
Schnittestelle RS232/RS485 nicht auf Klemmen verdrahtet

interface RS232/RS485 not wired on clamps
interface RS232/RS485 pas cbl sur pinces
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
PROCON - Steuerelektronik
PROCON - control electronic
PROCON - lectronique de commande
27
26
Ers.d.
0X6
25
0X2
24
23
22
Ben.
20
19
bl
18
ga
16
0X1
0X4
17
15
br
PROCON-control electronic
PROCON-Steuerelektronik
PROCON-lectronique de commande
0X5
21
Typ / type / Type :

PROCON Electronic
lectronique PROCON
sw
Original 2011-06-21
EDV Nr.:
14
gr-ge
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE /5.0
L11
4
5
nderung
4.9/
Datum
PE
Name
5/03
Hall
21
4.5
PE
23
0X6
dfaut arrt d'urgence
4.3
Urspr.
PE
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
24
PE
Option
avertissement filtre air
4.3
0X6
Warnung
Luftfilter
warning
air filter
Option
1X1
8
25
PE
Ben.
10
26
PE
Option avertissement
sparateur fin
4.3
0X6
Warnung
Feinabscheider
warning
fine seperator
Option
1X1
Digital-Eingnge
digital input
entres digitales
filtre huile
4.3
0X6
Warnung
lfilter
warning
oil filter
Option
1X1
12
27
PE
EDV Nr.:
14
28
PE
Option
Xxx marche / arrt
4.3
0X6
Fern
Ein / Aus
remote
on / of
Option
1X1
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Option
GLW: charge / marche vide
4.3
0X6
GLW:
Last / Leerlauf
load / unload
Option
1X1
25
13
1X1
3
11
1X1
1X1
1X1
32
1X1
31
Strung
Not - Aus
malfunction
emergency stop
1X1
3S1
29
Versorg.spg. 24VDC
Digital Eingnge
supply voltage 24VDC
digital inputs
4.3
0X6
tension d'alimentation 24VDC

entres numriques
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
dfaut PTC
temprature du moteur
0X5
Strung PTC
Motortemperatur
malfunction PTC
temp. motor
1X1
96
95
4.5
PE
5R2
* 3F6
1X1
0X5
Option
rserve dfaut PTC
Bearb.
Norm
20
Reserve
Strung PTC
reserve
malfunction PTC
Datum
Gepr.
Option
1X1
5R1
1X1
22
Versorg.spg. 12VDC
Motortemperatur
PTC
motor temp. PTC
4.5
0X5

temprature du moteur PTC
rt
rt
sw
gr-ge
rs
bl
vi
br
ws
Original 2011-06-21
ga
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE /7.0
5
6
nderung
Datum
Name
5/03
Hall
Norm
15
1X1
4.5
16
sonde de temprature
KTY -20 +150C
4.5
0X4
Temperaturfhler
KTY -20 bis +150C
temp. transductor
KTY -20 bis +150C
16
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
sonde de temprature
KTY -20 +150C
0X4
4.5
15
-2
17
17
0X4
Netzdruck
4-20mA
0 bis 16 bar
line pressure
18
Ers.d.
Ben.
A1
conduite d'alimentation
capteur de pression 4-20mA
4.5
0X4
Zuleitg.Druckfhler
4-20mA
feed line
pressure transductor
19
Analog-Eingnge
analog inputs
entre analogique
pression du rseau
4-20mA 0 16 bar
Option
pression du systme
4-20mA 0 16 bar
18
A2
4.5
+1
6A1
Druckfhler
capteur de pression
4.5
0X4
Systemdruck
4-20mA
0 bis 16 bar
system pressure
Option
1X1
6A0
Druckfhler
capteur de pression
ws
ga
6R1
Temperaturfhler
KTY -20 bis +150C
temp. transductor
KTY -20 bis +150C
br
0X4
blindage
entre analogique
Bearb.
Gepr.
14
gr-ge
Schirmung
Analog Eingnge
screening
analog inputs
Datum
sw
Original 2011-06-21
bl
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
6
7
10.11.03
Datum
nderung
L10
PE
Option 7Y2
5.9/
3.9/
Name
Kster
5/03
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
1X1
22
23
Urspr.
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
Steuerventil
control valve
soupape de distribution
45/55/75kW
(45/55/75kW)
* Option
* 7Y2
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
NO
collective indicat.
change over cont.
NO
4.4
0X2
dfaut collectif
inverseur NO
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
21
4.4
4.4
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
NC
collective indicat.
change over cont.
NC
0X2
0X2
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
C
collective indicat.
change over cont.
C
dfaut collectif
inverseur NC
dfaut collectif
inverseur C
Datum
0V 50Hz
1
4
26
24
PE
Entlastungsventil
relief valve
soupape de dcharge
1X1
7Y1
1X1
Lastventil
load valve
4.2
0X3
soupape de charge
Ben.
1
3
5
21
7K2
.6
2 3.4
4 3.5
6 3.5
22 .6
A2
A1
22
21
Relais-Ausgnge
relay outlets
sortie de relais
10
Dreieckschtz
delta contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur en delta
7K3
Original 2011-06-21
1
3
5
21
7K3
.5
7K2
11
2 3.6
4 3.6
6 3.6
22 .5
A2
A1
22
21
Sternschtz
star contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur en toile
EDV Nr.:
7K1
1
3
5
2 3.3
4 3.3
6 3.3
A2
A1
1X1
E03071606 b
26
27
Wasserstopventil
water stop valve
soupape d'arrt d'eau
(Wasserkhlung)
(water-cooling)
(refroidissement l'eau)
* Option
1X1
* 7Y3
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
12
Netzschtz
main contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur principal
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE
L10
7
8
06.06.05
10.11.03
Datum
Option 7Y2
nderung
0V 50Hz
running/pot.free
3.9/
L10
5.9/ PE
Kuester
Name
Kster
30
7K1
31
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb.
Datum
Hall
5/03
Ein (Motor luft) Pot.freie Kontakte

on (running) potential-free contacts
29
7K1
28
14
11
7K4
Last (Leerlauf) Pot.freie Kontakte

load (idle) potential-free contacts
* Option
27
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
32
Ers.d.
*7K4
A1
Steuerventil
control valve
soup de distribution
* Option (45/55/75kW)
A2
Ben.
1X1
1X1
26
24
Original 2011-06-21
Relais-Ausgnge
relay outlets
sortie de relais
PE
EDV Nr.:
Stillstandheizung
Motor
auxiliary heating
motor
L11
26
230V
33
22
21
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Stillstandheizung
Motor
auxiliary heating
motor
* Option
7K1
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE
L10
7-1
8
nderung
Klemmenplan
/ terminal strip
HOP.KP02
W6A0
W6R1
W0X5
W0X4
W0X1
Leistenbezeichnung
Datum
Name
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X1
Norm
Hall
Bearb.
Gepr.
5/03
Datum
Kabeltyp
Zielbezeichnung
Anschlu
Klemmennummer
Zielbezeichnung
Anschlu
Kabeltyp
4mm
Seite/Pfad
Funktionstext / function text

Einspeisung power supply
3Q1
3Q1
3Q1
0/L1
0/L2
0/L3
0/PE
PE
0/N
Ers.f.
5R2
5R1
5R1
1
2
7K1
7K1
7K1
3.0
3T1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
0X5
22
0X5
rt
20
5.1
sw
5.1
3
5R2
Kompressor / compressor
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Urspr.

3
4
SH
W6R1
3
Ers.d.
SH
W6A0
5.2
0X5
21
3S1
br
5.2
31
0X6
5.4
24
gr-ge
5.4
5.5
0X6
25
rs
5.5
5.6
0X4
14
gr-ge
6.3
6R1
15
6R1
14
13
12
11
10
Ben.
SH
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
6.5
0X6
26
bl
5.6
5
1X1
16
-2
17
+1
18
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
7Y1
24
25
5.7
0X6
27
vi
5.7
5.8
0X6
28
0X4
ga
15
0X4
5.8
br
16
0X4
6.3
sw
17
6A1
6.3
ws
6.4
A1
0X2
6.4
0X2
7.2
0X2
7.2
7
32
3S1
26
6A0
6A0
7Y1
0X3
7.2
0X6
7.4
23
A2
7K2
3T1
rt
5.3
7.4
3.4
3T1
PE
Antrieb Kolbenkompressor
piston compressor drive
Original 2011-06-21
SH
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
21
22
23
PE
3M1
PE
Transformator
transformer
PE
4A1-0X1
3.7
gr-ge
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
5.5
PE
5.4
PE
5.3
PE
5.2
PE
5.2
PE
5.6
PE
8
Original 2011-06-21
SECTION 3
SPARE PARTS
RESERVETEILE
for
screw compressor
HSC 4 - HSC 75
Position
Qty.
Bezeichnung/Declaration
010
lfilter
oil filter
Original 2011-06-21
0202
Luftfilter-Element
air filter element
030
Feinabscheider
fine separator
040
Satz Keilriemen
Set of V-belts
HSC4, HSC5.5
HSC7.5, HSC11
HSC15, HSC18.5, HSC22
HSC30, HSC37
HSC45, HSC55
HSC75
16.04.2008
1
2
3
4
6
7
pc
pcs
pcs
pcs
pcs
pcs
177982-06060
HSC Electronic Control: Procon

Modification of Maintenance Intervals
Any alarm- or malfunction has to be acknowledged by below stated procedure 2.

If the alarm indication is caused by a maintenance interval, the value of the respective parameter
has to be re-adjusted to an appropriate value PRIOR to acknowledgement of the alarm.
1. Modification of Maintenance Intervals
Back to basic mode
Select Menu (press 3 seconds)
Enter Menu-Code 020
Confirm
Choose C1 air filter
Original 2011-06-21
Select edit mode, (blinking)

Enter maintenance interval, e.g. 1500 h
Confirm
Choose C2 oil filter
Choose C3 oil fine separator cartridge
Choose C4 oil operating life time
Confirm
Back to basic mode
2. After this has been done the Alarm/Malfunction can be acknowledged by:
Press
to enter the basic mode.
Then keep both keys
11.01.2007
pressed for at least 2 seconds.
Original 2011-06-21
Operating instructions
HATLAPA Screw Compressors
Type
Serial number
Date
Component overview
Original 2011-06-21
12
23
Fig. 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
24 13
28
10
25
27 26
19
20
21
22 1
16 17 11 18 15 14
Component overview
Compressor
Compressed air / oil reservoir
Oil high-precision separator cartridge
Electric motor
Fan
PROCON control
Proportional controller (optional)
Name plate
Drain line
Pressure detector
Safety valve
12 Switch box
13 Oil thermostat
14 Temperature sensor
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Oil and condensation water drain valve

Pressure reservoir name plate
Oil gauge
Oil filler neck
V-belt tensioning roller
Suction stop valve
Control valve
Relief valve
Suction filter
Oil filter
Compressed-air outlet with cut-off valve (optional)
26 Compressed-air aftercooler
27 Oil cooler
28 Super sound proofing hood
104482 HSC 03/03
PROCON control
10
11
12
00
.
Original 2011-06-21
20
Fig. 2:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
104482 HSC 03/03
14
bar
13
Operating elements
Power switch
Circuit-breaking key
Emergency stop
In the menu:
Edit mode:
In the menu:
Edit mode:
In the menu:
Edit mode:
In the menu:
Edit mode:
Permanent yellow:
Permanent yellow:
Permanent yellow:
Permanent green:
Green flashing:
Blinking yellow:
Blinking yellow:
Red flashing:
One line up
Increase value
One line down
Selection of the menu
Call up information
Cancel value input
Selection of the menu
Apply value
Base load sequencer operating mode
Remote operation
Automatic restart
Motor is running
Standby, motor can start automatically at any time
Maintenance
Warning
Type of malfunction
Original 2011-06-21
Table
of contents
PROCON
control
Table of contents
Technical annex
Original 2011-06-21
Component overview
PROCON control
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Fundamental safety instructions....... 2

Designated use ........................................ 2
Fundamental measures.......................... 2
Description of symbols and notes ........ 2
2
2.1
2.2
Transport and storage ......................... 2

Transport .................................................. 2
Storage...................................................... 2
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Mounting ................................................ 3
Mounting conditions............................... 3
Compressed-air port ............................... 4
Electrical connection .............................. 4
Checking the rotating direction ............ 5
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Operation................................................ 7
Safety instructions .................................. 7
Switching the unit on ............................. 7
Start-up after an extended idle time..... 7
Weekly check ........................................... 7
Switching the unit off ............................. 7
Remote control ........................................ 8
Original HATLAPA accessories ............ 8
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
PROCON control .................................. 9

Operating elements ................................ 9
Display features....................................... 9
Input of parameters................................. 9
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Inspection and servicing ................... 13

Safety instructions ................................ 13
Checking and topping up the oil level 13
Changing the oil .................................... 14
Changing oil filter.................................. 14
Draining the condensation water ....... 15
Cleaning the oil cooler and the
compressed-air aftercooler.................. 15
Checking safety valve ........................... 15
Changing oil high-precision separator
cartridge.................................................. 15
Checking and changing the suction
filter cartridge ........................................ 15
Clean proportional controller nozzle. . 16
Cleaning drain restrictor ...................... 16
Checking and adjusting the V-belt ..... 16
Notes on systems equipped with water
cooling system....................................... 17
Tighten the screw connections. .......... 17
Checking electric terminals................. 17
Relubricating / replacing motor
mounting ................................................ 17
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
104482 HSC 03/03
Maintenance schedule....................... 18
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
Trouble shooting ................................ 20

Malfunction, compressor generally.... 20
Malfunction, PROCON control............ 24
Warnings, PROCON control ................ 25
Fundamental safety instructions
1
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1
Designated use
Transport and storage
2.1
Transport
The compressor system is intended exclusively for the generation of compressed air.
Any other use shall be considered an undesignated use.
1.2
Original 2011-06-21
1.3
Fundamental measures
Never point compressed air at persons.
Observe these operating instructions.
Keep these operating instructions available at the location of use at all times.
Please observe the regular maintenance
intervals (refer to chapter 7 Maintenance
schedule).
Use original HATLAPA parts and approved
operating material only.
Do not use compressed air for breathing
without corresponding treatment.
Do not modify the system.
Use mounting parts and devices downstream from the compressor which have
been designed for the maximum operating
overpressure of the compressor.
In your capacity as proprietor, please ensure that all safety regulations are observed by the operating staff.
Do not use the compressor as a climbing
aid.
Description of symbols and

notes
2.2
Danger
Mortal danger caused by incorrect
transport.
Do not hold the compressor at its
cladding elements as you lift it.
Only use suitable lifting gear with the
corresponding weight-bearing capacity
(for data on weight, please refer to
chapter Technical annex).
Fasten and secure the system with
belts at the corresponding points.
Secure swivelling and loose parts.
Transport the compressor by means of
crane hooks, fork-lift truck and elevating truck only.
Never remain under suspended loads.
Depressurise the compressor prior to
any transport.
Storage
Store the compressor in a dry location protected against weather influence. Ambient
temperature: -10C to +50C.
Please order the HATLAPA conservation instructions in case of storage of over six
months.
For information on recommissioning
after an extended idle time, please refer to chapter 4.3.
Danger
Mortal danger and risk of injury.
Caution
Damage to property.
Information and tips.
104482 HSC 03/03
Mounting
3
Mounting
3.1
Mounting conditions
Cooling and exhaust air
Check the compressor for damage during

transport.
Ambient conditions
Danger
Mortal danger and explosion hazard
when caustic, inflammable or poisonous gases are drawn in.
Do not operate the compressor in explosive surroundings or in the vicinity
of open flames and flying sparks.
Danger
Mortal danger and explosion hazard
during suction.
Ensure that the compressor takes in
only clean air which is free from noxious constituents. Noxious substances
are liable to accumulate in the lubricating oil of the compressor. They may
cause explosions in the system and
heavy damages.
Do not allow objects or pieces of clothing of persons going past to be sucked
in by the intake air flow.
Caution
Wrong mounting will cause damage to
the compressor.
Ensure sufficient ventilation of the
compressor room.
Do not operate the compressor in the
open.
Systems with a capacity exceeding 40
kW must be installed in such a way
that no combustible objects or materials are in the immediate proximity.
Systems with a capacity exceeding 100
kW should be installed in a separate
room.
The space between the compressor and the

wall has to be at least 60 cm (cf. Fig. 3: Location). The compressor has to be easily accessible from all sides. The ambient temperature
has to be between 3C and 40C.
Original 2011-06-21
Fig. 4:
> 60 cm
+3C - +40 C
Fig. 3:
104482 HSC 03/03
1
2
A
B
C
D
E
Room ventilation
Intake air
Exhaust air
Air inlet
Air outlet
Ventilation duct
Exhaust fan
Elastic connecting piece
Location
Mounting
The overall length of all air intake and exhaust
ducts must not exceed 4m; one baffle is permissible. In case of conduits exceeding this
length or in case of several baffles, a booster
fan must be installed. In this case, please contact your technical adviser.
For further information on the required ventilation cross sections, please refer to the
Technical Annex.
Ground
!
Place the compressor on a horizontal and

plane surface.
The ground has to have a suitable loadbearing capacity. HATLAPA offers special solutions for inclined surfaces.
Original 2011-06-21
In order to reduce vibrations, HATLAPA recommends rubber-metal connections.
3.2
Compressed-air port
The connection to the compressed-air ductwork system may be carried out only by
trained experts or by staff members of
HATLAPA Company.
Danger
Danger of injury by pressure in the
pipes.
Vent the pipes to which the compressor is connected.
Use a flexible hose to connect the
compressor to the supply network.
Thus, stress cracks and sound bridges
are prevented.
Compressed-air lines, filters, aftercoolers

and vessels must at their lowest spots be
equipped with an outlet for the condensation water accumulated. These outlets
must allow to observe the draining condensation water. Condensation water may
contain oil! In draining the condensation
water, all applicable regulations on the
disposal of waste water must be complied
with.
Remove all securing devices before you
start to install the conduits.
Use only suitable connecting lines and
couplings which are designed for the intended working pressure. Do not use any
defect component.
Supply lines must not be subjected to
stress or tension.
Observe the technical data for the connection

of compressed air (cf. chapter Technical annex).
3.3
Electrical connection
The connection to the electrical power system

may be carried out only by adequately trained
expert.
Danger
Mortal danger caused by electric voltage but also by rotating wheels, Vbelts, and fan blades.
Test runs are permissible only if all
parts of the casing are closed (exception: check of the rotating direction).
Compressor systems have to be fitted with a

power switch or a plug connection to interrupt
the power supply. Compressor systems with a
motor capacity of more than 3 kW or 16 Amps
have to be fitted with a lockable power switch
and upstream fuses.
In this respect, please refer to the circuit diagram in the chapter titled
Technical annex or in the switch
cabinet as well as to the following
connection conditions.
Check and retighten where appropriate
all electric terminals before first commissioning.
104482 HSC 03/03
Mounting
3.4
Checking the rotating direction
!
!
!
Open side cladding of the compressor.

Please refer to chapter 4.2 titled Switching the unit on.
Press the power switch, and immediately
after this the emergency stop (see fig. 2:
Operating elements). The correct rotating
direction of the fan has been marked by an
arrow on the fan cover.
Change the poles of the electric connection of the motor in case of a wrong rotating direction.
Original 2011-06-21
Caution
Fire hazard and damage to compressor
in case of wrong polarisation of the
motor (5 revolutions maximum in the
wrong direction of rotation!).
Carry out the check of the rotating direction as described below:
104482 HSC 03/03
Mounting
Electrical connection conditions
The connection to the electrical power system
may be carried out only by adequately trained
expert.
Caution
Overvoltages and undervoltages must not exceed the 10% mark.
Original 2011-06-21
This unit is intended for operation on a power supply network with a maximum system
impedance Zmax at the interconnection point (house service line), which is listed in the
table below in dependence of the performance. The user shall have to ensure that the
unit is operated only on a power supply network which meets these requirements. If and
when necessary, the local power supply company can provide information on the system
impedance.
Motor
performance
400V-50Hz 3 ph
Protection
Motor
rated cur- stardelta
rent
starting
Protection direct starting

A
Motor
performance
230V-50Hz 1 ph
Protection
Motor
rated cur- stardelta
rent
starting
kW
kW
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.6
3.5/4.1
5.0/6.0
6
10
16
1.1
1.5
2.2
2.6
3.5/4.1
5.0/6.0
6
10
16
3.0
6.6/8.1
16
3.0
6.6/8.1
16
4.0
8.5
16
20
4.0
8.5
16
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
75.0
11.5
15.5
22.5
30.0
36.0
43.0
58.0
68
81
99
134
20
25
35
50
50
63
80
80
100
125
160
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
55.0
75.0
11.5
15.5
22.5
30.0
36.0
43.0
58.0
68
81
99
134
20
25
35
50
50
63
80
80
100
125
160
Protection direct starting

A
20
Tab. 1: Characteristic value for the electrical connection

The supply line cross sections provided are recommended values for a maximum 50m line
length at 30C. For fuse protection, use slow-to-blow or gL fuses.
220/240 V systems require a three-core 1P/N/PE cable.
380/400 V systems require a four-core 3P/PE cable for direct start.
380/400 V systems require for star-delta starting a five-core supply line 3P/N/PE.
104482 HSC 03/03
Operation
4
Operation
4.2
4.1
Safety instructions
Danger
Mortal danger caused by sudden startup of the system.
Systems which are in the standby operating mode are liable to start automatically at any time.
!
!
!
!
Original 2011-06-21
104482 HSC 03/03
All parts installed behind the check valve

(e. g. aftercooler, pressure switch) are not
released automatically from pressure.
Not all transmission lines are de-energised
when the system is switched off!
Before commissioning, ensure that no
person can be injured by the starting
compressor.
Never point compressed air at persons.
Do not use compressed air for breathing
without corresponding treatment.
Use mounting parts and devices downstream from the compressor which have
been designed for the maximum operating
pressure of the compressor.
Do not reach into the rotating wheels
when the compressor is operational.
Touch the compressor system at the on
and off switch only during and shortly after operation. Hot surface can cause severe injuries.
Switch the compressor off immediately in
case of faults.
Keep combustible materials away from
the compressor system.
Operate the compressor only with suction
filter and if all parts of the casing are
closed.
Operate the compressor only at the permissible operating pressure of the pressure reservoir.
Tighten the screw connections of the
pressure pipes.
Wear tight-fitting work cloths when handling the compressor.
Wear goggles and ear muffs when working
with compressed air.
Wear a hair net to protect long hair and
remove any lose jewellery.
Check the cables for damage in regular
intervals.
Keep domestic animals and children away
from the compressor system.
Switch the compressor off when not
needed.
Switching the unit on

Check oil level through oil gauge and top
up the oil if and when necessary (refer to
chapter 6.2 Checking and topping up the
oil level).
Switch on the power switch.
Press power switch (see fig. 2: operating
elements).
Signal lamp indicates readiness for operation.
Compressor starts and after approx. 10sec.
starts load operation.
Open ball valve.
In case of faults, please refer to chapter 8 titled Trouble shooting for more help.
4.3
Start-up after an extended idle

time.
During an extended idle time, the complete oil

content flows into the compressed air / oil
reservoir. If this has happened, the screw
compressor is not any more lubricated.
!
!
!
Dismount intake regulator.

Fill approx. 1 litre compressor oil into the
air intake fitting.
Mount intake regulator.
Do not mix different types of oil. In
choosing the oil you want to use, refer
to the corresponding HATLAPA specifications (refer to chapter 6.2 Checking and topping up the oil level).
4.4
4.5
!
!
Weekly check
Check oil level of the compressor (refer to
chapter 6.2 Checking and topping up the
oil level).
Switching the unit off

Press circuit-breaking key 0 (see fig. 2:
operating elements).
Switch off power switch.
Operation
4.6
Remote control
All systems which are equipped with remote

control must bear a clearly visible label reading as follows: Warning! This system is remotely controlled and is liable to start at any
time." In addition, persons operating remotely
controlled systems must ensure that the system is not started during maintenance or repair work. For this, a corresponding information sign must be affixed to the remote control
unit.
!
!
!
!
4.7
Open ball valve.

Press power switch (see fig. 2: operating
elements).
Signal lamp indicates readiness for operation.
System is now ready to be operated via
remote control.
Original HATLAPA accessories
Original 2011-06-21
HATLAPA offers you the following accessories: For more information, please refer to the
HATLAPA price list or directly to HATLAPA.
Compressed-air filter
To clean the compressed air for special applications.
Refrigeration or adsorption dryer

To prevent faults of the compressed air ductwork system, compressed-air tools, instruments and controls caused by humid air.
Top sound insulation

To reduce noise emissions.
Base load sequencer

Intelligent higher-order control system to control several compressors depending on the
actual compressed air consumption.
Speed regulator
Adapts speed and thus also energy consumption of the screw compressor to the actual
compressed air consumption.
Water-cooling system
For application conditions under which the
standard fan cooling is not sufficient.
Heat exchanger
Free of charge energy derived from heat produced by the compressor during operation
which is then available to other consumers.
For more information on these and

other pneumatic accessories, please
refer to HATLAPA. Our address is on
the last page of these operating instructions.
Automatic condensation water drain

To spare you the daily draining of condensation water.
Oil and water separator

Is fitted downstream of the condensation water drain. The separated water can be removed directly into the sewer system.
Rubber-metal connection
To reduce vibrations.
104482 HSC 03/03
PROCON control
5
PROCON control
5.1
Operating elements
See fig. 2 PROCON control
5.2
Display features
Basic display
During normal operation, the display indicates both network pressure and final compression temperature as three-digit figures.
In the event of pressure or temperature measurement failure, the corresponding field
shows - - -. The load operation of the system
is indicated through a dot following the network pressure value.
Original 2011-06-21
In the event of malfunction reports or warnings occurring, these will alternate with the
analogue quantities in the pressure display
every three seconds. Malfunction reports in
the display start with an E followed by a
two-digit malfunction code (refer to chapter
8.2 Malfunction, PROCON control and chapter 8.3 Warnings, PROCON control) whereas
warnings start with an A. In addition, in
case of malfunction a malfunction LED will
light up; in case of a warning a warning LED
will light up.
Line 3:
Load operation hours. Load operation
hours are indicated as five-digit figures.
L. will appear on the left side of the display (e. g. L.12 345 for 12345h).
Line 4:
Air filter operating life. In the display F1
alternates with the corresponding operating life value. In addition, the maintenance
LED flashes.
Line 5:
Oil filter operating life. In the display F2
alternates with the corresponding operating life value. In addition, the maintenance
LED flashes.
Line 6:
Oil separator operating life. In the display
F3 alternates with the corresponding operating life value. In addition, the maintenance LED flashes.
Line 7:
Oil operating life. In the display OIL alternates with the corresponding operating
life value. In addition, the maintenance
LED flashes.
Line 8:
V-belt operating life. In the display BE.
alternates with the corresponding operating life value. This line will appear only in
case the V-belt is activated in the option
menu. In addition, the maintenance LED
flashes.
Line 9:
Software version, e. g. PRO 1.00 for Version 1.00.
Information menu
!
104482 HSC 03/03
To call up the first line of the information

menu, keep key 6 () pressed for one second.
The keys 4 and 5 (/) allow you to navigate within the menu structure.
Press key 6 () to exit the menu; alternatively, the menu is also exited if no key has
been pressed for 3 minutes.
Line 1:
System pressure indicator. The system
pressure is displayed in place of the network pressure. P2 will appear on the left
side of the display. This line will appear
only in case the system pressure input is
activated in the option menu. In case an
incorrect system pressure value has been
obtained, the display will show - - -.
Line 2:
Hours of operation. Hours of operation are
indicated as five-digit figures. R. will appear on the left side of the display (e. g.
R.23 456 for 23456h).
5.3
Input of parameters
Selection menu
!
In order to enter parameters, keep key 7

() pressed for three seconds. COD.000
will appear in the display.
Enter the code for the desired menu using
the keys 4 and 5 (/).
Confirm by pressing key 7 (), and the first
parameter of the selected menu is displayed.
In case an invalid code has been entered,
or key 6 () has been pressed, the routine
returns to the initial display.
Selection of parameters within a

menu
!
The keys 4 and 5 (/) allow you to navigate within the menu structure in the display modus.
PROCON control
!
Press key 6 () to exit the menu; alternatively, the menu is also exited if no key has
been pressed for 5 minutes.
Editing parameters within a menu

!
Press key 7 () to modify parameters. You

are then in the edit mode. This is indicated
by the corresponding parameter value
flashing.
The keys 4 and 5 (/) allow you now to
modify the value.
Press key 6 () to return to the display
mode, and retain the previous value.
Press key 7 () to save the current value
and to enter the next value that can be
modified.
Original 2011-06-21
In the event values have been modified

within one menu, storage of the new
values is signalled through a horizontal
bar (for one second).
Pressure control menu (Code 010)

Name
Message
Minimum A1. ##.#

network
pressure
Maximum
network
pressure
A2. ##.#
Setting
range
Factory
setting
Between
5.0 bar
and
maximum
network
pressure
Between
minimum
network
pressure
and system
pressure
8.5 bar
10.0
bar
Oil filter
operating
life
Oil separator operating
life
Oil operating life
V-belt operating
life
Shutdown
maintenance
C2.# ###
0-9999h
500*
C3.# ###
0-9999h
2000
C4.# ###
0-9999h
500*
C5.# ###
0-9999h
C6.
0=No
1=Yes
0
(inactive)
No
Tab. 3: Maintenance menu

*
only first maintenance interval; the remaining intervals are 2000h
The maintenance intervals can be specified

between 0-9999h while the input 0 means
that this interval should not be edited. In this
place only the target values of the maintenance intervals are indicated; please infer the
actual count from the information provided in
the initial display (refer to initial display in
chapter 5.2 Display features).
After a maintenance interval has been modified, the corresponding count is reset while
the new set value is being applied. Thus the
respective interval can start again, for instance after maintenance work has been
completed.
Use the C6 parameter to decide whether the
compressor should be shut down after the
maintenance interval has been exceeded by
more than 100h. After the compressor has
been shut down this way, the operator can
acknowledge this error message and start the
compressor for another 100h.
Tab. 2: Pressure control menu
Maintenance menu (Code 020)

Name
Message
Air filter
C1.# ###
operating
life
10
Setting
range
Factory
setting
0-9999h
2000
104482 HSC 03/03
PROCON control
Original 2011-06-21
Operating parameter menu (Code

030)
Name
Message
Setting
range
Factory
setting
Base load
sequencer
operating
mode
Continuous
operation
Remote
operation
Re-starts
automatically after power
failure
Power
failure
time
Re-start
delay
B1.
0=No
1=Yes
No
B2.
0=No
1=Yes
No
0=No
1=Yes
0=No
1=Yes
No
B5. ##
0-60s
1s
B6. ##
0-60s
0s
B3.
B4.
Tab. 4: Operating parameter menu
104482 HSC 03/03
No
The pressure control is effected via an external contact during programmed operation of
the base load sequencer.
In case the remote control is activated the
start-up is effected via an external contact.
The control system reacts only to the positive
signal edge for start-up of the device. If there
is no input signal this means that the compressor is switched off. In this case you cannot use the keyboard to switch on or off the
device.
The continuous operation parameter allows
to operate the compressor in the no-load operation mode and thus to prevent it from being switched off.
You can specify two periods if the automatic
restart after voltage breakdown has been activated. The power failure time specifies the
maximum allowable period of voltage breakdown after which it is permitted to restart the
device. If this value is set to 0, the device
can be restarted at any time. The re-start delay allows to prevent the compressor from restarting immediately after voltage recovery.
This may be necessary to prevent several
compressors connected to the mains network
from starting simultaneously.
11
PROCON control
Menu structure, customer menu
Pressure control
Information
C
3s
bar
p2
00
.
. r23
456
C
3s
System pressure (Option)
345
F1.
999
F2.
999
F3.
999
oil
999
cod
010
a1.
90
.
A2.
100
.
Cut-in pressure
Hours of operation
. L12
Maintenance intervals Operating parameter
bar
Load operation hours
Shut-off pressure
bar
COD
020
.
c11
500
Air filter operating life
c2.
500
Oil filter operating life
.
c31
500
3s
bar
Cod
030
b1 .
b2.
b3.
b4.
b5.
b6.
Base load sequencer

operation
Continuous operation
Oil separator operating life Remote operation
Air filter operating life
Oil filter operating life
C4.
500
C5.
C6.
Oil operating life
V-belt operating life
Oil separator operating life
Disable maintenance
Oil operating life
Original 2011-06-21
3s
Automatic restart
Power failure time
Re-start delay
Edit:
be
999
V-belt operating life
Edit mode
Increase values
pro
. 100
Software version
Fig. 1:
12
Decrease values
Apply value
Cancel:
Return to the basic mode
without retaining all previous values
Menu structure, customer menu
104482 HSC 03/03
Inspection and servicing
6
6.1
Safety instructions
6.2
The inspection and servicing may be carried

out by experts or trained persons only.
Switch the compressor off for all servicing

work, and protect the unit against unintentional operation.
Prior to any servicing work set the power
switch to off or remove the mains plug.
Use original HATLAPA parts and approved
operating material only.
After having completed the servicing work
tighten all screws again.
Depressurise the compressor prior to any
servicing work.
Touch the compressor system at the on
and off switch only during and shortly after operation. Permit the compressor to
cool down prior to any servicing work. Hot
surfaces can cause severe injuries.
Original 2011-06-21
Before commencement of work, the following

steps must always be carried out.
!
!
!
!
!
!
104482 HSC 03/03
Close cut-off valve at compressed air outlet 25 (see fig. 1: component overview).
Shut down the system.
Switch off power switch.
Open slowly the screw plug of the compressed air aftercooler 26 to release air
pressure.
Wait until no more air exits the postcooler, and tighten the screw plug.
Wait until the remaining system is released from pressure and has cooled
down.
Unscrew oil filler neck 18 by approx. 1 turn
to check whether pressure has been released completely.
Wait until no more air exits the oil filler
neck 18, and tighten again oil plug.
Checking and topping up the oil

level
Danger
Scalding hazard by draining hot oil.
Slowly open the oil filler neck.
Avoid skin contact with hot oil
Fig. 5:
1
2
min. mark
max. mark
Checking the oil level

!
!
!
!
!
Switch the compressor off and depressurise.

Drain off the condensation water before
you check the oil level (refer to chapter 6.5
Draining the condensation water).
Unscrew oil filler neck 18 (see fig. 1: Component overview) by approx. 1 turn to
check whether pressure has been released
completely.
Check oil level through oil gauge 17 (see
fig. 1: component overview).
The oil level has to be within the min. /
max. level.
Check whether the oil has a milky discoloration or contains water drops (for measures, please refer to chapter 8 titled Trouble shooting / Milky colour of the oil, water
drops in the oil).
13
Topping up oil
6.3
Do not mix different types of oil. Exclusively use types of oil specified by
HATLAPA.
!
!
!
!

Carry out the above steps as described in
the Checking oil level section.
Remove oil filler neck 18.
Slowly fill in the oil until the oil level as
indicated by the oil gauge 17 is within the
min. / max. range.
Screw on the oil filler neck.
Types of oil
Original 2011-06-21
The degree of viscosity of the oil chosen

should be based on the ambient temperature
according to ISO 3448.
Ambient temperature
0 up to +25C Permanently
higher than
25C
Viscosity
class
Viscosity at
40 C
Point of ignition
Pour point
ISO VG 46
ISO VG 68
At least 5C below lowest

ambient temperature.
Tab. 5: Types of oil

We assume no warranty unless the lubricants used in our screw compressors show these essential characteristics.
14
!
!
!

Place a suitable collecting vessel under
the oil and condensation water drain valve
15.
Open oil and condensation water drain
valve 15 while it is at operating temperature.
Drain the oil into the vessel.
Close oil and condensation water drain
valve 15.
Open oil filler neck 18 and fill in the new
oil slowly (refer to chapter 6.2 Types of
oil) until the oil level as indicated by the
oil gauge 17 is within the min. / max.
range.
Screw on the oil filler neck.
6.4
Changing oil filter
41 up to 51
61 up to 75
mm/s
mm/s
> 200C
Danger
Slowly open the oil filler neck.
Used oil has to be disposed of according to the local environmental regulations.
On account of the high stress the lubricating

oil is exposed to in screw compressors with
oil injection cooling, we recommend to use
HATLAPA special purpose oils with AFS (anti
foam system) additives showing an extremely
good aging and water-repellent behaviour;
these oils do not foam, and they are anticorrosive.
Changing the oil
Danger
Carefully and slowly remove the oil filter.
Use only new oil filters; you cannot
clean a used oil filter.
If you replace the oil filter while the oil
circuit is filled, up to 2l oil can escape
the system.
Dispose of the oil filter according to
the applicable local environmental
regulations.
104482 HSC 03/03
!
!
!
!
!
6.5

the oil filter 24.
Turn the oil filter left using chain pliers to
screw it off.
Clean the oil filter holder.
Screw down the new oil filter until the
gasket is firmly in place.
Replace oil that has escaped by new oil
(refer to chapter 6.2 Checking and topping up the oil level).
Drain the condensation water every week.
Original 2011-06-21
!
!
6.6
!
6.7

the oil and condensation water drain valve
15.
Open oil and condensation water drain
valve 15 while it is at operating temperature.
Drain the condensation water into the vessel until pure oil escapes.
Close oil and condensation water drain
valve 15.
Cleaning the oil cooler and the

compressed-air aftercooler.
Blow compressed air through the cooling
fins of the oil cooler 27 and of the compressed-air aftercooler 26 (see fig. 1: Component overview) from the inside of the
machine until dust and deposits have disappeared.
Changing oil high-precision

separator cartridge
Use only a new oil high-precision separator cartridge; you cannot clean a
used high precision separator cartridge.
A small amount of oil can escape as
you change the oil high-precision
separator cartridge.
Dispose of the oil high-precision separator cartridge according to the applicable local environmental regulations.
Draining the condensation water

The condensation water contains oil
and has to be disposed of according to
the local environmental regulations.
6.8
!
!
6.9
!
!
Turn the oil high-precision separator cartridge 3 (see fig. 1: Component overview)
left using chain pliers to screw it off.
Clean the oil high-precision separator cartridge holder.
Oil slightly the O-ring and the gasket of
the new oil high-precision separator cartridge.
Screw down the new oil high-precision
separator cartridge until the gasket is
firmly in place.
Checking and changing the

suction filter cartridge
Remove the cover of the suction filter 23
(see fig. 1: Component overview).
In case of severe soiling, immediately replace the suction filter (cf. list of
HATLAPA spare parts in the chapter titled
Technical annex).
Refit the cover of the suction filter.
Checking safety valve

The safety valve 11 (see fig. 1: Component overview) is secured with a seal
which must not be removed.
104482 HSC 03/03
Lift slightly the valve cap to check the

function.
15
6.10 Clean proportional controller
nozzle.
Applies only to systems equipped with
proportional control.
6.12 Checking and adjusting the Vbelt

HSC up to 7.5 kW
5
1
Original 2011-06-21
Fig. 6:
Proportional controller
1
2
Nozzle
Hose connection
Remove plastic hose connection of the

proportional controller 7 (see. fig. 1: Component overview).
Unscrew the nozzle behind.
Clean nozzle, controller and hose.
Screw in the nozzle.
Fix the hose connection again.
!
!
!
!
Fig. 7: Checking V-belt tension HSC up to 7.5

kW
!
!
!
!
!
!
Remove the drain line 9 from the drain restrictor.

Unscrew the restrictor from the casing of
the compressor 1.
Clean the hole of the restrictor.
Mount and connect the restrictor again.
Fig. 8: HSC V-belt tensioning device up to 7.5

kW
1
2
3
4
Motor flange screws

Adjusting screw
Lock nut
Nut
Slightly loosen motor flange screws 1.

Loosen lock nut 3 at adjusting screw 2.
Adjust V-belt tension through adjusting
screw 2 and tighten lock nut 3 again.
Tighten motor flange screws 1.
!
!
!
16
Apply a perpendicular force between 25 N

and 35 N in point 1 using a dynamometer.
In doing so, the belt must give approx.
5mm.
2
6.11 Cleaning drain restrictor

The drain restrictor is where the drain line 9
enters the casing of the compressor 1 (see fig.
1: Component overview).
104482 HSC 03/03
HSC up to 7.5 kW
6.14 Tighten the screw connections.

After first commissioning, check and
if required retighten all screws.
3
!
!
4
2
Tighten all screw connections in regular

intervals.
In doing so, observe the torque (cf. Tab.: 6:
Torques).
Screw
Maximum torque
M8
M 10
M 12
25 Nm
50 Nm
85 Nm
Fig. 9: HSC V-belt tensioning device over 7.5

kW
1
2
3
4
Bottom adjusting nut

Top adjusting nut
Lock ring
Square pin
Original 2011-06-21
The V-belt tension must be corrected if the

lock ring 3 touches the square pin 4.
!
!
Loosen the bottom adjusting nut 1.

Unscrew the top adjusting nut 2 until the
distance between the lock ring 3 and the
square pin 4 is 10-12mm.
Tighten the bottom adjusting nut 1.
Tab. 6: Torques
6.15 Checking electric terminals

!
6.16 Relubricating / replacing motor

mounting
!
6.13 Notes on systems equipped

with water cooling system
Check and if required tighten all electric terminals regularly.
Relubricate or replace the motor mounting

as specified by the manufacturer (refer to
the name plate of the motor).
In water-cooled screw compressors, the oil /

air cooler is replaced by a plate heat exchanger, and the air-to-air cooler is replaced
by a tube bundle heat exchanger. You can use
fresh water as cooling water. It is recommended to install a sand and a dirt filter before the cooling water preliminary flow.
104482 HSC 03/03
17
Maintenance schedule
7
Every week
500 h1
2 000h1
4 000 h1
6 000h1
8 000 h1
10 000 h1
After first commissioning
Drain the condensation

water (cf. chapter 6.5).
Check the oil level (cf.

chapter 6.2).
"
Interval
Application
Check the rotating direction (cf. chapter 3.4).
Original 2011-06-21
Before first commissioning
The intervals mentioned are experimental values. They can differ considerably
depending on the application conditions.
Check the V-belt (cf.

chapter 6.12).
Clean the proportional

controller nozzle (cf.
chapter 6.12).
Change oil (cf. chapter
6.3), mineral (factoryfilled).
Change oil (cf. chapter
6.3), synthetic.
Replace oil filter (cf.

chapter 6.4).
Check safety valves (cf.

chapter 6.7).
"
"
Clean the drain restrictor

(cf. chapter 6.11).
Clean the oil-aftercooler
(cf. chapter 6.6).
Check the suction filter
cartridge (cf. chapter
6.9).
Change the suction filter
cartridge (cf. chapter
6.9).
Change the oil highprecision separator cartridge (cf. chapter 6.8).
Tighten the screw connections (cf. chapter
6.14).
18
"
"
104482 HSC 03/03
Check the electric terminals (cf. chapter 6.15)
Relubricate/replace motor mounting (cf. chapter
6.16)
!
!
Measures carried out on

(date):
Original 2011-06-21
Measures carried out by

(name):
Key:
! Measure to be carried out:
" Measure to take whenever required.
Check at the manufacturer's works.
1
The required maintenance and inspection measures must be carried out on a yearly basis if
the hours of operation provided are not reached within a years period.
2
Check daily in dusty conditions and replace, if and when necessary.
104482 HSC 03/03
19
Trouble shooting
8
Trouble shooting
8.1
Malfunction, compressor generally

Danger
Trouble shooting may be carried out only by trained experts or by staff members of
HATLAPA Company. In all actions, please observe the fundamental safety instructions
(cf. chapter 1), the safety instructions for operation (cf. chapter 4), and the safety instructions for maintenance (cf. chapter 6).
The compressor does not start up.

Potential reasons
Actions
No connection to network.
Fuse has blown.
Original 2011-06-21
Network pressure is over cut-in pressure.

Defect in the pressure detector or cable
break.
The motor has broken down.
Temperature detector of the motor gives a
signal.
Check the connection to the mains.

Check the electric cable, switching units
and the motor.
Use time-lag fuses only.
Replace the fuse.
Reduce the pressure in the network.
Check cable, or replace pressure detector.
Check the electric system and the cables.
Replace the motor.
Refer to table Temperature detector of
the motor gives a signal.
Temperature detector of the motor gives a signal.

Potential reasons
Actions
Fault at the electric connection.
Ambient temperature is too high.

Damage on the compressor
Motor gets too hot due to high switching frequency.
Pressure detector has been set wrongly.
The clamping connections have come lose.
20
Check the electric connection for undervoltage and phase failure.

Check the conductor cross section.
Improve the room ventilation.
Select a cooler location.
Check bearing of the compressor and
gear set.
Check the pressure switching points.

Retighten the clamping connections.
104482 HSC 03/03
Trouble shooting
The switching frequency of the motor is too high.
Potential reasons
Actions
The compressed-air reservoir is too small.

Too much condensation water in the compressed-air reservoir / compressed-air ductwork system.
Use a larger compressed-air reservoir.

Drain the condensation water (refer to
chapter 6.5).
As a preventive measure, fit an automatic
condensation water drain system
(HATLAPA accessories).
Low delivery the setpoint pressure is not made.

Potential reasons
Actions
The suction filter is soiled.
Pipes and fittings are leaking.
Original 2011-06-21

The air demand is higher than the delivery
volume of the compressor.
Clean the suction filter.

Change the filter cartridge.
Tighten the screws and fittings.
Replace the seals.
Check the air demand.
Expand the compressed air supply.
The compressor turns too hot.

Potential reasons
Actions
Ambient temperature is too high.
The cooling air volume is not available or too

low.
104482 HSC 03/03
The ultimate pressure is too high.

Oil level too low.
Oil cooler is dirty.

Oil thermostat / thermostat is defective (only
in case of water cooling)
Improve the room ventilation.

Select a cooler location.
The space between fan and wall is to
small (cf. chapter 3.1 Mounting conditions).
Check cooler for dirt, and clean if necessary.
Top up oil (refer to chapter 6.2 'Checking
and topping up the oil level').
Clean the oil cooler.
Replace oil thermostat / thermostat.
21
Trouble shooting
Milky colour of oil, water drops in the oil.
Potential reasons
Actions
Water accumulation in the oil vessel (operating temperature is not reached because of
too short operation time)
Water accumulation in the oil vessel

(caused by humid conditions).
Change the oil immediately.

Retrofit a standby heating (HATLAPA accessory item).
Select warmer location.
Check design of the compressor.
Contact manufacturer as to oil specifications.
Change the oil immediately.
Select dry location.
The oil consumption is too high.

Potential reasons
Actions
The wrong oil has been used.
Original 2011-06-21
The compressor is too hot.

Oil escapes through oil high-precision separa-
tor cartridge.
Check the type of oil (cf. chapter 6.2

Types of oil), and replace, if and when
necessary.
See Table Compressor turns too hot.
Check suction compressor stage.
Check oil grade.
Air escapes when the compressor is at rest

Potential reasons
Actions
Pressure control valve is defective.
Replace pressure control valve.
The compressor is not relieved when switched off.

Potential reasons
Actions
Pressure detector or relief valve is defective.
Check pressure detector and relief valve

at intake regulator and replace if necessary.
The system shuts suddenly down
22
Potential reasons
Actions
Oil level too low.
Oil filter is clogged.
Refill oil (refer to chapter 6.2 'Checking

and topping up the oil level').
Replace oil filter cartridge.
104482 HSC 03/03
Trouble shooting
System fails to shift to no-load operation or fails to shut down.
Potential reasons
Actions
Pressure control valve is defective.
Original 2011-06-21
Safety valve blows off

Potential reasons
Actions
Pressure detector is set at a too high rate.

Pressure sensor is defect.
Safety valve is defective.
Suction stop valve does not close completely.
Solenoid valve is defective.
Oil high-precision separator cartridge is used
up.
Proportional controller nozzle is clogged
(only with proportional control).
Correct settings of pressure sensor.

Replace pressure sensor.
Replace safety valve.
Check springs of the suction stop valve.
Replace solenoid valve.
Replace oil high-precision separator cartridge.
Clean proportional controller nozzle.
System is operating but is producing no pressure

Potential reasons
Actions
Membrane in the adjust cylinder of the reduc-

ing damper is defective (depending on the
type of compressor)
The relief valve is defective.
Pressure control valve is leaky.
Replace membrane and check control

pressure in the pressure control valve.
Replace relief valve.
Abnormal noises
Potential reasons
Actions
Whistling sound caused by compressed air

escaping the supply network, fittings etc.
The safety valve is crackling.
Fan is knocking.
Grinding noises
104482 HSC 03/03
Remedy leaking points.

Replace the seals.
Tighten the screw connections.
Check pressure settings.
Check and replace if necessary safety
valve.
Check whether the fan does not scrape.
Damage in the mounting, compressor
needs repair.
Damage in the mounting, motor needs
repair (HATLAPA service).
23
Trouble shooting
8.2
Malfunction, PROCON control

Any malfunction will cause the compressor to shut down. This will last until the cause of
the malfunction is eliminated and the corresponding message is acknowledged:
Original 2011-06-21
24
Press key 6 () to enter the basic mode.

Keep then both keys 4 and 5 (/) pressed for at least 2 seconds.
Message
Type of malfunction
Cause
E01
Final temperature
E02
Emergency stop
E03
Temperature of the motor.
E04
E05
Direction of rotation
Start temperature
E06
E07
Development of system
pressure
Excess pressure
E08
E09
Temperature sensor
Network pressure sensor
E10
System pressure sensor
E11
Shutdown maintenance
ErE
EEPROM parameter
ErA
EEPROM adjustment
The value set under Final temperature error has

been reached or exceeded.
Emergency stop key 4 has been pressed; or cable
break.
The temperature of the motor winding is too high; or
cable break.
Wrong direction of rotation; or cable break.
The final temperature is not higher than the value
set under Start temperature.
The system pressure has not been developed within
the set period. V-belt may have broken.
The maximum allowable system pressure has been
exceeded.
Defect in the temperature sensor or cable break.
Defect in the network pressure detector or cable
break.
When parameter System pressure sensor = 1 and
system pressure sensor is defective; or cable break.
At least one maintenance interval has been exceeded by more than 100h and parameter active.
At least one parameter is outside the valid setting
range or EEPROM is defective.
Adjusted values of the analogue sensors are incorrect.
104482 HSC 03/03
Trouble shooting
8.3
Warnings, PROCON control

In case of a warning, the compressor is not shut down automatically. The message is
acknowledged in the same fashion as with malfunction.
Message
Type of malfunction
Cause
A01
Final temperature
A021
Air filter differential pressure

Oil filter differential pressure
Separator differential
pressure
Air filter service life
Oil service life
Oil filter service life
Separator service life
V-belt service life
The value set under Final temperature error (-5C)

has been reached or exceeded. If Error final temperature is active the warning is reset automatically.
Air filter is clogged; or cable break.
A03
A041
Original 2011-06-21
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
1
104482 HSC 03/03
Oil filter is clogged; or cable break.

Defect in the oil separator; or cable break.
Maintenance interval for the air filter has elapsed.
Maintenance interval for the oil has elapsed.
Maintenance interval for the oil filter has elapsed.
Maintenance interval for the separator has elapsed.
Maintenance interval for the V-belt has elapsed.
Optional
25
104482 HSC
03/03 # We reserve the right for technical changes.
Original 2011-06-21
HATLAPA
GmbH & Co.
Tornescher Weg 5 7,
25436 Uetersen
Telefon: ++49 4122 711- 0
Telefax: ++49 4122 711 - 104
Parts List
Screw Compressors
HSC 15
Original 2011-06-21
HSC 11
Building Year: 200_____
Serial No.:______________________________

06/05
Abluft
Outgoing air
Zuleitungsquerschnitt
Cable cross section
mm2
23
35
5G6
HSC 15
30
50
5G10
Z
Y
P
S
B
R
L
D
F
HSC 11
334
11
2200
HSC 15
346
15
3000
Ab einer Kanallnge von 4 m (Summe aus Ansaugkanal und Abluftkanal) wird der Einsatz eines
Ventilators notwendig. Dieser mu ebenfalls bei dem vorgegebenen Khlluftvolumenstrom eine
Frderdifferenz von ca. 80-100 Pa erreichen.
From a channel lenght of 4m (sum from intake port and air discharge channel) a ventilator
will be necessary. This one must also reach, with the given air-cooling flow capacity, a
delivery difference of approx. 80-100 Pa.
G-Druckluftanschlu
Outlet compressed air
Y-Netzanschlu
Cable inlet
Z-Kondensatabla
Condensation water drain
Abmessungen / Measurements
40 mm
Rahmen
schallgedmpft Abmessungen / Noise protected Measurement
Type
A
mm
C
mm
805 x 695 x 1170 160
575
L
mm
B
mm
H
mm
F
mm
K
mm
600 min.
m3/h
600 min.
Zuluft
Incoming air
max. Kanallnge
max. Channel lenght
kW
Khlluftmenge
Cool air flow
kg
lfllung
Oil filling
Type
Motorleistung
Motor capacity
Khlluftbedarf / Required cooling air
Gewicht
Weight
Original 2011-06-21
Der elektrische Anschlu und die Schutzmanahmen sind nach VDE und gem den Zusatzvorschriften des jeweiligen Elektrizittswerkes von einer autorisierten Fachkraft auszufhren.
Die angegebenen Zuleitungsquerschnitte sind Richtwerte fr eine max. Leitungslnge von 50m bei
einer Temperatur von 30C.
The electric connection and the protecting measures have to be carried out by an authorized skilled
specialist from the relevant power station, according to the VDE and the additional regulations.
The mentioned sectional drawings of the incoming supply are guidelines for a max. line lenght of
50m with a temperature of 30C.
HSC 11
Type
Sicherung (trge)
Slow fuse
Nennstrom 400V (3)

Rated current
Elektrischer Anschlu / Electrical connection
R
mm
S
mm
710
595
D
mm
T
mm
60
15
P
mm
U
mm
Werkstoff / Halbzeug / DIN
E
mm
I
mm
Y
Pg
M
mm
N
mm
670
21
200
265 1/4"
Z
Modell Nr. / Werkzeug Nr.
HSC 11
410
--
105 770
90
1"
Buchstabe
HSC 15
Mastab
Allgemeintoleranzen fr Schweikonstruktionen DIN 8570

fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
a in und ' fr Schenkellnge
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'
Diese Zeichnung darf nur zu den Zwecken

benutzt werden, wozu sie dem Empfnger
anvertraut ist, sie darf weder
vervielfltigt, noch dritten Personen,
insbesondere Konkurenzfirmen ohne unsere
Erlaubnis mitgeteilt oder zugnglich
gemacht werden.
Zerspanende Fertigung: Zulssige Abweichung fr Mae ohne Toleranzangabe in mm DIN 2768

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob
Nennbereiche (mm) der Freimae

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
Oberflchenbehandlung
nderung
17.2.03
Name
Zeichn.Nr.
Kster
HSC 11/15
6980000
Name
Original 2011-06-21

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 11/15
13.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6980001
Compressor-motor cpl.
Name
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.
pcs.
101
101
102
103
105
106
107
108
109
111
113
113
116
117
117
118
119
119
120
121
130
131
131
132
134
134
135
136
137
137
139
140
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
DS-Motor 11kW
DS-Motor 15kW
vibration dampers
Hexagon bolt
Wheel disc
Nut
Motor plate
Hexagon bolt
Spring washer
Nut
Fan belt disc 11kW
Fan belt disc 15kW
Fan hub
Fan complete 11kW
Fan complete 15kW
set screw
Fan blade 11kW
Fan blade 15kW
Hexagon bolt
Spring washer
screw compressor block
Clamping lever 11kW
Clamping lever 15kW
Cylinder screw
Pin 11kW
Pin 15kW
Compression spring
Screw
Pin 11kW
Pin 15kW
Compressor disc 7,5 bar 11 kW
Compressor disc 10bar 11kW
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
764038
764039
757102
700250
701407
703103
6980107
700243
7035070
703106
717601
717600
6980116
104743
104745
701350
104744
104746
700204
703512
765033
69151310
69271311
701018
6914134
6927134
6637480
6914136
6914137
69271371
6970139
6970140
140
141
141
142
142
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
151
155
155
155.9
155.9
156
156
157
157
160
161
161
162
163
164
165
166
166
168
169
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Order-No.

Fan belt 7,5bar 11kW
Fan belt 10bar 11kW
Fan belt 13bar 11kW
Fan belt 15bar 11kW
Fan belt 10bar 15kW
Fan belt 13bar 15kW
Fan belt 15bar 15kW
Clamping
Clamping roll 11kW
Clamping roll 15kW
Clamping roll complete 11kW
Clamping roll complete 15kW
Ball bearing 11kW
Ball bearing 15kW
Lock ring 11kW
Lock ring 15kW
Nut
Disc 11kW
Disc 15kW
Wheel disc
Under leg washer
Lock nut
Lock ring
Lock ring 11kW
Lock ring 15kW
Cylinder screw
Disc
6980140
6970141
6980141
6970142
6980142
707579
707524
707567
707467
707598
707593
707593
6927151
6613155
69141551
66131559
69141559
705062
705063
704109
704107
703104
705393
705383
701409
703413
703312
704011
704008
704018
700822
703423

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 11/15
13.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6980001
Compressor-motor cpl.
Name
Original 2011-06-21

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 11/15
13.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6980002
Frame and noise cover
Name
pcs.
10
201
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
Description
Shield
Frame complete
Frame
rubber base
Cylinder screw
Cylinder screw
Spring disc
Sidepanel front
Sidepanel right
Sidepanel left
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
15030014
6980201
6980210
708805
700820
700822
703604
6980215
6980216
6980217
218
219
220
221
222
222
223
224
228
230
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
6
4
1
Description
Order-No.
ventilation flap
cover plate
key to the control cubicle
protective grid
Wall ring 11kW
Wall ring 15kW
Nut
Cylinder screw
Cylinder screw
Cable connection
6980218
6980219
770051
715814
6975224
6980224
703102
700822
701004
762014
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 11/15
13.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6980002
Frame and noise cover
Name
434
431
427
467
Original 2011-06-21
437
305
304
303
308
306
302
300
309
312
307
313

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
09.06.05
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
HSC 11/15
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
108966
Electric-control Procon
Name
pcs.
3
3
300
302
303
304
305
306
307
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Assembly control PROCON kpl. 400V
Assembly control PROCON kpl. 440V
Control cubicle
Emergency stop
PROCON control
Covering cap
Cable form
Front foil for Procon control
Adhesive label
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
108971
108966
6980300
775105
775045
7750451
7750453
7750452
6970307
308
309
312
313
427
431
434
437
467
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Order-No.
Cylinder screw DIN 84 M4x10

Sealing rubber profile
power switch
ammeter
Temperature sensor
Coupling
Screw connection
Pressure detector
Reducer plug
702012
708825
108864
107077
775050
775073
752003
775048
6913467
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
09.06.05
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
HSC 11/15
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
108966
Electric-control Procon
Name
601
610
446
409
408
497
447
470
478
410
439
498
444
Original 2011-06-21
466
440
499
464
457
526
527
486
448
469
520
468
522
458
459
408
521
460
500
543
545
548

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
7/97
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
6980004
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Armatures-tubing, Separation system, Cooling system

HSC 11/15
pcs.
408
409
410
434
435
436
439
440
444
446
447
448
457
458
459
460
464
466
468
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
752057
711801
6970410
752003
705526
101423
706807
752139
752040
706343
6980447
706800
751208
752017
752148
6970460
6613464
755237
721201
469
470
478
478
486
497
498
499
500
520
521
526
527
543
545
548
601
610
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Screw connection
Pressure control valve
Separator compl.
Screw connection
Screw connection
Hose opt.
Seal ring Cu
Screw connection
Screw connection
Double nipple
Pipe 18
Seal ring Cu G1/8"
Non-return valve
Screw connection
Screw connection
Screw connection
Restrictor
Hose
non-return valve
Description
Order-No.
Screw connection
Oil temperature controller compl.
Oil filter - 7,5/10 bar
Oil filter - 13 bar/ 15 bar
Screw connection
Pipe
Pneumatic pipe
Pneumatic pipe
Container 8,5 l
Screw connection
Screw connection
Oil filler plug
Seal ring AI G1"
Cone cock
Angle G 3/("
oil drain hose
Combi-Cooler
Screw
752107
6613470
758101
758102
752094
6980497
6980498
6980499
6980500
6980520
752001
6633551
703705
751601
705833
107175
102521
702979
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
7/97
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
6980004
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Armatures-tubing, Separation system, Cooling system

HSC 11/15
539
455
Original 2011-06-21
405
454
406
421
424
465
443
467
468
411
442
449
443
463
462
452
423
Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 4-15
5.11.02
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6970410
Separator cpl.
Name
pcs.
410
405
406
411
421
423
424
442
443
449
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Description
Separator
Cylinder screw DIN912 M10x80
Wheel disc DIN6797 J10,5
Valve housing
Lock ring DIN471 A16
Seal
O-Ring
Emergency valve
Seal ring
Screw connection
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
6970410
701027
701407
6913411
704007
6913505
707753
751032
703701
752001
452
454
455
462
463
465
467
468
539
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Order-No.
Screw connection
Double nipple
Pipe
Screw
Seal ring
Screw
Screw
Seal ring
air/oil separator box
752057
6913454
6913455
705500
703700
705522
705526
703702
758160
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 4-15
5.11.02
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6970410
Separator cpl.
Name
472
482
473
489
484
480
481
483
493
Original 2011-06-21
494
495
488
476
477
484
478
479
mit 55-Einsatz
Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 4-15
12.10.00
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6613470
Oil-thermostat cpl.
Name
pcs.
470
472
473
476
477
478
478
479
480
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Description
Oil thermostat compl.
O-ring
Inlet for Oil thermostat compl.
Valve housing
Double nipple
Oil filter 7,5/10 bar
Oil filter 13/15 bar
Cylinder screw DIN912 M6x75
Compression spring
Order-No.
Pos.
6613470
707703
757817
6613476
6633477
758102
758101
701020
6613480
481
482
483
484
488
489
493
494
495
Description
Order-No.
Piston
Cylinder screw
O-ring
Spring disc
Screw connection
Screw connection
Cap
Screw
Seal ring
6613481
701006
707753
703605
752107
752112
6613493
705500
703700
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.
mit 55-Einsatz
Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
Benennung
Abma
nderung
HSC 4-15
12.10.00
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
6613470
Oil-thermostat cpl.
Name
730
709
738
729
745
731
728
726.1 727
726
720
Original 2011-06-21
733
719
708
707
705
703
717
725
702
735
730
701
750
711
714
713
716
715
712
704
710
706
730
737
738
725
721
736
739
722
732
740
724
752
718
Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
23.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
6913700
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Suction regulator without proportional control

HSC 4-15kW
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.
pcs.
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
718
717
719
720
721
722
724
725
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
2
Description
Suction controller
Suction body
Cylinder
Holder
O-ring
Compression spring
Seal 15x22x5
Seal 20x30x7
Piston
Restrictor
Compression spring
Lock ring
Valve cone
Valve ring
O-Ring 10x2,5
O-Ring 31,35x3,53
Steel ball
Seal
Lock ring
Cylinder screw
Spring disc
Hexagon bolt
Spring disc
Putting nipple
Double nipple
Order-No.
Pos.
6913700
6913701
6613702
6613703
707622
6613705
707867
708439
66137081
6913709
6613710
704112
6613712
6633713
707608
707751
707304
6913505
704108
701016
703605
700203
703605
2707099
706340
726
7261
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
735
736
737
738
739
740
745
750
752
750
752
750
752
790
Description
Order-No.
Cap
Relief valve complete
Membrane
Cylinder screw
Screw connection
Screw connection
Plastic pipe
Plastic pipe
Plastic pipe
Tee coupling
Sleeve
Seal ring
Solenoid valve
Plastic pipe
Spring disc
Air filter with set
Filter set
Air filter with set
Filter set
Air filter
Filter set
Maintenance set incl.
704,705,706,707,710,715,718,727
66137254
69157260
66137252
66137251
701004
707322
707372
100874
100874
100874
707321
6633737
703700
7054071
100874
703606
708975
758198
708976
708977
708988
758022
69137901

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
23.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
6913700
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Suction regulator without proportional control

HSC 4-15kW
736
724
740
730
739
732
733
730
731
709
738
745
Original 2011-06-21
742
731
741
729
728
727
726
726.1
738
724
734
720
705
719
723
735
708
746
725
702
725
724
730
731
750
711
714
713
716
715
712
704
703
717
707
710
706
748
747
721
722
701
752
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'
Buchstabe
718

gemacht werden.
Mastab
Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
23.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
69137001
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Suction regulator with proportional control

HSC 4-15kW
Original 2011-06-21
Pos.
pcs.
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
7261
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
3
2
1
1
Description
Order-No.
Pos.
pcs.
Suction controller complete

Suction body
Cylinder
Holder
O-Ring 40x3
Compression spring
Seal
Seal
Piston
Restrictor
Compression spring
Emergency ring
Valve cone
Valve ring
O-Ring 10x2,5
O-Ring 31,35x3,53
Steel ball
Emergency ring
Seal
Cylinder screw
Spring disc
Hexagon bolt
Spring disc
Seal
Putting nippple
Double nipple
Cap
69137001
6913701
6613702
6613703
707622
6613705
707867
708439
66137081
6913709
6613710
704112
6613712
6633713
707608
707751
707304
704108
6913505
701016
703605
700203
703605
6633736
2707099
706340
66137254
69157260
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
738
739
740
741
742
745
746
747
748
750
752
750
752
750
752
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
790
Description
Order-No.
Membrane
Cylinder screw
In screw connection
Angle putting connection
Plastic pipe
Plastic pipe
Plastic pipe
Plastic pipe
Tee coupling
Seal ring
Solenoid valve
Plastic pipe
Adapter
Putting nippple
Spring disc
Reduce plug
Connecting screw
Seal ring
Air filter with set
Air filter with set
Air filter
Air filter with set
Air filter
Air filter with set
Maintenance set incl.
704,705,706,707,710,715,718,727
66137252
66137251
701004
707322
707320
100874
100874
100874
100874
707321
703700
7054071
100874
6913741
27070991
703606
8759
705500
703700
708975
758198
708976
708977
708988
758022
69137901

Buchstabe
Mastab
fr Lngenmae
Genauigkeitsgrad
A
B
C
l in mm
bis 30
1
1
1
Winkelmae
Nennbereich l
ber 30
bis 120
ber 120
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
1
2
3
1
2
4
2
3
6
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
bis 315
ber 315
bis 1000
3
4
8
4
6
11
20'
45'
1
15'
30'
45'
ber 1000
10'
20'
30'

gemacht werden.

Genauigkeitsgrad
fein
mittel
grob
sehr grob

ber 3 bis 6
ber 0,5 bis 3
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,05
0,1
0,3
0,5
ber 6 bis 30
0,1
0,2
0,5
1
ber 30
bis 120
0,15
0,3
0,8
1,5
ber 120
bis 400
ber 400
bis 1000
ber 1000
bis 2000
ber 2000
bis 4000
0,2
0,5
1,2
2,5
0,3
0,8
2
4
0,5
1,2
3
6
2
4
8
Pama
Datum
Datum
Gez.
Gepr.
23.01.03
Name
Kster
Zeichn.Nr.
Name
69137001
Benennung
Abma
nderung
Die
Mae werden
besonders geprft
Ersatz fr
Suction regulator with proportional control

HSC 4-15kW
Schaltplne Schraubenkompressoren
Connection diagram - screw compressor
4 37
Original 2011-06-21
HSC
Jahr/Building Year: 200_____
Serien Nr/SerialNo.:______________

E03071606 b - 06/05
Frequence
5G4
5G6
50A
5G10
29,3A
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
nderung
Name
Kster
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Ers.d.
Ben.
E990903
775089
22,0 kW
400-440V
5G10
50A
5G25
55,0A
63A
E990927
775024
30,0 kW
5G25
68,0A
80A
E990927
775024
37,0 kW
5G35
81,0A
100A
E990928
7750281
45,0 kW
4G50
99,0A
125A
E990929
7750281
55,0 kW
4G70
134,0A
160A
E030222
7750291
75,0 kW
Schaltschrank Daten
Dates of control cabinet
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Ort:
Anlage:
Folge
Blatt
verknpft mit Exel-Liste E03071608.xls
A t t ent i o n !
Le dimensionnement de la conduite dalimentation, ainsi que de t ous les cblages externes, a

lieu en propre responsabilit de la socit lectrique excutant ces travaux.
Avant mise en service et en cas de travaux dentretien il f aut serrer les vis de contact, ou bien
vrifier sils sont bien fixs.
Avant mise en service il faut vrifier la tension et f rquence ainsi que les valeurs de cosigne de
la protection du moteur et du relais temporis.
Inf o r mat io ns imp o r t ant es!
5G16
41,0A
50 - 60 Hz
36,0A
50A
230V / 19V / 10V
A t t ent io n !
5G2,5
35A
21,7A
3/PE 50-60Hz 400-440V
E990903
A cht ung !
5G2,5
25A
15,3A
E990701
775089
18,5 kW
The dimensioning of the conducting cable as well as all external cables are the responsibility
of the electrician ef fect ing the wiring.
Cble d'alimentat ion
20A
11,3A
E990701
775087
15,0 kW
Die Dimensionierung der Zuleit ung sowie alle ext ernen Verkabelungen erfolgt in Eigenverantwortung der ausf hrenden Elekt rof irma.
Zuleitung
16A
8,5A
E990802
775087
11,0 kW
Before initial st arting and during maintenance works, all contact screws have t o be checked
and retightened respectively.
Frequency
Supply line
Frequenz
Branchement de courant
Fusible de puissance
E990802
7,5 kW
775083
Vor Inbetriebnahme und bei Wartungsarbeiten sind alle Kontakt schrauben nachzuziehen
bzw. auf festen Sitz zu kontrollieren.
Connecting current
Anschlustrom
E990802
5,5 kW
775083
Before initial st arting, volt age and frequency as well as t he values at which motor protect ion
and t ime relay are set have to be checked.
Preliminary locking device
max. Vorsicherung
Tension de gchette
4 kW
775083
Vor Inbetriebnahme sind Spannung und Frequenz sowie die Einstellwerte der
M ot orschut z und Zeitrelais zu prfen.
Control voltage
Steuersspannung
Tension du moteur
Alimentat ion
C har g es d e co nnexi o n
Dessin No.
EDV No.
I mp o r t ant d i r ect io ns !
M otor volt age
M ot orspannung
Pr o jet d o nnes
Compresseur hlice
W icht i g e Hinweise !
C o nnect ed lo ad
Zeichnung Nr
Power supply
Drawing No.
EDV - Nr
Einspeisung
EDV - No.
Schraubenverdichter
A nschl u w er t e
Pr o ject D at a
screw compressor
Pr o jekt D at en
Schaltschrank Daten / dates of control cabinet / Donnes Armoire, instruments
Original 2011-06-21
1.1
2
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
nderung
Name
Kster
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
PROCON A1
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Gehuse 01
housing 01
Carter 01
Ers.d.
620mm
S1
Ben.
Original 2011-06-21
Frontansicht
front view
3P1
3Q1
EDV Nr.:
Amperemeter
ammeter
amperemeter
Hauptschalter
Power switch
interrupteur
principal
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
290mm
Tiefe: 170mm
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
2
3
06.06.05
Datum
"a"
3F0
nderung
Bauseits
at site
L3
L2
L3
PE
see attachment
siehe Anhang
PE
Name
Kuester
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
06/05
Datum
Alimentation
voir annexe
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
Castouche fusible
puissance de branchement nominale
Courant en rgime
power supply
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
back up fuse max.
rating
current rated
Einspeisung
3/PE 50-60Hz/400-440V
Sicherungseinsatz max.
Nennanschluleistung
Nennbetriebstrom
L1
L2
L1
Motorstromrelais
motor power relais
relais motoris
Option
U1
V1
W1
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
* 3F6
7.7
7K1
3T2
5.2
96
95
PE
PE
Ers.d.
3M1
1X1
98
97
3P1
Commande compresseur hlice
Alimentation
2
Antrieb Schraubenkompressor
screw compressor drive
Einspeisung
power supply
1X1
3Q1
Hauptschalter
Power switch
interrupteur
principal
0
4
7.5
7K2
W2
U2
Ben.
V2
Original 2011-06-21
1
4
3
6
Einspeisung / Antrieb
power supply / drive
Alimentation / Commande
7.6
7K3
1X1
230
12
11
3F3
400 - 440
3F1
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
3F2
PE
3F5
3S1
3T1
EDV Nr.:
PE
Transformator
transformer
transformateur
19
3F4
10
Ort:
Anlage:
Transformator
transformer
transformateur
Folge
Blatt
3.1
4
/4.0
/7.0
/4.0
/4.0
/4.0
/4.0
PE /4.0
L10
L11
L50
L51
L60
L61
L3
L2
L1
L51
L50
L60
3.9/
3.9/
3.9/
nderung
Datum
PE
L61
3.9/
3.9/
L11
3.9/
Name
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
5/03
Datum
0V / 10V AC
0V / 19V AC
19V AC
10V AC
230V 50Hz
4A1
32
33
31
11
0X7
12
13
0X3
30
10
29
28
Schnittestelle RS232/RS485 nicht auf Klemmen verdrahtet

interface RS232/RS485 not wired on clamps
interface RS232/RS485 pas cbl sur pinces
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
PROCON - Steuerelektronik
PROCON - control electronic
PROCON - lectronique de commande
27
26
Ers.d.
0X6
25
0X2
24
23
22
Ben.
20
19
bl
18
ga
16
0X1
0X4
17
15
br
PROCON-control electronic
PROCON-Steuerelektronik
PROCON-lectronique de commande
0X5
21
Typ / type / Type :

PROCON Electronic
lectronique PROCON
sw
Original 2011-06-21
EDV Nr.:
14
gr-ge
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE /5.0
L11
4
5
nderung
4.9/
Datum
PE
Name
5/03
Hall
21
4.5
PE
23
0X6
dfaut arrt d'urgence
4.3
Urspr.
PE
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
24
PE
Option
avertissement filtre air
4.3
0X6
Warnung
Luftfilter
warning
air filter
Option
1X1
8
25
PE
Ben.
10
26
PE
sparateur fin
4.3
0X6
Warnung
Feinabscheider
warning
fine seperator
Option
1X1
Digital-Eingnge
digital input
entres digitales
filtre huile
4.3
0X6
Warnung
lfilter
warning
oil filter
Option
1X1
12
27
PE
EDV Nr.:
14
28
PE
Option
Xxx marche / arrt
4.3
0X6
Fern
Ein / Aus
remote
on / of
Option
1X1
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Option
GLW: charge / marche vide
4.3
0X6
GLW:
Last / Leerlauf
load / unload
Option
1X1
25
13
1X1
3
11
1X1
1X1
1X1
32
1X1
31
Strung
Not - Aus
malfunction
emergency stop
1X1
3S1
29
Versorg.spg. 24VDC
Digital Eingnge
digital inputs
4.3
0X6

entres numriques
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
dfaut PTC
temprature du moteur
0X5
Strung PTC
Motortemperatur
malfunction PTC
temp. motor
1X1
96
95
4.5
PE
5R2
* 3F6
1X1
0X5
Option
rserve dfaut PTC
Bearb.
Norm
20
Reserve
Strung PTC
reserve
malfunction PTC
Datum
Gepr.
Option
1X1
5R1
1X1
22
Versorg.spg. 12VDC
Motortemperatur
PTC
motor temp. PTC
4.5
0X5

temprature du moteur PTC
rt
rt
sw
gr-ge
rs
bl
vi
br
ws
Original 2011-06-21
ga
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE /7.0
5
6
nderung
Datum
Name
5/03
Hall
Norm
15
1X1
4.5
16
sonde de temprature
KTY -20 +150C
4.5
0X4
Temperaturfhler
KTY -20 bis +150C
temp. transductor
KTY -20 bis +150C
16
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
sonde de temprature
KTY -20 +150C
0X4
4.5
15
-2
17
17
0X4
Netzdruck
4-20mA
0 bis 16 bar
line pressure
18
Ers.d.
Ben.
A1
conduite d'alimentation
capteur de pression 4-20mA
4.5
0X4
Zuleitg.Druckfhler
4-20mA
feed line
19
Analog-Eingnge
analog inputs
entre analogique
pression du rseau
4-20mA 0 16 bar
Option
pression du systme
4-20mA 0 16 bar
18
A2
4.5
+1
6A1
Druckfhler
capteur de pression
4.5
0X4
Systemdruck
4-20mA
0 bis 16 bar
system pressure
Option
1X1
6A0
Druckfhler
capteur de pression
ws
ga
6R1
Temperaturfhler
KTY -20 bis +150C
temp. transductor
KTY -20 bis +150C
br
0X4
blindage
entre analogique
Bearb.
Gepr.
14
gr-ge
Schirmung
Analog Eingnge
screening
analog inputs
Datum
sw
Original 2011-06-21
bl
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
6
7
10.11.03
Datum
nderung
L10
PE
Option 7Y2
5.9/
3.9/
Name
Kster
5/03
Hall
Bearb.
Norm
Gepr.
1X1
22
23
Urspr.
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
Steuerventil
control valve
soupape de distribution
45/55/75kW
(45/55/75kW)
* Option
* 7Y2
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
NO
collective indicat.
change over cont.
NO
4.4
0X2
dfaut collectif
inverseur NO
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
21
4.4
4.4
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
NC
collective indicat.
change over cont.
NC
0X2
0X2
Sammelstrung
Wechsler
C
collective indicat.
change over cont.
C
dfaut collectif
inverseur NC
dfaut collectif
inverseur C
Datum
0V 50Hz
1
4
26
24
PE
Entlastungsventil
relief valve
soupape de dcharge
1X1
7Y1
1X1
Lastventil
load valve
4.2
0X3
soupape de charge
Ben.
1
3
5
21
7K2
.6
2 3.4
4 3.5
6 3.5
22 .6
A2
A1
22
21
Relais-Ausgnge
relay outlets
sortie de relais
10
Dreieckschtz
delta contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur en delta
7K3
Original 2011-06-21
1
3
5
21
7K3
.5
7K2
11
2 3.6
4 3.6
6 3.6
22 .5
A2
A1
22
21
Sternschtz
star contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur en toile
EDV Nr.:
7K1
1
3
5
2 3.3
4 3.3
6 3.3
A2
A1
1X1
E03071606 b
26
27
Wasserstopventil
water stop valve
soupape d'arrt d'eau
(Wasserkhlung)
(water-cooling)
(refroidissement l'eau)
* Option
1X1
* 7Y3
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
12
Netzschtz
main contactor
4.2
0X3
contacteur principal
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE
L10
7
8
06.06.05
10.11.03
Datum
Option 7Y2
nderung
0V 50Hz
running/pot.free
3.9/
L10
5.9/ PE
Kuester
Name
Kster
30
7K1
31
Norm
Gepr.
Bearb.
Datum
Hall
5/03
Ein (Motor luft) Pot.freie Kontakte

on (running) potential-free contacts
29
7K1
28
14
11
7K4
Last (Leerlauf) Pot.freie Kontakte

load (idle) potential-free contacts
* Option
27
Urspr.
Ers.f.
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
32
Ers.d.
*7K4
A1
Steuerventil
control valve
soup de distribution
* Option (45/55/75kW)
A2
Ben.
1X1
1X1
26
24
Original 2011-06-21
Relais-Ausgnge
relay outlets
sortie de relais
PE
EDV Nr.:
Stillstandheizung
Motor
auxiliary heating
motor
L11
26
230V
33
22
21
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
Stillstandheizung
Motor
auxiliary heating
motor
* Option
7K1
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
PE
L10
7-1
8
nderung
Klemmenplan
/ terminal strip
HOP.KP02
W6A0
W6R1
W0X5
W0X4
W0X1
Leistenbezeichnung
Datum
Name
Kabelname
Kabelname
1X1
Norm
Hall
Bearb.
Gepr.
5/03
Datum
Kabeltyp
Zielbezeichnung
Anschlu
Klemmennummer
Zielbezeichnung
Anschlu
Kabeltyp
4mm
Seite/Pfad
Funktionstext / function text

3Q1
3Q1
3Q1
0/L1
0/L2
0/L3
0/PE
PE
0/N
Ers.f.
5R2
5R1
5R1
1
2
7K1
7K1
7K1
3.0
3T1
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.1
0X5
22
0X5
rt
20
5.1
sw
5.1
3
5R2
Kompressor / compressor
PROCON 4 - 75 kW
Urspr.

3
4
SH
W6R1
3
Ers.d.
SH
W6A0
5.2
0X5
21
3S1
br
5.2
31
0X6
5.4
24
gr-ge
5.4
5.5
0X6
25
rs
5.5
5.6
0X4
14
gr-ge
6.3
6R1
15
6R1
14
13
12
11
10
Ben.
SH
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
6.5
0X6
26
bl
5.6
5
1X1
16
-2
17
+1
18
EDV Nr.:
E03071606 b
SKP-E 4 - 75 kW
7Y1
24
25
5.7
0X6
27
vi
5.7
5.8
0X6
28
0X4
ga
15
0X4
5.8
br
16
0X4
6.3
sw
17
6A1
6.3
ws
6.4
A1
0X2
6.4
0X2
7.2
0X2
7.2
7
32
3S1
26
6A0
6A0
7Y1
0X3
7.2
0X6
7.4
23
A2
7K2
3T1
rt
5.3
7.4
3.4
3T1
PE
Antrieb Kolbenkompressor
piston compressor drive
Original 2011-06-21
SH
Druckfhler pressure
transductor
21
22
23
PE
3M1
PE
Transformator
transformer
PE
4A1-0X1
3.7
gr-ge
Anlage:
Ort:
Folge
Blatt
5.5
PE
5.4
PE
5.3
PE
5.2
PE
5.2
PE
5.6
PE
8
for HATLAPA HSC
Screw Compressors
177469
Rev. 08.10
1. General
Moving parts require the correct lubricant. Good quality lubrication oils increase the service life
of the compressor.

Above all, compressor oils must have good lubrication properties for which their viscosity is
highly important. HATLAPA recommends lubrication oils within the following range:
ambient temperature
0 .. +25 C
constantly over 25 C
(engine room of sea going ships)
Original 2011-06-21
viscosity class
ISO VG 46
ISO VG 68
2
viscosity at 40C
41 .. 51 mm /s
61 .. 75 mm /s
flash point
> 200 C
> 200 C
pourpoint
at least 5 C under the lowest

ambient temperature
The screw compressor oils should have low tendency to ageing and foaming.
3. Guarantee
BP
ENERSYN RC-S 68
CASTROL
AIRCOL SR-68
CETUS PAO 68
BARELF SM-68 / DACNIS SH-68
RARUS SHC-1026
SHELL
CORENA AS-68
specification.
Service


Original 2011-06-21



siguintes datos:


Naval e
Service

anliegender Liste.
directly
Original 2011-06-21



Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Headquarters:

Tornescher Weg 5-7
25436 Uetersen
GERMANY
Phone: +49 4122 711-0
Mobile: +49 172 9 813292
Fax:
+49 4122 711-104 Sales
711-330 Service
Original 2011-06-21

UNITED KINGDOM
Phone: +44 1202 8531-80
Fax: +44 1202 8531-91 Sales
8531-90 Spares

o Australia

Tel: +61 3 953213-97 / 953213-86

Fax: +61 3 953214-13
x Belgium
Marine & Industrie

B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 82740-91

Fax: +32 3 82740-95
mardus@skynet.be
o Belgium/
Luxembourg
Service Hydro n.v.

B-2030 Antwerp
Tel: +32 3 54640-80

Fax: +32 3 54640-81
x Brazil

Rua Visc Inhama
RJ, 20091-007
Tel: +55 21 2233-1489

Cell: +55 21 9983-3190
Fax: +55 21 2516-7543
o Brazil

Tel: +55 13 322646-86

Fax: +55 13 322646-80
Page 1
Original 2011-06-21
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
x Bulgaria
Ecatdan ApS
1, Studentska Str.
9010 Varna
Tel: +359 52 383476

xo Canada

29-113 Cushman Rd
St. Catherines
Ontario, L2M 6S9
Tel: +1 905 688 4922 (office)

Fax: +1 905 688 9028
Cell: +1 905 650 3160
o Chile
Eurotecnica Ltda
Lincoyn # 973
4030485 Conception
Tel: +56 41 22532-75

Fax: +56 41 22532-76
x+ China

Nanjing 210039
Tel: +86 25 52 26 27 90
Fax: +86 25 86 70 33 10
x China

Shanghai 200060
Tel:
+86 21 623296-71
Mobile: +86 137 0 17473 14
Fax:
+86 21 623039-71
xo Croatia

Planciceva 4
21000 Split
Tel: +385 21 385267

Fax: +385 21 385267
mirko.nava@inet.hr
x Cyprus
M.I.E. Services Ltd

The Hawk Building
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 889801

Fax: +357 25 763902
info@mieserv.cy.net
x Cyprus
HATLAPA EastMed Ltd

The Hawk Building
3032 Limassol
Tel: +357 25 8897-00

Fax: +357 25 3660-88
x Denmark
A/S Kelvin Hughes

Gngehusvej 280
DK-2970 Horsholm
Tel:
+45 8734 2270
Mobile: +45 2060 9405
Fax:
+45 8611 2726
x Egypt

Tel: +20 3 58585-70

Fax: +20 3 58285-87
a.alyan@amcoeg.com
x Finland

Permiehenkatu 11
20810 Turku
Tel: +358 2 2749640

Fax: +358 2 2351499
info@epomare.fi
x France
Wenex Equipments SA
92100 Boulogne
Tel: +33 1 411023-30

Fax: +33 1 411023-45
o Germany
Friedrich Jung Fa.

Tel: +49 203 82898

Fax: +49 203 57085-24
Page 2
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
47119 Duisburg
xo Great Britain

Tel: +44 1202 8531-80

Fax:+44 1202 8531-90
info@hatlapa-uk.com
xo Greece
M.I.E. Co. Ltd.

Kanari 1
18537 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4598-800

Fax: +30 210 4539-234
commercial@mie.gr
o Greece

18863 Piraeus
Tel: +30 210 4323600/1-2

Fax: +30 210 43127-70
info@injegov.gr
xo India
Dolphin Consultants
35 Mittal Chambers
Mumbai 400021
Tel: +91 22 302877-11 to 15 (5 Lines)

Fax:+91 22 302877-10
info@dolphinc.in
xo Indonesia

Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
+ Indonesia

Jakarta 12160
Tel: +62 21 72555-41

Fax: +62 21 72555-46
xo Iran
Iran IMEXEN Co.

Tehran 19668
Tel: +98 21 22000008

Fax: +98 21 22004849
info@imexen.com
xo Italy
RTN Srl
Loc. C Verde
Tel: +39 0523 869611

Fax: +39 0523 861077
info@retenav.it
xo Korea
Dong Sung Co.

Tel: +82 51 61012-33

Fax: +82 51 61012-32
xo Korea

1212, Jisa-dong
Gangseo-gu, Busan
Tel: +82 51 97292-66

Fax: +82 51 97292-70
x Lebanon

The Hawk Building
Tel: +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
x Middle East
Tel: +357 25 366077

Fax.:+357 25 366088
for steering gear

Bahrain, Kuwait,
Page 3
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
Original 2011-06-21
Jordan, Israel
xo Netherlands
Hamworthy KSE B.V.

Aploniastraat 33
3084 CC Rotterdam
Tel: +31 10 46247-77

Fax.: +31 10 41590-46
xo Norway

0117 Oslo
Tel: +47-918-08-546
xo Poland

Mostnika Str.10-12
70-672 Szczecin
Tel: +48 91 4623236 / 4623383

Fax: +48 91 4623345
xo Portugal

28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

x Romania
XEREX SRL
Tel/Fax: +40 236 462056

Mobile: +40 723 533596
ilniczky@yahoo.com
x Singapore

Tel:
+65 65 628086 / 628088
Mobile: +65 96 339381
Fax: +65 65 628099
info@hatlapa.com.sg
xo Spain

28033 Madrid
Tel/Fax: +34 91 3831577

xo Sweden
Bvik Marin AB
Hlleflundregatan 12
Tel: +46 31 290075

info@bovikmarin.se
x Syria

Tel : +357 25 889800

Fax : +357 25 346626
x Taiwan
SHIPCARE Co. Ltd.

Taipei 10036
Tel: +886 2 2383-2255

Fax: +886 2 2383-1020
x U.S.A.
MarinSOLVE LLC
PO Box 2176
Clifton, NJ 07015
Tel: +1 973 24657 26

Fax: +1 973 75503 33
x U.S.A.
CS Controls
101 Dickson Road
Houma, LA 70363
Tel: +1 985 876 6040

Fax: +1 985 876 0751
x U.S.A.
Mariner Hub LLC

Houston, TX 77008
Tel: +1 713 822 1252

Page 4
Service Stations
Spare Parts
Agencies
TENAVAL
2, Piso Ofic 2-B
Caracas
Original 2011-06-21
x Venezuela
Page 5
Tel: +58 212 285-2344

+58 212 285-7822
+58 212 285-7631
Fax: +58 212 285-7776

Air Compressor - Hatlapa Type v105

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Air Compressor - Hatlapa Type v105

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Documentation

Deck Machinery - Compressors - Steering gears

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

Final Drawings / Specification

Important Information on this

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

Information on Manuals ........................................................................................................................... 3

Signs Used .............................................................................................................................................. 5

Intended Use ........................................................................................................................................... 5

Ban on Arbitrary Modifications................................................................................................................. 5

General Safety Instructions ..................................................................................................................... 6

Safety Equipment .................................................................................................................................... 6

10 Instruments for Operating Surveillance ................................................................................................... 6

14 Safety Instructions for Maintenance and Repairs ................................................................................... 9

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

All rights reserved.

inappropriate use of the equipment,

neglect of the provisions of this documentation,

improper assembly, operation or maintenance,

operation of the equipment with ineffective protective devices,

arbitrary functional or constructive alteration of the equipment,

removal of parts or installation of spare parts or additional components,

repairs which have not been authorised by HATLAPA,

impact of foreign bodies in case of catastrophes or Force Majeure.

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

Persons are defined as follows:

An electrician has electro-technical skills gained by respective education,

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

Sign for 'Pay Attention'

Sign for Information

7 Ban on Arbitrary Modifications

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

8 General Safety Instructions

Recognised technical regulations for safe and professional work

Regional and internal regulations

Regulations from the responsible classification authority

Safety signs and indicator plates on the machine/system

Environmental protection regulations

10 Instruments for Operating Surveillance

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

11 Safety Instructions for Assembly

12 Additional Safety Instructions for Electrical Installation

the electricity supply cannot be reconnected unintentionally or without

you must under no circumstances touch the electrical connection points,

the inspection equipment must be in good condition and safe to operate,

you must not wear any jewelry on fingers or wrists,

you must stand on insulated ground.

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

13 Safety Instructions for Operation and Service

Caution! Drawing in into moving parts!

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

14 Safety Instructions for Maintenance and Repairs

Caution! Burn hazard!

Important Information on this Documentation and Safety

cleaning agents, and cloths with cleaning agents on them.

MAIN STARTING AIR/

EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT V105 30 BAR

STANDARD COMPRESSOR DRAWINGS

CONTROL AND OPERATING PHILOSOPHY

Standard Compressor Fittings:

Low Oil Level switch with Alarm and Shutdown feature.

Loose Supply Items: